Omron L7 manual
Reklama
Reklama
TOMCC71067600AA-OY.qxd 01.10.2003 10:32 Seite 1
Cat. No.
TOEPC71067605-03-OY
VARISPEED L7
The frequency inverter for the lifts
USER´S MANUAL
OMRON YASKAWA MOTION CONTROL B.V. – Wegalaan 65 – 2132 JD Hoofddorp – The Netherlands phone: + 31 (0) 23 568 74 00 – fax: + 31 (0) 23 568 74 88 – www.omronyaskawa.com
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
Cat. No. TOEPC71067605-0
2-OY
Table of Contents
1
2
Handling Inverters ................................................................. 1-1
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ..............................................................1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site .............................................1-9
Installation Orientation and Space .............................................................1-10
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............................................ 1-11
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/
LED Monitor and Front Cover ....................................................................1-13
Wiring ...................................................................................... 2-1
I
II
3
4
EN81-1 Conform Wiring with One Motor Contactor .................................. 2-21
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................................................ 2-24
LED Monitor / Digital Operator and Modes ..........................3-1
Digital Operator JVOP-160-OY ................................................................... 3-3
Start Up Procedure .................................................................4-1
5
6
User Parameters .................................................................... 5-1
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..........................................5-3
User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode .............................................5-4
Parameter Settings by Function ........................................... 6-1
Carrier Frequency Derating and
III
IV
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ......................................... 6-20
Speed Detection and Speed Limitation ..................................................... 6-26
Improving the Operation Performance ...................................................... 6-29
Reducing the Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function) ....................... 6-29
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) (Closed Loop Vector only) ................................... 6-32
Stabilizing Speed (Automatic Frequency Regulator) (Open Loop Vector) ................... 6-34
Improving the Leveling Accuracy by Leveling Speed Slip Compensation ................... 6-37
Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors (External Fault Function) ................. 6-51
7
Setting Motor Parameters for Induction Motors (Motor 1 and 2) .................................6-59
Digital Operator/LED Monitor Functions ....................................................6-64
Memobus Communications .......................................................................6-83
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................................................7-2
If Peripheral Devices are Influenced by the Starting or Running Inverter ....................7-21
If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates When the Inverter is Running .......................7-21
V
VI
8
9
Maintenance and Inspection .................................................8-1
Specifications .........................................................................9-1
AC Reactors for EN 12015 Compatibility .................................................... 9-8
10 Appendix ...............................................................................10-1
Warnings
CAUTION
Cables must not be connected or disconnected, nor signal tests carried out, while the power is switched on.
The Varispeed L7 DC bus capacitor remains charged even after the power has been switched off. To avoid an electric shock hazard, disconnect the frequency inverter from the mains before carrying out maintenance. Then wait for at least 5 minutes after all LEDs have gone out.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the inverter. It contains semiconductors, which are not designed for such high voltages.
Do not remove the digital operator while the mains supply is switched on. The printed circuit board must also not be touched while the inverter is connected to the power.
Never connect general LC/RC interference suppression filters, capacitors or overvoltage protection devices to the inverter input or output.
To avoid unnecessary over current faults, etc., being displayed, the signaling contacts of any contactor or switch fitted between inverter and motor must be integrated into the inverter control logic
(e.g. baseblock).
This is absolutely imperative!
This manual must be read thoroughly before connecting and operating the inverter. All safety precautions and instructions for use must be followed.
The inverter must be operated with the appropriate line filters, following the installation instructions in this manual and with all covers closed and terminals covered.
Only then will adequate protection be provided. Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
VII
VIII
Safety Precautions and Instructions
1. General
Please read these safety precautions and instructions for use thoroughly before installing and operating this inverter. Also read all of the warning signs on the inverter and ensure they are never damaged or removed.
Live and hot inverter components may be accessible during operation. Removal of housing components, the digital operator or terminal covers runs the risk of serious injuries or damage in the event of incorrect installation or operation. The fact that frequency inverters control rotating mechanical machine components can give rise to other dangers.
The instructions in this manual must be followed. Installation, operation and maintenance may only be carried out by qualified personnel. For the purposes of the safety precautions, qualified personnel are defined as individuals who are familiar with the installation, starting, operation and maintenance of frequency inverters and have the proper qualifications for this work. Safe operation of these units is only possible if they are used properly for their intended purpose.
The DC bus capacitors can remain live for about 5 minutes after the inverter is disconnected from the power. It is therefore necessary to wait for this time before opening its covers. All of the main circuit terminals may still carry dangerous voltages.
Children and other unauthorized persons must not be allowed access to these inverters.
Keep these Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use readily accessible and supply them to all persons with any form of access to the inverters.
2. Intended Use
Frequency inverters are intended for installation in electrical systems or machines. The systems and machines must be correspondent wiht the relevant directives and standards. Relevant guidelines like Low Voltage Directives , Machinery Directives , Emc Directives and other s are to be kept.
The Inverters may be put into operation, when the systems and machines in whitch they are inrested to the guidelines and laws correspondent.
CE marking is carried out to EN 50178, using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appropriate installation instructions.
3. Transportation and storage
The instructions for transportation, storage and proper handling must be followed in accordance with the technical data.
4. Installation
Install and cool the inverters as specified in the documentation. The cooling air must flow in the specified direction. The inverter may therefore only be operated in the specified position (e.g. upright). Maintain the specified clearances. Protect the inverters against impermissible loads. Components must not be bent nor insulation clearances changed. To avoid damage being caused by static electricity, do not touch any electronic components or contacts.
5. Electrical Connection
Carry out any work on live equipment in compliance with the national safety and accident prevention regulations. Carry out electrical installation in compliance with the relevant regulations. In particular, follow the installation instructions ensuring electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), e.g. shielding, grounding, filter
arrangement and laying of cables. This also applies to equipment with the CE mark. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the system or machine to ensure conformity with EMC limits.
Contact your supplier or Omron-Yaskawa Motion Control representative when using leakage current circuit breaker in conjunction with frequency inverters.
In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the relevant safety and accident prevention regulations. The frequency inverter hardware must not be modified.
CAUTION
If a PM motor is turned by any external force, high voltage is generated in the windings.
• During wiring, maintenance or inspection make sure, that the motor is stopped and can not turn.
• If the inverter is turned off and the motor must be turned, make sure that motor and inverter output are electrically disconnected.
6. Inverter Setup
This L7 inverter can drive induction motors as well as permanent magnet motors.
Always select the appropriate control mode:
•
•
For induction motors use V/f, Open Loop Vector or Closed Loop Vector control (A1-01 = 0, 2 or 3).
For permanent magnet motors use no other control mode than Closed Loop Vector for PM (A1-01 = 6).
A wrong control mode selection can damage the inverter and motor.
If a motor is exchanged or operated the first time, always set up the motor control relevant parameters using the nameplate data or perform autotuning. Do not change the parameters recklessly. To ensure a safe operation with PM motors always set the:
•
•
correct motor data the PG open detection parameters
•
•
the speed deviation detection parameters the over acceleration detection parameters
Wrong parameter settings can cause dangerous behavior or motor and inverter damage.
CAUTION
If a permanent magnet motor is used, the peak current capability of the motor should always be higher than the maximum inverter output current in order to prevent a demagnetization of the motor.
for details about the correct start up procedure.
7. Notes
The Varispeed L7 frequency inverters are certified to CE, UL, and c-UL.
IX
X
EMC Compatibility
1. Introduction
This manual was compiled to help system manufacturers using Omron-Yaskawa Motion Control frequency inverters to design and install electrical switch gear. It also describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC Directive. The manual's installation and wiring instructions must therefore be followed.
Our products are tested by authorized bodies using the standards listed below.
EN 61800-3:2004
2. Measures to Ensure Conformity of Omron-Yaskawa Motion Control Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive
Omron-Yaskawa Motion Control frequency inverters do not necessarily have to be installed in a switch cabinet.
It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all of the possible types of installation. This manual therefore has to be limited to general guidelines.
All electrical equipment produces radio and line-borne interference at various frequencies. The cables pass this on to the environment like an aerial.
Connecting an item of electrical equipment (e.g. drive) to a supply without a line filter can therefore allow HF or LF interference to get into the mains.
The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components, proper grounding and shielding of cables.
A large contact area is necessary for low-impedance grounding of HF interference. The use of grounding straps instead of cables is therefore definitely advisable.
Moreover, cable shields must be connected with purpose-made ground clips.
3. Laying Cables
Measures Against Line-Borne Interference:
Line filter and frequency inverter must be mounted on the same metal plate. Mount the two components as close to each other as possible, with cables kept as short as possible.
Use a power cable with well-grounded shield. Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 20 meters in length.
Arrange all grounds so as to maximize the area of the end of the lead in contact with the ground terminal (e.g.
metal plate).
Shielded Cable:
–Use a cable with braided shield.
–Ground the maximum possible area of the shield. It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the cable to the ground plate with metal clips (see following figure).
Ground clip
Ground plate
The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal. Remove any coats of varnish and paint.
–Ground the cable shields at both ends.
–Ground the motor of the machine.
Installation inverters and EMC filters
For an EMC rules compliant installation consider the following points:
•
•
•
•
Use a line filter.
Use shielded motor cables.
Mount the inverter and filter on a grounded conductive plate.
Remove any paint or dirt before mounting the parts in order to reach the lowest possible grounding impedance.
PE
PE L2
L1 L3
Line
Ground Bonds
Remove any paint!
Inverter
Filter
Load
GND L1
L2
L3
U
V
W GND
Cable Lenght as short as possible
Grounded
Metal Plate
Ground Bonds
Remove any paint!
M
~3
Screened
Motor cable
XI
XII
Line Filters
Recommended Line Filters for Varispeed L7
Inverter Model
Varispeed L7 Model
Line Filter
Current
(A)
Weight
(kg)
Dimensions
W x D x H
CIMR-L7Z43P77
CIMR-L7Z44P07
CIMR-L7Z45P57
CIMR-L7Z47P57
CIMR-L7Z40117
CIMR-L7Z40157
CIMR-L7Z40187
CIMR-L7Z40227
CIMR-L7Z40307
CIMR-L7Z40377
CIMR-L7Z40457
CIMR-L7Z40557
3G3RV-PFI3018-SE
3G3RV-PFI3035-SE
3G3RV-PFI3060-SE
3G3RV-PFI3070-SE
3G3RV-PFI3130-SE
Maximum Voltage: AC 480V 3phase
Ambient Temperature: 45°C (max.)
18
35
60
70
130
1.3
2.1
4.0
3.4
4.7
141 x 46 x 330
206 x 50 x 355
236 x 65 x 408
80 x 185 x 329
90 x 180 x 366
*Permissible emission of power drive systems for commercial and light environment (EN61800-3, A11)
(general availability, 1st environment)
Inverter Model
Varispeed L7 Model
CIMR-L7Z23P77
CIMR-L7Z25P57
CIMR-L7Z27P57
CIMR-L7Z20117
CIMR-L7Z20157
CIMR-L7Z20187
CIMR-L7Z20227
CIMR-L7Z20307
CIMR-L7Z20377
CIMR-L7Z20457
CIMR-L7Z20557
3G3RV-PFI2035-SE
3G3RV-PFI2060-SE
3G3RV-PFI2100-SE
3G3RV-PFI2130-SE
3G3RV-PFI2160-SE
3G3RV-PFI2200-SE
Maximum Voltage: AC 240V 3phase
Ambient Temperature: 45°C (max.)
* max. motor cable length: 10 m Class B, 50 m Class A
Rated Voltage: AC240V 3 ph.
Ambient Temperature: 45°C (max.)
Line Filter
Current
(A)
35
60
100
130
160
200
Weight
(kg)
1.4
3.0
4.9
4.3
6.0
11.0
Dimensions
W x D x H
141 x 46 x 330
206 x 60 x 355
236 x 80 x 408
90 x 180 x 366
120 x 170 x 451
130 x 240 x 610
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
•
DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association, Inc.).
•
•
InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
Profibus is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
•
Hiperface y
is a registered trademark of Sick Stegmann GmbH
•
Klauke y
is a registered trademark of Klauke Textron
XIII
XIV
1
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed L7 Models ..........................................................1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery...............................................1-3
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions .....................................1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ....................1-9
Installation Orientation and Space ....................................1-10
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ...................1-11
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/ LED Monitor and
Front Cover .......................................................................1-13
1
Varispeed L7 Models
The Varispeed L7 Series includes Inverters in two voltage class es: 200 V and 400 V. The maximum motor capacities vary from 3.7 to 55 kW (23 models).
Voltage
Class
200 V class
400 V class
Maximum
Motor
Capacity kW
37
45
55
3.7
4.0
5.5
7.5
15
18.5
22
30
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
30
37
45
55
11
15
18.5
22
12
15
7
9
54
67
76
93
Output
Capacity kVA
7
10
14
20
27
33
40
54
67
80
106
22
28
34
40
Table 1.1 Varispeed L7 Models
Varispeed L7
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Basic Model
Number
CIMR-L7Z23P7
CIMR-L7Z25P5
CIMR-L7Z27P5
CIMR-L7Z2011
CIMR-L7Z2015
CIMR-L7Z2018
CIMR-L7Z2022
CIMR-L7Z2030
CIMR-L7Z2037
CIMR-L7Z2045
CIMR-L7Z2055
CIMR-L7Z43P7
CIMR-L7Z44P0
CIMR-L7Z45P5
CIMR-L7Z47P5
CIMR-L7Z4011
CIMR-L7Z4015
CIMR-L7Z4018
CIMR-L7Z4022
CIMR-L7Z4030
CIMR-L7Z4037
CIMR-L7Z4045
CIMR-L7Z4055
IEC IP00
CIMR-L7Z
20220
20300
20370
20450
20550
40220
40300
40370
40450
40550
NEMA 1
CIMR-L7Z
23P71
25P51
27P51
20111
20151
20181
20221
20301
20371
20451
20551
43P71
44P01
45P51
47P51
40111
40151
40181
40221
40301
40371
40451
40551
IEC IP20
CIMR-L7Z
23P77
25P57
27P57
20117
20157
20187
20227
20307
20377
20457
20557
43P77
43P77
45P57
47P57
40117
40157
40187
40227
40307
40377
40457
40557
1-
2
Confirmations upon Delivery
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Table 1.2 Checks
Item
Has the correct model of Inverter been delivered?
Method
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components loose?
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
In case of any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which the Inverter was purchased or your Omron-Yaskawa Motion Control representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
The nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter showing the model number, specifications, lot number, serial number and other information about the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a standard European Inverter: 3-phase, 400 VAC,
3.7 kW, IEC IP20 standards
Inverter model
Input specification
Output specification
Lot number
Serial number
UL file number
MODEL
INPUT
CIMR-L7Z43P7
SPEC: 43P77A
AC3PH 380-480V 50/60Hz 10.2A
OUTPUT
O/N
S/N
AC3PH 0-480V 0-120Hz 8.5A 3min. 50%ED 8.5kVA
MASS: 4.0 kg
PRG:
FILE NO E131457
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORARION
MADE IN JAPAN
Ms
Inverterspecifications
Mass
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
Inverter Model Numbers
The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR – L7 Z 2 3P7
Inverter
Varispeed L7
No.
Z
Specification
OYMC European Std.
No.
2
4
Voltage Class
AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V
AC Input, 3-phase, 400 V
No.
3P7
5P5 to
55
Max. Motor Capacity
3.7 kW
5.5 kW to
55 kW
“P” Indicates the decimal point.
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
1
1-
3
1
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity, the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
2 3P7 1 B
No.
2
4
Voltage Class
AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V
AC Input, 3-phase 400 V
No.
A
B
Hardware Revision
Spec A
Spec B
No.
3P7
5P5 to
55
Max. Motor Capacity
3.7 kW
5.5 kW to
55 kW
“P” Indicates the decimal point
No.
0
1
7
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
Protective Structure
IP00
NEMA 1
IP20
Inverter Software Version
The inverter software version can be read out from the monitor parameter U1-14. The parameter shows the last for digits of the software number (e.g. display is “2031” for the software version VSL702031).
IMPORTANT
This manual describes the functionality of the inverter software version VSL702031
Older software versions may not support all described functions. Check the software version before start working with this manual!
1-
4
Component Names
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in
. The Inverter with the ter-
minal cover removed is shown in
.
Mounting holes
1
Front cover
Heatsink
Digital Operator
Nameplate
Terminal cover
Bottom Protective Cover
Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or Less)
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or Less)
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
1-
5
1
Inverters of 22 kW or More
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in
minal cover removed is shown in
.
Inveter cover
Front cover
Mounting holes
Cooling fan
Nameplate
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Fig 1.6 Inverter Appearance (22 kW or More)
Charge indicator
Ground terminals
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (22 kW or More)
1-
6
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
IP00 Inverters
Exterior diagrams of the IP00 Inverters are shown below.
W1
4-d
W1
4-d
1
t1
W
3
D1
D max. 10
W max. 10 max. 5
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 18.5 kW
200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 55 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW
Fig 1.8 Exterior Diagrams of IP00 Inverters
IP20 / NEMA 1 Inverters
Exterior diagrams of the IP20/NEMA1 Inverters are shown below.
W1
W1
4-d
4-d
D t1
D1 t1
W
3
D1
D
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 18.5 kW max. 10
W max. 10 max. 5
Grommet
200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 55 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW
Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of IP20/NEMA1 Inverters
D t1
D1
1-
7
1
1-
8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment.
Table 1.4 Installation Site
Type
NEMA1 / IP20
IEC IP00
Ambient Operating Temperature
-10 to + 40 °C
-10 to + 45
°C
Humidity
95% RH or less (no condensation)
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
•
•
Install the Inverter in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a cabinet, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45
°C.
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter
Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after the completion of the installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
1
1-
9
1
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
A
B
Air
30 mm min.
50 mm min.
30 mm min.
Horizontal Space
200V class inverter, 3.7 to 55 kW
400V class inverter, 3.7 to 55 kW
120 mm min.
Vertical Space
Air
A B
50 mm 120 mm
Fig 1.10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
IMPORTANT
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for IP00, IP20 and NEMA 1 Inverters.
2. Always remove the top protection cover after installing an Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing an
Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.
1-
10
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
IMPORTANT
Before opening the terminal cover, switch off the power supply and wait at least 5 min. to make sure, that the DC bus is discharged!
1
Removing the Terminal Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2 1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-L7Z43P7 Shown Above)
Inverters of 22 kW or More
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Fig 1.12 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-L7Z4022 Shown Above)
1-
11
1
Attaching the Terminal Cover
When the terminal block wiring has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
1-
12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator/
LED Monitor and Front Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator/LED Monitor and front cover in addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator/LED Monitor from the front cover before removing the front cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are described below.
Removing the Digital Operator/LED Monitor
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator/LED Monitor in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator/LED Monitor and lift the Digital Operator/LED Monitor in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator/LED Monitor as shown in the following illustration.
1
2
1
Fig 1.13 Removing the Digital Operator/LED Monitor (Model CIMR-L7Z43P7 Shown Above)
1-
13
1
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
1
2
1
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-L7Z43P7 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover
After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing the steps to remove the front cover in reverse order.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator/LED Monitor attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital Operator/LED Monitor may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator/LED Monitor
After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator/LED Monitor onto the Inverter using the following procedure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator/LED Monitor at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator/LED Monitor in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
A
B
Fig 1.15 Mounting the Digital Operator/LED Monitor
1-
14
IMPORTANT
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator/LED Monitor or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator/LED Monitor attached to the front cover. Imperfect contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator/LED Monitor to the front cover.
Inverters of 22 kW or More
For inverters with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator/LED Monitor and front cover.
Removing the Digital Operator/LED Monitor
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover
Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
1
Fig 1.16 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-L7Z4022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover
After completing the required work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator/LED Monitor is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is attached while the Digital Operator/LED Monitor is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator/LED Monitor
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
1-
15
1
1-
16
2
Wiring
This chapter describes the terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connection Diagram ...........................................................2-2
Terminal Block Configuration..............................................2-4
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals .............................................2-5
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals .......................................2-17
EN81-1 Conform Wiring with One Motor Contactor..........2-21
Wiring Check.....................................................................2-23
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ...................................2-24
2
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
L1
3-phase power
380 to 480V
50/60Hz
L2
L3
PE
Magnetic
Contactor
Line
Filter
DC reactor to improve input power factor (optional)
Braking Resistor unit (optional)
Link
(+1)
L1(R)
L2(S)
(+2) (-)
B1
L3(T)
B2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
1
Motor
IM/PM
Multi function
Inputs
(Factory setting)
Forward run/stop
Reverse run/stop
Nominal Speed
Inspection Run
Intermediate Speed
Leveling Speed
Not used
Hardware Baseblock (note 3)
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
BB
BB1
TA1
PG-X2
(Optional)
P
P
Voltage adjustment
Analog input
(Speed reference)
2kOhm
2kOhm
0 to 10 V
P
Input option cards
+24V, 8mA
SC
IP24V (24V)
CN5(NPN setting)
E(G)
+V Analog input power supply +15V, 20mA
A1
Master speed reference 0 to 10V
AC
0 V
2CN
PG
TA3
TA2
MA
MB
MC
A Pulse
B Pulse
Z Pulse
2
3
Pulse Monitor Output
RS-422
(100m or less)
Fault contact output
250VAC, max. 1A
30VDC, max. 1A
M1
M2
Brake Command
(Factory setting)
M3
M4
Contactor Control
(Factory setting)
Multi-function contact output
250VAC, max. 1A
30VDC, max. 1A
M5
M6
Inverter Ready
(Factory setting)
Optional control power supply input for Rescue
Operation to terminal B1 to terminal -
P0
N0
Control Power
Supply Input
3CN
Output option cards
Note:
1. Main circuit terminals are indicatied with double circles and
control circuit terminals are indicatied with a single circles
2. The CN5 factory setting is NPN
3. To enable the inverter both inputs, BB and BB1 must be closed. If only one of the inputs is closed, “BB” will be displayed in the operator panel and the inverter will not start.
1
Shielded wires
Twisted-pair wires
2
Fig 2.1 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-L7Z43P7 Shown Above)
2-
2
Circuit Descriptions
Refer to the numbers indicated in
.
1
These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessible surfaces by protective separation
2
These circuits are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may be interconnected with SELV
*
(or equivalent) or non-
SELV
*
circuits, but not both.
3
Inverters supplied by a four-wire-system source (neutral grounded)
These circuits are SELV
*
circuits and are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may only be interconnected with other SELV
*
(or equivalent) circuits.
Inverters supplied by a three-wire-system source (ungrounded or corner grounded)
These circuits are not separated from hazardous circuits other circuits by protective separation, but only with basic insulation. These circuits must not be interconnected with any circuits which are accessible, unless they are isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation
* SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) circuits have no direct connection to the primary power and are supplied by a transformer or equivalent isolating device. The circuits are designed and protected, so that, under normal and single fault condition, its voltage does not exceed a safe value.
(See IEC 61010)
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
IMPORTANT
E(G)
SC SC SC BB +V A1 AC
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 BB1
M5 M6
M3 M4
MA MB MC
M1
M2
E(G)
2. The output current capability of the +V terminal is 20 mA.
3. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single circles.
4. The wiring of the digital inputs S1 to S7 and BB is shown for the connection of contacts or NPN transistors (0V common and sinking mode). This is the default setting.
For the connection of PNP transistors or for using a 24V external power supply, refer to
5. A DC reactor is an option only for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less. Remove the short circuit bar when connecting a DC reactor.
2
2-
3
2
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangements are shown in
and
Control circuit terminals
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 2.2 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 3.7 kW)
Charge indicator
Main circuit terminals
Ground terminals
Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 22 kW or more)
2-
4
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Crimp Terminals
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals using
Table 2.1
to
Table 2.3
. Refer to instruction manual
TOE-C726-2 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.
Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR
L7Z23P7
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
*1 mm
2
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO
M4 1.2 to 1.5
4
(12 to 10)
4
(12)
Wire Type
L7Z25P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO
M4 1.2 to 1.5
6
(10)
L7Z27P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO
M5 2.5
10
(8 to 6)
L7Z2011
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, PO, NO
M5
L7Z2015
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, NO
B1, B2, PO
M6
M5
M6
L7Z2018
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, NO
B1, B2, PO
M8
M5
M6
L7Z2022
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO
M8
M6
M8
L7Z2030
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO
M8
M6
M8
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
16
(6 to 4)
25 to 35
(3 to 1)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
50
(1 to 1/0)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
25
(4 to 2)
10
(8 to 6)
25
(4)
25 to 35
(3 to 2)
10 to 16
(8 to 6)
25
(4)
6
(10)
10
(8)
16
(6)
-
25
(4)
25
(3)
-
25
(4)
50
(1)
25
(4)
-
25
(4)
25
(3)
-
25
(4)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
2
2-
5
2
Inverter
Model
CIMR
L7Z2037
L7Z2045
L7Z2055
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO r/l1,
Δ/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO r/l1,
Δ/l2
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, NO
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3, PO r/l1, Δ/l2
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M8
M10
M4
M12
M10
M8
M10
M4
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
70 to 95
(2/0 to 4/0)
Recommended
Wire Size
*1 mm
2
(AWG)
70
(2/0)
6 to 16
(10 to 4)
35 to 70
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
95
(3/0 to 4/0)
6 to 16
(10 to 4)
50 to 70
(1 to 2/0)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
50 to 95
(1/0 to 4/0)
90
(4/0)
6 to 70
(10 to 2/0)
35 to 95
(3 to 4/0)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
–
35
(2)
1.5
(16)
95
(3/0)
Wire Type
–
50
(1)
1.5
(16)
50 × 2P
(1/0
× 2P)
90
(4/0)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
–
50
(1/0)
1.5
(16)
*1. The wire size is valid for PVC insulated copper cable, 30° ambient temperature
Inverter
Model
CIMR
L7Z43P7
L7Z44P0
L7Z45P5
L7Z47P5
L7Z4011
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO
M4
M4
M4
M4
M5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
2.5
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
*1 mm
2
(AWG)
2.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
4
(12)
2.5
(14)
2.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
4
(12)
2.5
(14)
4
(12 to 10)
2.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
6 to 10
(10 to 6)
6 to 10
(10 to 6)
4
(12)
2.5
(14)
6
(10)
4
(12)
10
(8)
6
(10)
Wire Type
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
2-
6
Inverter
Model
CIMR
L7Z4015
L7Z4018
L7Z4022
L7Z4030
L7Z4037
L7Z4045
L7Z4055
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, NO, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, NO
B1, B2, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31, NO
3, PO
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
M5
M5
(M6)
M6
M5
M6
M6
M8
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
*1. The wire size is valid for PVC insulated copper cable, 30° ambient temperature
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
2.5
2.5
(4.0 to 5.0)
4.0 to 5.0
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
35 to 50
(2 to 1/0)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
50
(1 to 1/0)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
*1 mm
2
(AWG)
10
(8 to 6)
10
(8)
6 to 10
(10 to 6)
10 to 35
(8 to 2)
10
(8)
10 to 25
(8 to 4)
16
(6 to 4)
16 to 35
(6 to 2)
25
(4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
25 to 50
(4 to 1/0)
25
(4)
25
(4)
35
(2)
16
(6)
16
(6)
6
(10)
10
(8)
10
(8)
10
(8)
Wire Type
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
-
25
(4)
50
(1)
25
(4)
35
(2)
-
-
25
(4)
2
2-
7
2
Recommended Crimp Terminal Sizes (Ring type)
Table 2.3 Crimp Terminal Sizes
Wire Cross Section (mm
2
)
Terminal Screws
0.5 - 1.0
1.5
2.5
4
6
10
16
25
35
50
70
95
M5
M10
M12
M8
M10
M12
M10
M12
M6
M8
M10
M8
M6
M8
M6
M8
M4
M5
M6
M8
M4
M4
M4
M4
M5
M6
M8
A
620/4
630/4
630/4
650/4
650/4
101 R/5
101 R/6
101 R/8
102 R/5
102 R/6
102 R/8
103 R/5
*1
103 R/6
103 R/8
104 R/6
104 R/8
105 R/6
105 R/8
105 R/10
106 R/8
106 R/10
106 R/12
107 R/8
107 R/10
107 R/12
108 R/10
108 R/12
Crimp Terminal Type
Klauke y
B
1620/4
1620/4
1630/4
1650/4
1650/4
1650/5
1650/6
1650/8
1652/5
1652/6
1652/8
1653/5
1656/10
1656/12
1657/8
1657/10
1657/12
1658/10
1658/12
1653/6
1653/8
1654/6
1654/8
1655/6
1655/8
1655/10
1656/8
*1. Not applicable for L7Z2011
Select the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage.
Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:
JST
GS5-16
GS6-16
GS8-16
GS6-25
GS8-25
GS6-35
GS8-35
GS10-35
GS8-50
GS10-50
GS12-50
GS8-70
GS10-70
GS12-70
GS10-95
GS12-95
GS4-1
GS4-1
GS4-2.5
GS4-6
GS4-6
GS5-6
GS6-6
GS6-8
GS5-10
GS6-10
GS8-10
IMPORTANT
Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (
Ω
/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10
-3
2-
8
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in
. Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purposes.
Purpose
Main circuit power input
Inverter outputs
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
Model: CIMR-L7Z
200 V Class 400 V Class
23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055
2022 to 2055
23P7 to 2055
4022 to 4055
43P7 to 4055
DC bus terminals
1,
Braking Resistor Unit connection B1, B2
DC reactor connection
1, 2
Braking Unit connection
3,
Ground
Control Power Supply PO, NO
23P7 to 2055
23P7 to 2018
23P7 to 2018
2022 to 2055
23P7 to 2055
23P7 to 2055
43P7 to 4055
43P7 to 4018
43P7 to 4018
4022 to 4055
43P7 to 4055
43P7 to 4055
2
2-
9
2
Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in
B2
B1
+ 1
+
2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
-
Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
200 V Class 400 V Class
CIMR - L7Z23P7 to 2018
CIMR - L7Z43P7 to 4018
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
B2
B1
+
1
+ 2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
-
Power
Supply
Control
Circuit
Power
Supply
Control
Circuit
N0 P0
N0 P0
CIMR - L7Z2022,2030
+ 3
CIMR - L7Z4022 to 4055
+ 3
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
-
N0
Power
Supply
P0
Control
Circuit
CIMR - L7Z2037 to 2055
+ 3
N0
Power
Supply
P0
Control
Circuit
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
r/l1
Δ 200/
l200
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
N0
Power
Supply
P0
Control
Circuit
Note: Consult your Omron-Yaskawa Motion Control representative for using 12-phase rectification.
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
2-
10
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in
. These are the same for both 200 V Class and
400 V Class Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
CIMR-L7Z23P7 to 2018 and 43P7 to 4018
3 Phase 200VAC or
400VAC
DC reactor
(optional)
Braking
Resistor
(optional)
+ 1 + 2
B1 B2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
M
CIMR-L7Z2022, 2030, and 4022 to 4055
Braking
Resistor (optional)
CDBR Braking
Unit (optional)
3 Phase 200VAC or
400VAC
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+ 3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
M
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC reactor.
CIMR-L7Z2037 to 2055
3 Phase 200VAC or
400VAC
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+ 3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31 r / l1
/ l2
-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Braking
Resistor (optional)
CDBR Braking
Unit (optional)
M
The DC reactor is built in.
2
Control power is supplied internally from the DC bus at all inverter models.
Fig 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
2-
11
2
Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs
Consider the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.
Installing Fuses
To protect the inverter, it is recommended to use semiconductor fuses like they are shown in the table below.
Rated
Inverter Type Inverter Input
Current (A)
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
52
68
96
115
21
25
40
156
176
220
269
Voltage (V)
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
Table 2.6 Input Fuses
Fuse Selection
Current (A)
I
2 t (A
2 s)
80
100
130
150
30
40
60
180
240
300
350
82~220
220~610
290~1300
450~5000
1200~7200
1800~7200
870~16200
1500~23000
2100~19000
2700~55000
4000~55000
Selection Example (FERRAZ)
Model Rating I²t (A²s)
A60Q30-2
A50P50-4
A50P80-4
A50P80-4
A50P125-4
A50P150-4
A50P150-4
A50P200-4
A50P250-4
A50P300-4
A50P350-4
600V / 30A
500V / 50A
500V / 80A
500V / 80A
500V / 125A
500V / 150A
500V / 150A
500V / 200A
500V/ 250A
500V / 300A
500V / 350A
132
250
640
640
1600
2200
2200
4000
6200
9000
12000
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
10.2
13.2
17
22
32
41
49
58
78
96
115
154
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
30
50
60
70
15
20
25
80
100
125
150
200
34~72
50~570
100~570
100~640
150~1300
400~1800
700~4100
240~5800
500~5800
750~5800
920~13000
1500~13000
A60Q20-2
A60Q30-2
A60Q30-2
A60Q30-2
A70P50-4
A70P70-4
A70P80-4
A70P80-4
A70P100-4
A70P125-4
A70P150-4
A70P200-4
600V / 20A
600V / 30A
600V / 30A
600V / 30A
700V / 50A
700V / 70A
700V / 80A
700V / 80A
700V / 100A
700V / 125A
700V / 150A
700V / 200A
41
132
132
132
300
590
770
770
1200
1900
2700
4800
2-
12
Installing a Moulded-Case Circuit Breaker
If a moulded case circuit breaker is used for the power supply connection (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) it must be suitable for the Inverter.
•
•
The MCCB should have a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times of the inverter's rated current.
For the MCCB's time characteristics selection the inverter's overload protection (one minute at 150% of the rated output current) must be considered.
Installing an Earth Leakage Breaker
An earth leakage breaker which is able to detect all kinds of current should be used in order to ensure a safe earth leakage current detection.
•
•
If a special-purpose earth leakage breaker for Inverters is used, it should have an actuating current of at least 30 mA per Inverter.
If a standard earth leakage breaker is used, it should have an actuating current of 200 mA or more per
Inverter and a actuating time of 0.1 s or more.
Installing a Magnetic Contactor at the Input
If the power supply for the main circuit is shut off by a control circuit, a magnetic contactor can be used.
The following things should be considered:
•
•
The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor may cause an Inverter fault. Do not exceed one power up per hour.
When the Inverter is operated using the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block
The input power supply can be connected in any sequence to the terminals R, S or T on the terminal block; the input phase sequence is irrelevant to the output phase sequence.
Installing an Input AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or a phase advancing capacitor is switched nearby, an excessive peak current could flow through the input power circuit, causing an inverter damage. As a countermeasure an optional AC Reactor the inverter input or a DC reactor at the DC reactor connection terminals can be installed.
In order to fulfill the EN12015 an AC reactor has to be installed. Refer to
for the available reactors. The AC reactor has to be installed between the power supply and the EMC filter (like shown in
)
Power
Supply
L1
L2
L3
AC
Reactor
Filter
L7Z
Inverter
M
Fig 2.5 AC reactor installation
Installing a Surge Absorber
Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. Inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
2
2-
13
2
Wiring the Output Side of the Main Circuit
The following precautions should be considered for the output circuit wiring.
Connecting the Inverter and Motor
The output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 must be connected according to the motor lead wires U, V and W.
The motor should rotate forward with the forward run command. If not, two of the motor cable wires can be switched.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
A power supply must never be connected to the output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Otherwise the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals
If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter case, an electric shock or a short circuit may occur.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor
A phase advancing capacitor must never be connected to the inverter output circuit. The high-frequency components of the Inverter output may overheat and be damaged and may cause other parts to burn.
Using a Magnetic Contactor
A magnetic contactor (MC) between the Inverter and motor must not be turned ON or OFF during inverter operation. If the MC is turned ON during the Inverter is operation, a large inrush current will be created and the inverter’s over current protection may operate.
Ground Wiring
The following precautions should be considered for the ground connection.
•
•
Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100
Ω and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10
Ω.
Ground wires should not be shared with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
•
•
A ground wire, that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment must be used. The length of the ground wire should be as low as possible.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
When more than one Inverter is used the ground wires should not be looped.
OK
NO
Fig 2.6 Ground Wiring
2-
14
Connecting a Braking Resistor and Braking Unit (CDBR)
A Braking Resistor and Braking Unit can be connected to the Inverter like shown in the
To prevent overheating of the braking unit/braking resistor, the inverter operation should be stopped when the overload contacts are operated.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 3.7 to 18.5 kW Output Capacity
Braking Resistor
Inverter
Thermal overload relay contact
2
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output Capacity
CDBR Braking Unit Braking Resistor
Inverter
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Fig 2.7 Connecting the Braking Resistor and Braking Unit
2-
15
2
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
When two or more Braking Units are connected in parallel the wiring and jumper settings must be done like
. There is a jumper for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a master or slave. “Mas-
ter” must be set for the first Braking Unit only, “Slave” must be set for all other Braking Units (i.e. from the second Unit onwards).
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Braking
Resistor
Braking
Resistor
Braking
Resistor
Inverter
Braking Unit #3
Braking Unit #2
2-
16
Braking Unit #1
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Fig 2.8 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
Control Power Supply Connection
The controller of the Varispeed L7 can be supplied by an external voltage source during rescue operation using the twisted wires marked with P0 and N0. Upon shipment the wires are connected to the main circuit terminal
B1 (units up to 18.5 kW) or terminal +3 (units from 22 kW and above) and terminal -.
B2
B1 / + 3
L1
L2
L3
P0
N0
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
-
Power Supply
Control circuit
Fig 2.9 Control Power Supply Connection
Please refer to
for details about rescue operation.
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes
For remote operation using analog signals, the control line length between the Analog Operator or operation signals and the Inverter should be less than 30 m. The controller wires should always be separated from main power lines or other control circuits in order to avoid disturbances.
It is recommended to use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield for the largest area of contact between shield and ground.
The terminal numbers and the appropriate wire sizes are shown in
Table 2.7
.
Terminals
Table 2.7 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible Wire
Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended Wire
Size mm
2
(AWG)
AC, SC, A1, +V, S1, S2, S3,
S4, S5, S6, S7, BB, MA,
MB, MC, M1, M2, M3, M4,
M5, M6
E (G)
Phoenix type
M3.5
0.5 to 0.6
0.8 to 1.0
Solid wire
*1:
0.5 to 2.5
Stranded wire:
0.5 to 1.5
(26 to 14)
0.5 to 2.5
14)
(20 to
0.75
(18)
1.0
(12)
Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
*1. Ferrules with plastic sleeves should be used for the signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Ferrules for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of ferrules with plastic sleeves for the signal lines are shown in the following table.
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
0.25 (24)
0.5 (20)
0.75 (18)
1.5 (16)
2 (14)
Table 2.8 Ferrule Sizes
Model
AI 0.25 - 8YE
AI 0.5 - 8WH
AI 0.75 - 8GY
AI 1.5 - 8BK
AI 2.5 - 8BU d1
0.8
1.1
1.3
1.8
2.3
d2
2
2.5
2.8
3.4
4.2
L
12.5
14
14
14
14
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
2
Fig 2.10 Ferrule Sizes
2-
17
2
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in
. Use the appropriate terminals for the cor-
rect purposes.
Type No.
S1
S2
S3
S4
Digital input signals
S5
S6
S7
BB
BB1
*1
SC
Table 2.9 Control Circuit Terminals with default settings
Signal Name
Forward run/stop command
Reverse run/stop command
Nominal speed
Inspection Run
Intermediate speed
Leveling speed
Not used
Hardware baseblock
Hardware baseblock 1
Digital input common
–
–
Function
Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
Nominal speed when ON.
Inspection RUN when ON.
Intermediate speed when
ON.
Functions are selected by setting
H1-01 to H1-05.
Leveling speed when ON.
–
–
Signal Level
24 VDC, 8 mA
Photo-coupler
Analog input signals
+V
A1
AC
E(G)
15 V power supply
*2
15 V power supply for analog references
Frequency reference
Analog reference neutral
Shield wire, optional ground line connection point
0 to +10 V/100%
–
–
Brake command
(1NO contact)
Brake command when ON.
–
–
–
15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
0 to +10 V(20 k
Ω)
–
–
Digital output signals
M5
M6
MA
MB
MC
M1
M2
M3
M4
Contactor Control
(1NO contact)
Inverter Ready
(1NO contact)
Fault output signal (SPDT)
(1 Change over contact)
Contactor Control when ON
Inverter Ready when ON.
Multi-function contact outputs Relay contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC
*3
Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC
Fault when OPEN across MB and MC
*1. This terminal is available on inverters with hardware SPEC B only. ( hardware version).
page 1-4, Inverter Specifications
describes how to find out the inverter
*2. Do not use this power supply for supplying any external equipment.
*3. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil with DC power supply, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in
Fig 2.11
.
Fig 2.11 Flywheel Diode Connection
Flywheel diode
External power: 30
VDC max.
Coil
1 A max.
The rating of the flywheel diode must be at least as high as the circuit voltage.
2-
18
Sinking/Sourcing Mode (NPN/PNP Selection)
The input terminal logic can be switched over between sinking mode (0-V common, NPN) and sourcing mode
(+24V common, PNP) by using the jumper CN5. An external power supply is also supported, providing more freedom in signal input methods.
Table 2.10 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply – Sinking Mode (NPN)
External Power Supply – Sinking Mode (NPN)
S1
S2
B1
SC
A1
B2 B3
A2 A3
CN5
IP24V
(+24V)
S1
S2
+
24 VDC
SC
A1
B1 B2 B3
A2 A3
CN5
IP24V
(+24V)
Internal Power Supply – Sourcing Mode (PNP) External Power Supply – Sourcing Mode (PNP)
2
S1
S2
SC
B1
A1
B2 B3
A2 A3
CN5
IP24V
(+24V)
S1
S2
-
24 VDC
SC
A1
B1 B2 B3
A2 A3
CN5
IP24V
(+24V)
2-
19
Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in
Fig 2.12
.
2
Multi function
Inputs
(Factory setting)
Forward run/stop
Reverse run/stop
Nominal Speed
Inspection Run
Intermediate Speed
Leveling Speed
Not used
Hardware Baseblock (note 2)
S6
S7
BB
BB1
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
+24V, 8mA
SC
IP24V (24V)
CN5(NPN setting)
E(G)
Voltage adjustment
Analog input
(Speed reference)
2kOhm
2kOhm
0 to 10 V
P
+V
Analog input power supply +15V, 20mA
A1 Master speed reference 0 to 10V
AC
0 V
MA
MB
MC
Fault contact output
250VAC, max. 1A
30VDC, max. 1A
M1
M2
Brake Command
(Factory setting)
M3
M4
Contactor Control
(Factory setting)
M5
M6
Inverter Ready
(Factory setting)
Multi-function contact output
250VAC, max. 1A
30VDC, max. 1A
Note:
1. The CN5 factory setting is NPN
2. To enable the inverter both inputs, BB and BB1 must be closed. If only one of the inputs is closed, “BB” will be displayed in the operator panel and the inverter will not start.
INFO
Shielded wires
Twisted-pair wires
Fig 2.12 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
The base block circuit is a two channel circuit, i.e. always both channels (terminal BB and BB1) have to be enabled to enable the inverter output.
Generally the terminals BB and BB1 can be linked directly at the terminals. However, if an EN81-1 conform one motor contactor solution is required, the recommended BB and BB1 terminal wiring depends on the installation:
1. If the controller and inverter are mounted in the same cabinet the terminals BB and BB1 can be linked directly at the inverter terminal board. Only one wire from the controller to the inverter base block input is necessary.
2. If the inverter is mounted separated from the controller cabinet, two physically separated wires for the
BB and BB1 terminal should be used in order to keep redundancy in case of a fault of one of the signal lines.
2-
20
EN81-1 Conform Wiring with One Motor Contactor
In order to use the L7Z with one motor contactor instead of two while keeping compliance to the
EN81-1:1998, the following rules have to be followed:
•
The hardware base block function using the terminals BB and BB1 must be used to enable / disable the drive. The input logic must be PNP.
•
•
•
If the elevator safety chain is opened, the inverter output must be cut. This means that the base block signals at the terminals BB and BB1 must be opened, e.g. via an interposing relay.
The base block monitor function must be programmed for one of the multi-function outputs (H2- =
46/47). The regarding digital output contact must be implemented in the contactor supervision circuit of the controller in order to prevent a restart in case of an inverter base block or motor contactor malfunction.
All contactors must be conform to the EN81-1:1998, paragraph 13.2.
shows an EN81-1:1998 wiring example.
Fig 2.13 EN81-1 Conform Wiring with One Motor Contactor (Example)
2
Safety Chain
Circuit
Contactor Close
Command
Elevator Controller
Contactor Check
(Restart Permission)
K01
24VDC *1
K1
BB BB1
Up/Down; Speed selection; ...
Yaskawa
CIMR-L7xxxx
BB Monitor
(NC)
K2
M
The wiring rules and the wiring example are approved by the TUEV Sued, Germany. For more details please contact your OYMC sales representative.
2-
21
2
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
The following precautions for wiring the control circuits must be considered.
•
•
Control circuit and main circuit wiring should be separated (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/
T2, W/T3, , 1, 2, and 3, PO, NO) and other high-power lines.
The wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, and M6 (contact outputs) should be separated from wiring to other control circuit terminals.
•
•
•
•
If an optional external power supply is used, it should be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply.
Twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables should be used for control circuits to prevent operating faults.
The cable shields should be connected to the ground with the maximum contact area.
Cable shields have to be grounded on both cable ends.
2-
22
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform continuity check on control circuits. Perform the following checks on the wiring.
•
•
Is all wiring correct?
Have no wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
•
•
Are all screws tight?
Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
2
2-
23
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
2
Option Card Models and Specifications
Up to three option cards can be mounted simultaneously in the Inverter. Each of the three option board sockets on the controller card (A, C and D) can take up one option card like shown in
.
shows the available option cards and their specifications.
Card
PG speed control cards
Communications cards
PLC option card
Analog Input card
Analog Output Cards
Digital Output Cards
Table 2.11 Option Card Specifications
Model Specifications
PG-B2
PG-X2
Two phase (phase A and B), +12V inputs, max. response frequency: 50 kHz
Three phase (phase A, B, Z), line driver inputs
(RS422), max. response frequency: 300 kHz
PG-F2
3G3RV-PDRT2
SI-P1
SI-R1
SI-S1
S1-J
3G3RV-P10ST8-E
3G3RV-P10ST8-DRT-E
AI-14B
AO-08
AO-12
DO-08
DO-02C
Hiperfacey or EnDat 2.1 interface card
Intelligent DeviceNet option card
Option card for Profibus-DP fieldbus
Option card for InterBus-S fieldbus
Option card for CANOpen fieldbus
Option card for LONworks
PLC option card
PLC option card with DeviceNet communications port (Slave)
3 Channel analog input card
Signal level: -10 to 10 V or 0 to 10V
Resolution: 13 Bit + sign
2 channel analog output card
Signal level: 0 to 10 V
Resolution: 8 Bit
2 channel high resolution analog output card
Signal level: -10 to +10 V
Resolution: 11 Bit + sign
6 channel digital output card for monitoring the inverter status (fault, zero speed, running, etc.)
2 channel relay contact output
Mounting
Location
A
A
A
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
Installation
Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter is OFF. After that, remove the Digital Operator/LED Monitor and front cover and mount the Option
Card.
Refer to documentation provided with the Option Card for the mounting instructions.
2-
24
Preventing C and D Option Card Connectors from Rising
After installing an Option Card into slot C or D, insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising. The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and pulling it out.
A Option Card mounting spacer hole
CN4
A Option Card connector
CN2
C Option Card connector
A Option Card mounting spacer
(Provided with A Option Card)
Option Clip
(To prevent raising of
C and D Option Card)
C Option Card mounting spacer
C Option Card
D Option Card
D Option Card mounting spacer
A Option Card mounting spacer
A Option Card
Fig 2.14 Mounting Option Cards
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications
PG-B2 Option Card
Input/Output Specifications
Terminal
TA1
TA2
TA3
No.
1
2
5
4
(E)
2
3
6
1
3
4
Table 2.12 PG-B2 I/O Specifications
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
Specifications
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
H: +8 to 12 V (max. input frequency: 50 kHz)
Pulse input terminals phase A
GND pulse input phase A
H: +8 to 12 V (max. input frequency: 50 kHz)
Pulse input terminals phase B
GND pulse input phase B
Pulse monitor output terminals phase A
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
Pulse monitor output terminals phase B
Shield connection terminal
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
-
2
2-
25
2
Wiring the PG-B2 card
The following illustrations show wiring examples for the PG-B2 using the option cards power supply or an external power source for supplying the PG.
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Pulse input phase A
GND pulse input phase A
Pulse input phase B
GND pulse input phase B
Pulse monitor output phase A
Pulse monitor output phase B
Fig 2.15 PG-B2 Wiring Using the Option Cards Power Supply
2-
26
Fig 2.16 PG-B2 Wiring Using a 12 V External Power Supply
Precautions:
•
The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
•
The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1-05. The factory setting is A-phase leading in forward direction (motor shaft turning counterclockwise seen from motor shaft side).
Forward rotation of standard motor (PG)
Forward command
Motor output axis rotates counter-clockwise during Inverter forward command.
Rotation
(CCW)
A-phase
B-phase
The A-phase leads (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.
•
•
The pulse monitor output factor can be changed using parameter F1-05.
PG-X2 Option Card
Input/Output Specifications
Terminal
TA1
TA2
TA3
No.
1
2
3
3
4
5
10
1
2
6
7
(E)
7
8
9
4
5
6
Table 2.13 PG-X2 I/O Specifications
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
Pulse input terminal phase A (+)
Pulse input terminal phase A (–)
Pulse input terminal phase B (+)
Pulse input terminal phase B (–)
Pulse input terminal phase Z (+)
Pulse input terminal phase Z (–)
Common terminal inputs
Pulse monitor output terminal phase A (+)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase A (–)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase B (+)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase B (–)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase Z (+)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase Z (–)
Common terminal monitor outputs
Shield connection terminal
*1. The 5V and 12V power supply should not be used at the same time.
–
–
Specifications
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
*1
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
*1
Line driver input (RS422 level)
(maximum input frequency: 300 kHz)
–
Line driver output (RS422 level output)
2
2-
27
2
Wiring the PG-X2 card
The following illustrations show wiring examples for the PG-X2 using the option cards power supply or an external power source for supplying the PG.
Three-phase
200 VAC
(400 VAC)
PG-X2
0V
+5 VDC
A+ Phase Input
A- Phase Input
B+ Phase Input
B- Phase Input
Z+ Phase Input
Z- Phase Input
P
P
P
A Phase Output
B Phase Output
Z Phase Output
Fig 2.17 PG-X2 Wiring Using the Option Cards Power Supply
2-
28
Fig 2.18 PG-X2 Wiring Using a 5 V External Power Supply
Precautions:
•
The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
•
•
The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1-05. The factory setting is A-phase leading in forward direction (motor shaft turning counterclockwise seen from motor shaft side).
PG-F2 Option Card
Supported Encoders
The PG-F2 option card can be used in combination with the following encoder types:
•
•
Hiperface y
: SRS60/70
EnDat 2.1: ECN1313, ECN113, ECN413
The maximum encoder speed shall not exceed 1200 min
-1
.
Input/Output Specifications
Terminal
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
No.
1
2
3
2
1
8
1
6
7
4
5
2
3
4
(E)
Table 2.14 PG-F2 I/O Specifications
Contents
Hiperface y
EnDat
Us 7-12V
5V U
P and U
P
sensor
Specifications
EnDat: 5VDC (±5%, max. 250 mA)
Hiperface y
: 8VDC (±5%, max. 150mA)
0V GND
REFSIN
0V U
N
and 0V sensor
B-
+SIN
REFCOS
+COS
DATA+
DATA-
-
-
Pulse monitor A+
B+
A-
A+
DATA
/DATA
CLOCK
/CLOCK
Pulse monitor A-
Pulse monitor B+
Pulse monitor B-
Shielded sheath connection terminal
Differential inputs
RS-485 Data channel,
Terminating resistance: 130 Ohm
Differential output, Clock frequency: 100 kHz
Open Collector Outputs max 24 VDC, 30 mA
Encoder Power Supply Voltage Selection
The encoder power supply voltage must be set according to the encoder type using switch S1 on the PG-F2 card. Using potentiometer RH1 the encoder power supply voltage can be fine adjusted. The switch S1 factory setting is OFF (EnDat is preselected). The encoder power supply is pre adjusted to 5.0~5.25V upon shipment.
2
S1
RH1
I
OFF
I: 8V (U
S
= 7.5 ~ 10.5 V), for HIPERFACE
OFF: 5V (U
S
= 5 V +-5%), for EnDat, (factory setting)
S1 = I: 7.5 ~ 10.5 V, for HIPERFACE
S1 = OFF: 4.85 ~ 6.5 V, for EnDat
(factory setting: 5.0 to 5.25V)
Fig 2.19 PG-F2 Encoder Power Supply Voltage Selection
2-
29
2
Wiring the PG-F2 Card
The following illustration shows PG-F2 option card wiring with Hiperface y
or EnDat 2.1 encoders.
Three-phase
200 VAC
(400 VAC)
HIPERFACE® or
EnDat Encoder
PM
PG-F2
TB3
TB2
1
2
TB1
1
4
5
2
3
6
7
8
TB4
A+ Phase Output
A- Phase Output
B+ Phase Output
B- Phase Output
( CLOCK)
( /CLOCK)
U
S
( U
P
and U
P sensor)
GND ( 0
V
UN and 0V sensor)
REFSIN ( B-)
P +SIN ( B+)
REFCOS ( A-)
+COS ( A+) P
Data+ ( DATA)
Data- ( /DATA)
P
Fig 2.20 PG-F2 Wiring (EnDat signal names in brackets)
Precautions:
•
The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 50m for the signal lines and 30m for the monitor output at terminal TB3.
•
The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory setting is A-phase/SIN leading in forward direction (motor shaft turning counterclockwise seen from the shaft side).
SIN
COS
Pulse A
Pulse B
•
•
The signal voltage levels must be within the following limits:
REFSIN (B-), REFCOS (A-) offset: 2.2 ~ 2.8 V
+SIN (B+), +COS (B-) peak-to-peak voltage 0.9 ~ 1.1 V
2-
30
Wiring the Terminal Blocks
Wire Sizes (Same for All PG-Card Models)
Terminal wire sizes are shown in
Table 2.15
. For the ferrule types refer to
Terminal
Pulse generator power supply
Pulse input terminal
Pulse monitor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
Table 2.15 Wire Sizes
Terminal
Screws
-
M3.5
Wire Thickness Wire Type
• max. 1.0 mm² for flexible wire
• max. 0.5 mm² for flexible wire with ferrules
• max. 1.5 mm² for solid wire
0.5 to 2.5 mm²
Shielded, twisted-pair wire
Shielded, polyethylenecovered, vinyl sheath cable
Tightening Torque
0.22 Nm
-
Wiring Precautions
Consider the following precautions for wiring.
•
Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines. Use cables which are recommended by the encoder manufacturer only.
•
•
•
For the cable connection to the encoder connectors which are recommended by the encoder manufacturer should be used.
Ferrules should be used (refer to
).
The signal lines of the PG Speed Control Card should be separated from main power lines and other control circuits.
•
•
•
•
•
The shield must be connected (green grounding cable of the option card) to the ground terminal to prevent operational errors caused by noise.
The wire ends should not be soldered. Doing so may cause contact faults.
The PG cards power supply must not be used for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder). Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply consumption is higher than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)
The PG cards maximum input frequency must not be exceeded. The output frequency of the pulse generator can be calculated using the following formula.
f
PG (Hz) =
Motor speed at maximum output frequency (min
–1
)
60 x PG rating (p/rev)
2
2-
31
2
2-
32
3
LED Monitor / Digital
Operator and Modes
The Varispeed L7 is equipped with the LED Monitor JVOP-163 which shows the drive status. The optional Digital Operator JVOP-160-OY can be used to adjust parameters as required.
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes.
LED Monitor JVOP-163 ......................................................3-2
Digital Operator JVOP-160-OY...........................................3-3
LED Monitor JVOP-163
3
LED Monitor
The LED monitor indicates the operation status by combinations of the LED display (Lights up, Blink, and
Off) at RUN, DS1, and DS2.
The LED pattern is as follows at each mode.
Operation Mode Indicators
RUN: Lights up during inverter run, Off if the inverter is stopped
DS1: Drive Status 1
DS2: Drive Status 2
The combination of the three LEDs Run, DS1 and DS2 indicates the drive status.
Drive Status Indications
Alarm Indications
Fault Indications
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
LED Display Examples
Normal operation: The figure below shows the LED display when the drive is ready and no FWD/REV
signal is active
RUN DS1 DS2 POWER
Alarm: The figure below shows an example of the LED display when a minor fault occurs.
Refer to Chapter 6 and take appropriate countermeasures.
RUN DS1 DS2 POWER
Fault: The figure below shows an example of the LED display when an OV or UV fault has occurred
RUN DS1 DS2 POWER
3-
2
Digital Operator JVOP-160-OY
Digital Operator Display
The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below
Drive Status Indicators
FWD: Lights up when a forward run command is input.
REV: Lights up when a reverse run command is input.
SEQ: Lights up when any other run command source than the digital operator is selected
REF: Lights up when any other frequency reference source than the digital operator is selected
ALARM:Lights up when an error or alarm has occurred.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, parameter numbers and parameter settings.
Mode Display (displayed at the upper left of data display)
DRIVE:
QUICK:
Lights up in Drive Mode.
Lights up in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV: Lights up in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lights up in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE: Lights up in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting parameters, monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
3
Fig 3.2 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in
.
Key Name
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Function
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and the settings in b1-01 and b1-02 (REMOTE).
This key can be enabled or disabled by setting parameter o2-01.
MENU Key Selects menu items (modes).
ESC Key
JOG Key
Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER key was pressed.
Starts jog operation when the inverter is operated by the Digital
Operator and d1-18 is set to 0.
3-
3
3
Key Name
FWD/REV Key
Shift/RESET Key
Increment Key
Decrement Key
Function
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is operated by the Digital Operator.
Sets the active digit when programming parameters.
Also acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred.
Selects menu items, sets parameter numbers, and increments set values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Selects menu items, sets parameter numbers, and decrements set values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
Enters menus and parameters, and set validates parameter changes.
DATA/ENTER Key
RUN Key
Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is controlled by the
Digital Operator.
STOP Key
Stops Inverter operation.
This key can be enabled or disabled using parameter o2-02 when operating from a source different than the operator.
Note: Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to the key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators light or flash to indicate the inverter operation status.
The RUN key indicator flashes and the STOP key indicator lights during initial excitation or DC braking. The
relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP keys and the Inverter status is shown in
Inverter Output frequency
STOP
Frequency reference
RUN
STOP
Light up
Blink
Off
RUN
STOP
Fig 3.3 RUN and STOP Indicators
3-
4
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's parameters and monitoring functions are organized in five groups which make it easy to read and adjust parameters.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the
.
Drive mode
Quick programming mode
Advanced programming mode
Verify mode
Mode
Autotuning mode
*1
Table 3.2 Modes
Primary function(s)
Use this mode to start/stop the inverter, to monitor values such as the frequency reference or output current and to read out fault informations or the fault history.
Use this mode to read and set the basic parameters.
Use this mode to read and set all parameters.
Use this mode to read and set parameters that have been changed from their factoryset values.
Use this mode when using a motor with unknown motor data in the vector control modes. The motor data are measured/calculated and set automatically.
This mode can also be used to measure the motor line-to-line resistance only.
*1. Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating in the vector control modes.
3
3-
5
3
Switching Modes
The mode selection display appears when the MENU key is pressed. Press the MENU key from the mode selection display to switch through the modes in sequence.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter a mode and to switch from a monitor display to the setting display.
Display During Run
Rdy
U1 01 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Mode Selection
Display
MENU
Monitor Display
Setting Display
ESC
-DRIVE-
Monitor
Rdy
U1 - 01=50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
RESET
Rdy
U101 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02 = 0
V/f Control
"0"
*0*
ESC
ESC
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00=0
Select Language
RESET
-ADV-
Select Language
A100 = 0
*0*
English
"0"
ESC ESC
-ADV-
Select Language
A1-00 = 0
English
"0"
*0*
-VERIFY-
None Modified
ESC
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T101 = 0
*0*
Standard Tuning
"0"
ESC
The constant number will be displayed if a constant has been changed. Press the
DATA/ENTER key to enable the change.
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02 = 0
V/f Control
"0"
*0*
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T1- 01= 0
*0*
Standard Tuning
"0"
INFO
Fig 3.4 Mode Transitions
To run the inverter after viewing/changing parameters press the MENU key and the DATA/ENTER key in sequence to enter the Drive mode. A Run command is not accepted as long as the drive is in any other mode.
To enable Run commands from the terminals during programming set parameter b1-08 to “1”.
3-
6
Drive Mode
In the Drive mode the Inverter can be operated. All monitor parameters (U1-), fault informations and the fault history can be displayed in this mode
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, 1 or 3, the selected frequency reference value (d1-) can be changed from the frequency setting display using the Increment, Decrement, Shift/RESET and Enter keys.
After confirming the change by pressing the ENTER key, the display returns to the Monitor display.
Example Operations
Example key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Display During Running
Rdy
U1 01 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Mode Selection
Display
MENU
Monitor Display
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
A B
-DRIVE-
Monitor
Rdy
U1 - 01=50.00Hz
RESET
ESC
1 2
Rdy
U101 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
ESC
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
-DRIVE-
Monitor
Rdy
U1 - 02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1-04= 2
RESET
Rdy
U102 =50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1-04= 2
ESC
Frequency Setting Display
Rdy
U1 - 01= 0 50.00Hz
(0.00 ~ 50.00)
" 00.00Hz "
ESC
The Frequency Setting
Display will not be displayed when using an analog reference.
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
-DRIVE-
Monitor
U1 - 55 = 11
Rdy
U1-01=50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
Rdy
U2 - 01=OC
U2-02= OV
U2-03=50.00Hz
RESET
ESC
RESET
ESC
Rdy
U155 = 11
U1-01=50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
1
3
2
4
Rdy
U2 01 = OC
U2-02=OV
U2-03=50.00Hz
The fault name will be displayed if the DATA/ENTER
Key is pressed while a constant is being displayed for which a fault code is being displayed.
ESC
U2 - 01= OC
Over Current
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
-DRIVE-
Fault Trace
U2 - 02 = OV
Rdy
U3-03=50.00Hz
U3-04=50.00Hz
U3 - 01= OC
U3-02= OV
U3-03= OH
Rdy
RESET
ESC
RESET
Rdy
U2 02 = OV
U3-03=50.00Hz
U3-04=50.00Hz
3 4
5 6
-DRIVE-
Last Fault
U3 01 = OC
Rdy
U3-02=OV
U3-03=OH
ESC
ESC
ESC
U2 - 02= OV
Rdy
DC Bus Overvolt
U3 - 01= OC
Rdy
Over Current
Rdy
U3 - 02 = OV
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
RESET
ESC
U3 02 = OV
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
Rdy
5 6
ESC
U3 - 02= OV
Rdy
DC Bus Overvolt
A B
Fig 3.5 Operations in Drive Mode
Note: When changing the display with the Increment/Decrement keys, after the last monitor parameter the display jumps back to the first monitor parameter and vice versa (e.g. U1-55 is followed by U1-01).
The display for the first monitor parameter (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON. The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).
3
3-
7
3
Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode the basic parameters required for the elevator operation like speeds, acceleration/ deceleration times etc. can be monitored and set.
The parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change the frequency. The parameter is written and the display returns to the monitor display when the
DATA/ENTER key is pressed.
Refer to
page 5-4, User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode
for details.
Example Operations
Example key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU
-
DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
A B
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02 = 0
*0*
V/f Control
"0"
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02 = 0
*0*
V/f Control
"0"
ESC
MENU
-
ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
-QUICK-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 1.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50"
ESC
-QUICK-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 0 01.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50"
MENU
-QUICK-
Decel Time 1
C1-02 = 1.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50" -VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
ESC
C1-02 = 0 01.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50"
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
E2-11 = 4.00kW
(0.00 ~ 650.00)
"4.00kW"
ESC
-QUICK-
MOL Fault Select
L1-01=1
"1"
*1*
Std Fan Cooled
ESC
A B
Fig 3.6 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
E2-11 = 0 04.00kW
(0.00 ~ 650.00)
"4.00kW"
-QUICK-
MOL Fault Select
L1-01 = 1
*1*
Std Fan Cooled
"1"
3-
8
Advanced Programming Mode
In the advanced programming mode all Inverter parameters can be monitored and set.
A parameter can be changed from the setting displays using the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys. The parameter is saved and the display returns to the monitor display when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed.
for details about the parameters.
Example Operations
Example key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
A B
1 2
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
ESC
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 -00=0
Select Language
RESET
ESC
-ADV-
Select Language
A1 00 = 0
English
"0"
*0*
ESC
-
ADV-
Select Language
A1-00 =
English
"0"
0
*0*
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
MENU
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 02 =0
Control Method
-
ADV-
Accel/Decel
C1 01 = 1.50sec
Accel Time 1
RESET
ESC
RESET
ESC
-ADV-
Control Method
A1 02 = 0
V/f Control
"0"
*0*
1 2
3 4
-
ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1 01 = 1.5sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50sec"
ESC
ESC
-
ADV-
Control Method
A1-02 = 0
V/f Control
"0"
*0*
-
ADV-
Accel Time 1
C101 = 0 01.5sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50sec"
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
-
ADV-
Accel/Decel
C1 02 = 1.50sec
Accel Time 1
RESET
ESC
A B
-
ADV-
Decel Time 1
C1 02 = 1.5sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50sec"
3 4
ESC
-
ADV-
Decel Time 1
C102 = 0 01.5sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50sec"
MENU
Fig 3.7 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
3
3-
9
3
Setting Parameters
Here the procedure to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 1.5 s to 2.5 s is shown.
Step
No.
1
2
Table 3.3 Setting Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode
Digital Operator Display Description
-DRIVE-
Frequency Ref
Rdy
U1 01 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
Power supply turned ON.
3
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
Press the MENU key 3 times to enter the advanced programming mode.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 -00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
Accel / Decel
C1 -01 = 1.50sec
Accel Time 1
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 0 01.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 0
0 1.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 0 0 1 .50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 0 0
2 .50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
-ADV-
Entry Accepted
Press the DATA/ENTER to access the monitor display.
Press the Increment or Decrement key to display the parameter
C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
Press the DATA/ENTER key to access the setting display. The current setting value of C1-01 is displayed.
Press the Shift/RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right.
Press the Increment key to change set value to 2.50 s.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to save the set data.
“Entry Accepted” is displayed for 1 sec after pressing the
DATA/ENTER key.
12
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C101 = 2.50sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
The display returns to the monitor display for C1-01.
3-
10
Verify Mode
The Verify mode is used to display the parameters that have been changed from their default settings, either by programming or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
The parameter A1-02 is the only parameter from the A1- group, which will be displayed in the modified constant list if it has been changed before. The other parameters will not be displayed, even if they are different from the default setting.
In the verify mode, the same procedures as used in the programming mode can be used to change settings. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change a setting. When the DATA/ENTER key is pressed the parameter setting are written and the display returns to the Monitor display.
Example Operations
In the example below the following settings have been changed from their default settings:
•
C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1)
•
•
•
C1-02 (Acceleration Time 2)
E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting)
E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
ESC
A B
C1-01 = 002.0sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
-VERIFY-
Decel Time 2
C1-02 = 002.0sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
E1-01=390VAC
(310~510)
"380VAC"
E2-01= 7.20A
(0.80 ~ 16.00)
"7.00A"
A B
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
-VERIFY-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 0 02.0sec
(0.00 ~ 600.00)
"1.50sec"
-VERIFY-
Decel Time 2
C1-02 = 0 02.0sec
(0.00 ~ 600.0)
"1.50sec"
E1-01= 3 90VAC
(310~510)
"380VAC"
E2-01 = 00 7 .20A
(0.80 ~ 16.00)
"7.00A"
Fig 3.8 Operations in Verify Mode
3
3-
11
3
Autotuning Mode
Autotuning automatically measures and sets the required motor data in order to achieve the maximum performance. Always perform autotuning before starting operation when using the vector control modes.
When V/f control has been selected, stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance can be selected only.
When the motor cannot be operated (e.g. if the ropes cannot be removed from the traction sheave), and Open
Loop or Closed Loop Vector Control shall be used, perform stationary autotuning.
Example of Operation for V/f control
The tuning method for V/f control is fixed to the measurement of the terminal resistance (T1-01=1). Input the the rated output power and the rated current specified on the nameplate of the motor and then press the RUN key. The motor data are measured automatically.
Always set the above items. Otherwise autotuning cannot be started, e.g. it cannot be started from the motor rated voltage input display.
A parameter can be changed from the setting displays using the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys. The parameter is saved when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed.
The following flowchart shows a V/f control Autotuning example.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
ESC
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T1 01 =2 *2*
Term Resistance
"2"
ESC
-A.TUNE-
Mtr Rated Power
T1 02 = 4.00kW
(0.00~650.00)
"4.00kW"
ESC
-A.TUNE-
Rated Current
T1 04 = 7.00A
(0.80 ~ 16.00A)
"7.00A"
ESC
Rdy
0.0Hz/0.0A
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
RUN
The display will automatically change depending on the status of autotuning.
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
01 = 2
*2*
Term Resistance
"2"
-A.TUNE-
Mtr Rated Power
T1-02 = 0 04.00kW
(0.0~400.0)
"4.00kW"
-A.TUNE-
Rated Current
T1-04 = 0 07.00A
(0.80 ~ 16.00A)
"7.00A"
-A.TUNE-
Tune Proceeding
40.0Hz/10.5A
START GOAL
STOP
-A.TUNE-
Tune Aborted
STOP key
Fig 3.9 Operation in Autotuning Mode
If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to
.
40.0Hz/10.5A
START GOAL
Tune Successful
-A.TUNE-
Tune Successful
3-
12
4
Start Up Procedure
This chapter describes the basic setup procedure, the motor data autotuning for each control mode and gives advices if problems occur.
General Start Up Routine....................................................4-2
Power Up ............................................................................4-3
Autotuning...........................................................................4-4
Auto Tuning Precautions.....................................................4-5
Autotuning Procedure with Induction Motors ......................4-6
Autotuning Procedure with PM Motors ...............................4-7
PM Motor Encoder Offset Tuning .......................................4-8
Performance Optimization ................................................4-11
General Start Up Routine
4
Start Up
The following chart shows the basic start up sequence.
START
Mechanical installation
Main and control circuit wiring
Check the encoder power supply selection
* (Closed Loop only)
Switch on the power supply
Select the control mode in parameter A1-02
Perform motor data / encoder offset auto tuning
* V/f control
* Open Loop Vector Control
* Closed Loop Vector Control
* Closed Loop Vector Control for PM
page 4-6, Autotuning Procedure with Induction Motors
page 4-7, Autotuning Procedure with PM Motors
Speed reference source
Analog Input
Digital operator (b1-02 = 0)
Set up the analog/digital I/O’s in the H1-xx,
H2-xx and H3-xx parameters
Select the control sequence in paramerter d1-18
Set up the digital I/O’s in the H1-xx and H2-xx parameters
Set up the
* Acceleration / Deceleration times (C1-xx)
* S-Curves (Jerk) (C2-x)
Set up the
* Preset speed values (d1-xx)
* Acceleration / Deceleration times (C1-xx)
* S-Curves (Jerk) (C2-xx)
Make test runs
Fine Tuning
* Brake sequence tuning
* Special functions setup
FINISH
Fig 4.1 Basic Start Up Sequence
4-
2
Power Up
Before Power Up
The following points should be checked carefully before the power is switched on.
•
The power supply must meet the inverter specification (refer to
page 9-2, Specifications by Model
•
•
The power supply cables must be tightly connected to the right terminals (L1, L2, L3).
The motor cables must be tightly connected to the right terminals on the inverter side (U, V, W) as well as on the motor side.
•
•
•
•
The braking unit / braking resistor must be connected correctly.
The Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device must be wired correctly.
All Inverter control circuit terminals should be switched OFF.
When a PG card is used, the PG must be wired correctly.
Display after Power Up
After normal power up without any problems the operator display shows the following messages
Display for normal operation
-DRIVE-
BB
Base Block
Rdy
The Baseblock message blinks.
When a fault has occurred or an alarm is active a fault or alarm message will appear. In this case, refer to
.
Display for fault operation
-DRIVE-
UV
Main Power Loss
A fault or alarm message is shown on the display.
The example shows a low voltage alarm.
4
Control Mode Selection
As the first thing after power up one of the four control modes must be selected depending on the machine type.
Machine Type
Induction motor without encoder
Table 4.1 Control Mode Selection
Induction motor with incremental encoder
Permanent magnet motor with Hiperface y or EnDat 2.1 encoder
Yaskawa IPM motor with incremental encoder
Control Mode
V/f control
Open Loop Vector Control
Closed Loop Vector Control
Closed Loop Vector Control for
PM motors
Closed Loop Vector Control for
PM motors
A1-02 setting
0
2
3
6
6
PG Card
-
-
PG-B2 / PG-X2
PG-F2
PG-X2
CAUTION
• For Permanent Magnet motors do not use any other control mode than Closed Loop Vector for PM
(A1-02 = 6). Using any other control mode can cause damage to the equipment or can cause dangerous behavior.
4-
3
4
Autotuning
The motor data autotuning function sets the V/f pattern parameters (E1-), motor data parameters
(E2-, E5-) and the encoder data (F1-01) automatically. The steps which have to be performed during
the autotuning depend on the tuning mode selection. Refer to
page 5-53, Motor Autotuning: T
for an overview of the autotuning parameters.
Autotuning Mode Selection
The autotuning mode has to be selected according to selected control mode and the mechanical system (motor no load rotation possible or not).
Table 4.1
shows the selectable tuning mode for each control mode.
Autotuning Mode
Table 4.2 Motor Data Autotuning Modes
Function
Tuning
Mode
Selection
(T1-01)
Standard tuning with rotating motor
Tunes all motor parameters.
IM tuning with not rotationg motor
Tunes the basic motor parameters.
0
1
V/f
No
No
IM Line-to-line resistance tuning
Encoder offset tuning
Tunes the line-to-line resistance only
Tunes the offset between the encoder and magnetic zero position.
2
4
Yes
No
Control Mode
Open
Loop Vector
Closed
Loop Vector
Closed
Loop Vector (PM)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Autotuning Modes
Autotuning with Rotating Motor (T1-01 = 0)
This autotuning mode can be used in any Vector control mode. After the motor nameplate data have been input, the inverter will operate the motor for approximately 1~2 minutes and set the required motor parameters automatically.
IMPORTANT
Use this tuning mode only, if the motor can rotate freely which means that the ropes must be removed and the brake must be open. The gearbox can remain connected to the motor.
Autotuning with Not Rotating Motor (T1-01 = 1)
This autotuning mode can be used for Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control for IM only. The inverter supplies power to the motor for approximately 1 minute and some of the motor parameters are set automatically while the motor does not turn. The motor no-load current and the rated slip value will automatically be fine tuned during the first time operation.
Verify the rated slip value (E2-02) and the no-load current (E2-03) after the first run with nominal speed.
Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance (T1-01 = 2)
Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance can be used in V/f control, Open Loop Vector control and
Closed loop Vector control. The Inverter supplies power to the motor for approximately 20 seconds to measure the motor line-to-line resistance and cable resistance. The motor does not turn during this tuning procedure.
4-
4
Encoder Offset Tuning (T1-01=4)
This tuning mode is available in Closed Loop Vector control for PM motors only. It automatically sets the offset between the magnetic pole and the encoder zero postion. It can be used to retune the offset after an encoder change without changing the motor data settings.
Auto Tuning Precautions
IMPORTANT
General Precautions:
1. Use rotating autotuning whenever high precision is required or for a motor that is not connected to a load.
2. Use not rotating autotuning whenever the load cannot be disconnected from the motor (e.g. the ropes can’t be removed).
3. Make sure, that the mechanical brake is
not
open for not rotating autotuning.
4. During autotuning the motor contactors have to be closed.
5. For autotuning the BB and BB1 signals must be ON (Inverter must not be in base block condition).
6. Confirm, that the motor is mechanically fixed and can not move.
7. Power is supplied during auto tuning, even though the motor does not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
8. Remove the feather key from the motor shaft before performing a tuning with rotating motor with a stand alone motor (no traction sheave or gear mounted).
9. To cancel autotuning, press the STOP key on the Digital Operator.
Precautions for rotating and encoder offset autotuning:
1. The load should be disconnected which means, that the ropes have to be removed and the brake must be open.
2. If the load can’t be removed, the tuning can be done with a balanced car. The tuning result accuracy will be lower which can result in a performance loss.
3. Make sure that the brake is open during autotuning.
4.
During autotuning the motor can be started and stopped repeatedly. When the tuning is finished, “END” will be displayed in the operator panel. Do not touch the motor until this display is shown and the motor has completely stopped.
4
4-
5
4
Autotuning Procedure with Induction Motors
shows the autotuning procedure for an induction motor with or without encoder in V/f-, Open loop
vector and Closed loop vector control.
START
Set the Base Block Inputs BB and
BB1
V/f Control ?
(A1-02 = 0)
Yes
No
(A1-02 = 2/3)
Enter auto tuning mode and set parameter T1-01 = 2
Can the motor rotate freely ?
No
Enter auto tuning mode and set parameter T1-01 = 1
Yes
(ropes removed?)
Enter auto tuning mode and set parameter T1-01 = 0
Set:
T1-02 - Motor rated power
T1-04 - Motor rated current
Press the UP button until
“Tuning Ready” display appears
Set:
T1-02 - Motor rated power
T1-03 - Motor rated voltage
T1-04 - Motor rated current
T1-05 - Rated motor frequency
T1-06 - Motor pole number
T1-07 - Motor rated speed
T1-08 - PG pulse number*
(*CLV only)
Press the UP button until
“Tuning Ready” display appears
Set:
T1-02 - Motor rated power
T1-03 - Motor rated voltage
T1-04 - Motor rated current
T1-05 - Rated motor frequency
T1-06 - Motor pole number
T1-07 - Motor rated speed
T1-08 - PG pulse number*
(*CLV only)
Press the UP button until
“Tuning Ready” display appears
Open the brake
Refer to
and eliminate the fault source
Close the motor contactor(s)
Press the RUN button
No
(Fault code is displayed)
Tuning successful ?
Yes
(” Tuning successful” is displayed)
Open the contactors, open the base block inputs and close the brake if auto tuning with rotating motor was performed
FINISH
Fig 4.2 Autotuning for Induction Motors
4-
6
Autotuning Procedure with PM Motors
Fig 4.3
shows the autotuning procedure for permanent magnet motors. Before tuning make sure that the control mode is set to PM Closed Loop Vector (A1-02 = 6).
START
* Remove the ropes so that the motor can rotate freely
* Set the Base Block inputs BB and BB1
Switch ON the power supply if it is OFF
Does a OPE06 fault occur?
No
Yes
Check parameter
* F1-01
* n8-35
Does a CPF24 fault occur?
No
Yes
Switch off the power supply and check if the right PG card is correctley installed
* Check parameter n8-35
* If EnDat / Hiperface is used
- check the encoder power supply
- check the CLOCK and DATA signal wiring
* Switch off the power supply.
Does a OPE02 fault occur?
No
Yes
S3-13 - Traction sheave diameter
S3-14 - Roping
Set mechanical constants:
S3-15 - Gear ratio
Open the brake, close the motor contactor, turn the motor slowly in Forward direction*
1
and check monitor U1-05.
* Check if the correct PG constant (F1-01) and
absolute encoder resolution (F1-21) has been set.
* Refer to:
page 7-12, Operator Programming Errors
and eliminate the fault source
Does PGO (no encoder feedback) occur?
No
Yes
* Check the wiring
* Check/readjust the encoder
power supply
Is the sign of the
U1-05 value positive
(not -)?
Yes
No
Set the autotuning parameters:
T1-01 = 0 - Rotational Tuning
T2-01 - Motor rated power
T2-02 - Motor base frequency
T2-03 - Motor rated voltage
T2-04 - Motor rated current
T2-05 - Motor pole number
T2-09 - Encoder resolution
T2-10 - Motor voltage constant
Press the UP button until the “Tuning Ready” display appears
Close the motor contactor(s) and press the RUN button
Wait until tuning is finsihed
* Check the encoder wiring
* Change parameter F1-05
Refer to
and eliminate the fault source
FINISH
No
(Fault code is displayed)
Tuning successful?
Yes
(”Tuning successful” is displayed)
Open the contactors, open the baseblock inputs and close the brake
* 1. Forward direction means:
The direction the motor turns with an UP command at terminal
S1 (i.e. with a clockwise rotating 3 phase supply and U-U, V-V,
W-W wiring between inverter and motor). Usually the direction is clockwise seen from the motor shaft (traction sheave) side.
Refer to the motor instruction manual or consult the manufacturer for details about the rotation direction.
Fig 4.3 Autotuning for Permanent Magnet Motors
4
4-
7
4
PM Motor Encoder Offset Tuning
shows the autotuning procedure for an encoder offset tuning. This procedure should be performed if
the encoder has been changed or has not been aligned correctly. Before tuning make sure that PM losed loop vector conntrol is selected (A1-02 = 6) and that the E1- and E5- parameters are set up correctly.
START
Is it possible to remove the ropes ?
Yes
Remove the ropes.
No
Set the Base Block inputs BB and BB1
Balance the car so that it does not move with open brakes.
Note: The tuning accuracy will be lower in this tuning mode
Switch ON the power supply if it is OFF
Does a OPE06 fault occur?
No
Yes
Check parameter
* F1-01
* n8-35
Does a CPF24 fault occur?
No
Yes
Switch off the power supply and check if PG card is correctly installed
* Check parameter n8-35
* If EnDat / Hiperface is used
- check the encoder power supply
- check the CLOCK and DATA signal wiring
* Switch off the power supply.
Does a OPE02 fault occur?
No
Yes
Open the brake, close the motor contactor, turn the motor slowly in Forward direction* 1 and check monitor U1-05.
* Check if the correct PG constant (F1-01) and
absolute encoder resolution (F1-21) has been set.
* Refer to:
page 7-12, Operator Programming Errors
and eliminate the fault source
Does PGO (no encoder feedback) occur?
No
Yes
Is the sign of the
U1-05 value positive
(not -)?
Yes
Set:
T1-01 = 4 - Encoder Offset Tuning
Press the UP button until the “Tuning
Ready” display appears.
No
* Check the wiring
* Check/readjust the encoder
power supply
* Check the encoder wiring
* Change parameter F1-05
Refer to
and eliminate the fault source.
Close the motor contactor(s) and press the RUN key.
Wait until the tuning is finished.
No
(Fault code is displayed)
Tuning successful?
Yes
(”Tuning successful” display is shown)
Open the contactors, open the base block inputs and close the brake
* 1. Forward direction means:
The direction the motor turns with an UP command at terminal S1 (i.e. with a clockwise rotating 3 phase supply and U-U, V-V, W-W wiring between inverter and motor). Usually the direction is clockwise seen from the motor shaft (traction sheave) side.
Refer to the motor instruction manual or consult the manufacturer for details about the rotation direction.
FINISH
Fig 4.4 Encoder Offset Autotuning
4-
8
Precautions for Induction Motor Autotuning
If the Motor Rated Voltage is Higher than the Power Supply Voltage
If the motor rated voltage is higher than the power supply voltage, lower the base voltage value like shown in
Fig 4.5
to prevent saturation of the Inverter’s output voltage. Use the following procedure to perform autotuning:
1. Input the voltage of the input power supply to T1-03 (Motor rated voltage).
2. Input the results of the following formula to T1-05 (Motor base frequency):
T1-05 = Base frequency from motor nameplate ×
Motor rated voltage
3. Perform autotuning.
After the completion of autotuning, set E1-04 (Max. output frequency) to the base frequency from the motor’s nameplate.
Output voltage
Rated voltage from motor name plate
T1-03
4
0
Base frequency from motor name plate x T1-03
Rated voltage from motor name plate
Output frequency
Base frequency from motor name plate
Fig 4.5 Motor Base Frequency and Inverter Input Voltage Setting
If speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), set T1-03 (Motor rated voltage) to the input power supply voltage
× 0.9. In this case at high speeds the output current will increase as the input power supply voltage is reduced. Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the Inverter current.
If the Maximum Frequency is Higher than the Motor Base Frequency
Set the maximum output frequency in parameter E1-04 after autotuning has been performed.
4-
9
4
Autotuning Alarms and Faults
Data Input Errors
The inverter will show a “Data Invalid” message and will not perform autotuning if:
•
the motor speed, rated frequency and pole pair number do not correspond.
Motor Speed
<
⋅
⋅
•
the rated current does not correspond to the rated power value
The inverter calculates the motor power using the input current value and data from the internal motor data table. The calculated value must be between 50% and 150% of the input value for the rated power.
Other Alarms and Faults During Autotuning
For an overview of possible autotuning alarms or faults and corrective actions refer to
4-
10
Performance Optimization
The following table gives adjustment advice for performance improvement after the basic setup has been done.
Problem
Rollback at start
Jerk at start
Vibrations in low and medium speed area
Vibrations in the high and top speed area
V/f and
OLV
CLV
Table 4.3 Performance Optimization
Possible Reason
• Too less torque when the brake opens
• Too slow ASR response when the brake opens.
Countermeasure
• Increase the DC injection current at start in parameter S1-02.
• Set the DC injection time at start S1-
04 as short as possible, but make sure, that brake opens completely before the motor starts to turn.
• Increase the minmum (E1-10) and medium (E1-08) V/f pattern voltages.
Make sure, that the starting and leveling current does not rise too high.
• Increase the ASR gain at start (C5-
03) and decrease the ASR I time at start (C5-04). If vibrations occur set the values back in small steps.
• Increase the Zero servo gain in parameter S1-20.
Common
• Motor torque is not fully established when the brake opens.
• Lengthen the brake release delay time S1-06 and the DC injection/ zero servo time at start S1-04
• Motor contactors close too late
• Make sure, that the contactors are cosed before the Up/Down command is set.
Common
• Motor starts turning when the brake is not completely opened or runs against the brake
• Increase the DC injection time at start
S1-04.
V/f
OLV
CLV
• Too fast acceleration rate change
• Too high output voltage
• Too fast torque compensation
• Too high output voltage
• Too high ASR settings
• Wrong motor slip value
• Increase the S-Curve at start C2-01
• Reduce the V/f pattern settings (E1-
08 / E1-10)
• Increase the torque compesation delay time (C4-02)
• Reduce the V/f pattern settings (E1-
08 / E1-10)
• Decrease C5-01 / C5-03 and increase
C5-02 / C5-04
• Check the motor slip value in parameter E2-02. Increase or decrease it in steps of 0.2 Hz.
OLV
CLV
• Too fast torque compensation
• Too high ASR settings
• Increase the torque compesation delay time (C4-02)
• Decrease C5-01 / C5-03 and increase
C5-02 / C5-04
4
4-
11
4
Vibrations which increase with the speed
Problem
Jerk caused by overshooting when the top speed is reached
Motor stops shortly when the leveling speed is reached
(undershooting)
Jerk at stop
High frequency motor noise
OLV
CLV
Common
V/f
OLV
CLV
Common
• Too fast torque compensation or slip compensation
• Too soft or too hard ASR controller settings
Possible Reason
• Wrong motor data
• Too hard acceleration change.
• Too low torque at low speed
• Too low torque at low speed
• Wrong motor data
• Slip overcompensation
• Wrong motor data
• Too slow ASR controller
• Too fast deceleration rate change.
Countermeasure
• Increase the torque compensation delay time C4-02
• Increase the slip compensation delay time C3-02
• Readjust the ASR P gain C5-01 and the ASR integral time C5-02.
• Readjust the motor data (E2-), especially the slip (E2-02) and noload current values (E2-03) or perform an autotuning
• Increase the S-curve at acceleration end C2-02.
• Increase the minmum (E1-10) and medium (E1-08) V/f pattern voltages.
Make sure, that the starting and leveling current does not rise too high.
• Increase the minmum (E1-10) and medium (E1-08) V/f pattern voltages.
Make sure, that the starting and leveling current does not rise too high.
• Readjust the motor data (E2-), especially the slip (E2-02) and noload current values (E2-03) or perform an autotuning
• Readjust the motor data (E2-), especially the slip (E2-02) and noload current values (E2-03) or perform an autotuning
• Increase the ASR P gain C5-09 and decrease the ASR integral time
C5-10
• Increase the S-curve at deceleration end C2-04.
• Increase the brake close delay time
S1-07 and if necessary the DC injection time at stop S1-05.
Common
• Brake closed too early, so that the motor runs against the brake
• Motor contactor opens when the brake is not yet completely closed
• Check the motor contactor sequence.
Common
CLV
• The carrier frequency is too low.
• Encoder vibrates
• Increase the carrier frequency in parameter C6-02 or C6-11. If the carrier frequency increased higher than the factory setting, a current derating
)
• Check the encoder mounting and the orientation to the motor shaft
Common
• Mechanical problems • Check bearings, gearbox
• Rotational parts (motor armature, handwheel, brake disk/drum) have an unbalance
• Balance the rotating parts
4-
12
5
User Parameters
This chapter describes all user parameters that can be set in the Inverter.
User Parameter Descriptions..............................................5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels .................5-3
User Parameter Tables.......................................................5-8
Setup Settings: A ................................................................5-8
Application Parameters: b.................................................5-10
Tuning Parameters: C.......................................................5-12
Reference Parameters: d..................................................5-18
Motor Parameters: E.........................................................5-21
Option Parameters: F........................................................5-26
Terminal Function Parameters: H .....................................5-32
Protection Function Parameters: L ...................................5-37
Special Adjustments: n2 / n5 ............................................5-43
PM Motor Adjustments: n8 / n9.........................................5-44
Lift Function Parameters: S ..............................................5-47
Motor Autotuning: T ..........................................................5-53
Monitor Parameters: U......................................................5-55
Settings which change with the Control Mode (A1-02) .....5-61
Factory Settings Changing with Inverter Capacity (o2-04)5-63
User Parameter Descriptions
5
Description of User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
User parameter tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an example.
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page b1-01
Reference selection
Sets the frequency reference input method.
0:Digital Operator
1:Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2:MEMOBUS communications
3:Option Card
0 to 3 0 No Q Q Q Q 180H -
• Parameter Number:
• Name:
• Display
• Description:
• Setting Range:
• Factory Setting:
• Change during Operation:
• Control Methods:
• MEMOBUS Register:
• Page:
The number of the user parameter.
The name of the user parameter.
The display shown in the Digital Operator JVOP-160-OY
Details on the function or settings of the user parameter.
The setting range for the user parameter.
The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is changed.)
page 5-61, Settings which change with the Control
for factory settings that are changed by setting the control method.
Indicates whether the parameter can be changed or not while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes:
No:
Changes are possible during operation.
Changes are not possible during operation.
Indicates the control methods in which the user parameter can be monitored or set.
Q:
The item can be monitored and set as well in quick programming mode as in advanced programming mode.
A:
No:
The item can be monitored and set in advanced programming mode only.
The item cannot be monitored or set in this control method.
The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
Reference page for more detailed information about the parameter.
5-
2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.
MENU
Drive Mode
Inverter can be operated and its status can be displayed.
Quick Programming Mode
Minimum parameters required for operation can be monitored or set.
Advanced Programming Mode
All parameters can be monitored or set.
Verify Mode
Parameters changed from the default settings can be
monitored or set.
Autotuning Mode
Automatically sets motor parameters for vector control or measures the line-to-line resistance for V/f control.
Function
Status Monitor Parameters
Fault Trace
Fault History
Initialize Mode
User-specified Setting Mode
Operation Mode Selections
DC Injection Braking
Timer Function
Dwell Functions
Acceleration/Deceleration
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration
Motor Slip Compensation
Torque Compensation
Speed Control (ASR)
Carrier Frequency
Speed References
Field Forcing
V/f Pattern 1
Motor Setup 1
V/f Pattern 2
Motor Setup 2
PM Motor Setup
PG Option Setup
Analog Monitor Card
Digital Output Card
Serial Communications Settings
Multi-function Digital Inputs
Multi-function Digital Outputs
Multi-function Analog Inputs
Motor Overload
Power Loss Ridethrough
Stall Prevention
Reference Detection
Fault Restart
Torque Detection
Torque Limits
Hardware Protection
Automatic Frequency Regulator
Feed Forward Control
PM Motor Adjustment
Monitor Selection
Digital Operator
Copy Function
Brake Sequence
Slip Compensation
Special Sequence Functions
Motor Autotuning 1
Motor Autotuning 2
No.
U1
U2
U3
L8 n2 n5 n8 o1 o2 o3
S1
S2
S3
L5
L6
L7
L1
L2
L3
L4
F4
F5
F6
H1
H2
H3
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
F1
C6 d1 d6
C2
C3
C4
C5
A1
A2 b1 b2 b4 b6
C1
T1
T2
Page
5-43
5-26
5-29
5-22
5
5-
3
5
User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode
Parameter
Number
A1-01
The minimum user parameters required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming mode. The user parameters displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and all other user parameters, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO
BUS
Register
Parameter access level
Access Level
Used to set the parameter access level
(set/read.)
0:Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and setting A1-01 and A1-04.)
1:Used to select user parameters (Only parameters set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be read and set.)
2:Advanced
(Parameters can be read and set in both, quick programming mode (Q) and advanced programming mode
(A).)
0 to 2 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 101H
A1-02
Control method selection
Control Method
Sets the control method for the Inverter.
0:V/f control
2:Open-Loop Vector control
3:Closed Loop Vector control
6:Closed Loop Vector for PM motors
0 to 6 0 No Yes Yes Yes Yes 102H
C1-01
C1-02
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
C2-05
C5-01
C5-02
Acceleration time 1 Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum output fre-
Accel Time 1 quency.
Deceleration time 1 Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to
Decel Time 1
0 Hz.
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
S-Crv Acc @ Start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
S-Crv Acc @ End
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
S-Crv Dec @ Start
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
S-Crv Dec @ End
S-curve Characteristic time below leveling speed
Scurve @ leveling
ASR proportional
(P) gain 1
When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the accel/decel times will increase by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.
ASR P Gain 1
ASR integral time
1
Set the proportional gain 1 and the integral time 1 of the speed control loop
(ASR) for the minimum frequency.
The settings becomes active for acceleration only.
ASR I Time 1
0.0 to
600.00
*1
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
300.00
0.000 to
10.000
1.50 s
0.50 s
0.50 s
0.50 s
0.50 s
0.50 s i i
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
40.00
-
Yes
200H
201H
Yes 20BH
Yes 20CH
Yes 20DH
Yes 20EH
Yes 232H
-
12.00
21BH
0.500 s
-
-
0.300 s
21CH
5-
4
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
C5-03
C5-04
C5-06
C5-07
ASR proportional
(P) gain 2
ASR P Gain 2
ASR integral (I) time 2
ASR I Time 2
Set the proportional gain 2 and the integral time 2 of the speed control loop
(ASR) for the maximum frequency.
ASR delay time
ASR Delay Time
Sets the filter time constant; the time from the speed loop to the torque command output. Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
ASR switching frequency
ASR Gain SW Freq
Sets the frequency for switching between Proportion Gain 1, 2,3 and
Integral Time 1, 2, 3.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.00 to
300.00
0.000 to
10.000
0.000 to
0.500
0.0 to
50.0 Hz
0.0 to
100.0
% i
0.500 s
0.020 sec i
Yes
Yes
No
No
C5-09
ASR proportional
(P) gain 3
ASR P Gain 3
C5-10
ASR integral (I) time 3
ASR I Time 3
Set the proportional gain 3 and the integral time 3 of the speed control loop
(ASR) for the minimum frequency.
The settings becomes active for deceleration only.
0.00 to
300.00
0.000 to
10.000
i i
Yes
Yes d1-09
Nominal speed reference
Nomin Speed vn
Sets the frequency reference when the nominal speed is selected by a digital input.
i d1-14
Inspection speed reference
Inspect Speed vi
Sets the frequency reference when the inspection speed is selected by a digital input d1-17
Leveling speed reference
Level Speed vl
Sets the frequency reference when the leveling speed is selected by a digital input
0 to
120.00
0 to
100.00
0 to
120.00
0 to
100.00
0 to
120.00
0 to
100.00
i i
Yes
E1-01
Input voltage setting
Input
Voltage
Sets the inverter input voltage. This set value will be the basis for the protection functions.
310 to
510
*2
400 V
*2
No
V/f
-
-
-
-
-
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO
BUS
Register
20.00
-
21DH
6.00
-
0.500s
12.00
-
50.00
Hz
50.00
Hz
-
25.00
Hz
25.00
Hz
-
4.00
Hz
-
-
-
4.00
Hz
-
50.00
Hz
-
-
100.00
%
288H
25.00
Hz
-
28FH
-
50.00
%
4.00
Hz
-
292H
8.00%
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
Yes
-
0.0 Hz
-
40.00
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
2.0 %
-
0.300s
Yes
21EH
220H
221H
22EH
231H
300H
5
5-
5
5
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Max. output frequency (FMAX)
E1-04
Max Frequency
E1-05
Max. voltage
(VMAX)
Max Voltage
Base frequency
(FA)
E1-06
Base Frequency
Description
Sets the output voltage of the base frequency (E1-06).
0.0 to
120.0
(with
PG-F2)
0 to
1200
(with
PG-X2)
0 to
3600
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
50.0
Hz
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO
BUS
Register
50.0
Hz
50.0
Hz
-
40.0 to
120.0
(with
PG-F2)
0 to
1200
(with
PG-X2)
0 to
3600
0.0 to
510.0
*2 i
380.0 V
*2
No
No
-
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
150 rpm
No
303H
304H i No
50.0
Hz
50.0
Hz
-
50.0
Hz
-
-
150 rpm
305H
0.0 to
510
*2 i No
37.3
V
*2
25.0
V
*2
307H E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-13
Mid. output frequency voltage
(VB)
Mid voltage A
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
Min Frequency
Min. output frequency voltage
(VMIN)
Min Voltage
Base voltage
(VBASE)
Base Voltage
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
510.0
*2
0.0 to
510.0
*2 i i i
E2-01
E2-02
Mtr Rated Current
Motor rated slip
Motor Rated Slip for motor protection and torque limit. It is an input data for autotuning.
Sets the motor rated slip.
This set value will become the reference value for the slip compensation.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
Motor no-load current
No-Load Current
Number of motor poles
Number of Poles
Motor line-to-line resistance
Term Resistance
Sets the motor no-load current.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the number of motor poles. It is an input data for autotuning.
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
0.85 to
17.00
*3
7.00 A
*4
0.00 to
20.00
2.70 Hz
*4
0.00 to
6.99
2.30 A
*4
2 to 48 4
0.000
to
65.000
3.333
Ω
*4
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
0.5
Hz
0.3
Hz
19.4
V
*2
5.0 V
*2
0.0 V 0.0 V
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
-
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
400 V
30CH
-
-
-
-
-
308H
309H
30EH
30FH
310H
311H
312H
5-
6
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
E2-11
E5-02
E5-03
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
Motor rated output power
Mtr Rated Power
Sets the rated output power of the motor.
This parameter is an input data for autotuning.
Motor rated output power
Rated Power
Rated Motor Current
Rated Current
Number of motor poles
Number of poles
Motor terminal resistance
Term resistance d-Axis Inductance
Sets the rated output power of the motor.
Sets the rated motor current.
Sets the motor pole number.
Sets the motor line-to-line resistance
Sets the D-axis inductance.
d-ax inductance
E5-07 q-Axis Inductance q-ax inductance
Sets the Q-axis inductance.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.00 to
650.00
0.00 to
300.00
0.00 to
200.00
4 to 48
0.000 to
65.000
0.00 to
300.00
0.00 to
600.00
3.70 kW
*4
3.70 kW
*4
7.31
A
4
*4
1.326
Ohm
19.11 mH
*4
26.08 mH
*4
*4
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
E5-09
Motor voltage constant
Voltage constant
Sets the voltage constant of the motor.
50.0 to
4000.0
478.6 mV
*4
No
V/f
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PG constant
F1-01
PG Pulses/Rev
Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution
0 to
60000 i No -
F1-05
L1-01
PG rotation
PG Rotation Sel
Motor protection selection
MOL Select
0:Phase A leads with forward run command. (Phase B leads with reverse run command.)
1:Phase B leads with forward run command. (Phase A leads with reverse run command.)
0 or 1
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.
0:Disabled
1:Protection for general purpose motor
(fan cooled)
2:Protection for frequency converter motor (external cooled)
3:Protection for special vector control motor
5:Permanent magnet constant torque motor
0 to 3
0 or 5 i
1
5
No
No
-
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO
BUS
Register
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
1024
-
0
-
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
2048
Yes
318H
0C2H
0C3H
Yes 0C4H
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1
-
0C5H
0C6H
0C7H
0C9H
380H
384H
480H n8-35
Magnetic pole position detection
Mag det sel
Sets the detection method for magnetic pole position of a PM motor.
0:Automatic detection (applicable for
Yaskawa IPM motor only)
4:Hiperfacey Data
5:EnDat Data
0, 4 or
5
5 No Yes 192H
*1. The setting ranges for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
*2. The given values are for a 400 V class Inverter.
*3. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The given values are for a 3.7 kW 400 V Class Inverter.
*4. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The given value is for a 3.7 kW 400 V Class Inverter.
5
5-
7
User Parameter Tables
5
Setup Settings: A
Initialize Mode: A1
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A1-00
Language selection for
Digital Operator display
Select
Language
Used to select the language displayed on the Digital Operator
(JVOP-160-OY only).
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
3: French
4: Italian
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
This parameter is not changed by the initialize operation.
0 to 6 0 Yes A A A A 100H –
A1-01
Parameter access level
Access Level
Used to set the parameter access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and setting A1-01 and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user parameters
(Only parameters set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be read and set.)
2: Advanced
(Parameters can be read and set in both, quick programming mode (Q) and advanced programming mode (A).)
0 to 2
A1-02
Control method selection
Control Method
Used to select the control method for the Inverter
0: V/f control
2: Open loop vector
3: Closed Loop Vector
6: Closed Loop Vector for PM motors
This parameter is not changed by the initialize operation.
0 to 6
A1-03
Initialize
Init Parameters
Used to initialize the parameters using the specified method.
0: No initializing
1110:Initializes using the user parameters
2220:Initializes using a two-wire sequence. (Initializes to the factory setting.)
A1-04
Password
Enter Password
Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects some parameters of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed, A1-
01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 parameters can no longer be changed. (Programming mode parameters can be changed.)
0 to
2220
0 to
9999
2
0
0
0
Yes
No
No
No
Q
Q
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
101H
102H
103H
104H
-
-
5-
8
Parameter
Number
A1-05
Select Password
Name
Display
Password setting
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
Usually this parameter is not displayed. When the Password (A1-
04) is displayed, hold down the
RESET key and press the Menu key. The password will be displayed.
0 to
9999
0 No A A A A 105H
User-set Parameters: A2
The parameters set by the user are listed in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A2-01 to
A2-32
User specified parameters
User Param 1 to
32
Used to select the function for each of the user specified parameters. User parameters are the only accessible parameters if
Parameter Access Level is set to user parameters (A1-01=1) b1-01 to
S3-24
– No A A A A
106H to
125H
5
5-
9
5
Application Parameters: b
Operation Mode Selections: b1
Name
Parameter
Number
Display
Description b1-01
Reference source selection
Reference
Source
Sets the frequency reference input method.
0:Digital Operator
1:Control circuit terminal (analog input)
3:Option Card
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
0, 1 or
3 b1-02
RUN command source selection
Run Source
Sets the run command input method.
0:Digital Operator
1:Control circuit terminal (digital multifunction inputs)
3:Option Card
0, 1 or
3
0
1
No
No
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
180H
181H
b1-06 b1-08
Control input scan
Cntl Input
Scans
Used to set the responsiveness of the control inputs (forward/ reverse and multi-function inputs.)
0:Fast reading
1:Normal reading (Can be used for possible malfunction due to noise.)
Run command selection in programming modes
RUN CMD at
PRG
Used to set an operation prohibition in programming modes.
0:Operation prohibited.
1:Operation permitted (Disabled when Digital Operator is the selected Run command source
(b1-02 = 0)).
0 or 1
0 or 1
1
1
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
185H
187H
-
-
DC Injection Braking: b2
Name
Parameter
Number
Display
Description b2-08
Magnetic flux compensation volume
Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage of the noload current.
Field Comp
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to
1000
0% No
V/f
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A 190H -
5-
10
Timer Function: b4
Param eter
Number
Name
Display
Description b4-01
Timer function
ON-delay time
Delay-ON
Timer
Sets the timer function output ONdelay time (dead band) for the timer function input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1- or H2-.
b4-02
Timer function
OFF-delay time
Delay-OFF
Timer
Sets the timer function output OFFdelay time (dead band) for the timer function input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1- or H2-.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
0.0 s
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1A3H
1A4H
Dwell Functions: b6
Param eter
Number
Name
Display b6-01 b6-02 b6-03 b6-04
Dwell frequency at start
Dwell Ref @
Start
Dwell time at start
Dwell Time
@ Start
Dwell frequency at stop
Dwell Ref @
Stop
Dwell time at stop
Dwell Time
@ Stop
Description
Run command
Output frequency
ON
OFF
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Close d Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
10.0
b6-02 b6-01 b6-03 b6-04
Time
0.0 to
120.0
The dwell function can be used to hold the output frequency temporarily.
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1B6H
1B7H
1B8H
1B9H
Torque Monitor: b8
Param eter
Number
Name
Display b8-17
Torque monitor gain
Torque Mon
Gain
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Close d Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 to
2.00
1.00
No A 1F9H
5
5-
11
5
Tuning Parameters: C
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
C1-01
Acceleration time 1 Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the
Accel Time 1 maximum output frequency.
C1-02
Deceleration time 1 Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum
Decel Time 1 output frequency to 0 Hz.
C1-03
Acceleration time 2 Sets the acceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/
Accel Time 2 decel time 1” is set to ON.
C1-04
Deceleration time 2 Sets the deceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/
Decel Time 2 decel time 1” is set to ON.
C1-05
Acceleration time 3 Sets the acceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/
Accel Time 3 decel time 2” is set to ON.
0.00 to
600.00
*1
C1-06
Deceleration time 3 Sets the deceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/
Decel Time 3 decel time 2” is set to ON.
1.50 s
C1-07
Acceleration time 4 Sets the acceleration time when the frequency reference is
Accel Time 4 below the value set in C1-11.
C1-08
C1-09
Deceleration time 4 Sets the deceleration time when the frequency reference is
Decel Time 4 below the value set in C1-11.
Emergency stop time
Fast Stop Time
Sets the deceleration time when the frequency reference is below the value set in C1-11.
C1-10
Accel/decel time setting unit
Acc/Dec Units
Sets the number of decimals for the acceleration / deceleration time parameters.
0:0.01-second units
1:0.1-second units
C1-11
Decel time switching frequency
Acc/Dec SW Freq
Sets the frequency for automatic acceleration/deceleration switching.
If the output frequency is below the set frequency: Accel/decel time 4
If the output frequency is above the set frequency: Accel/decel time 1.
0 or 1
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
100.0
0
0.0 Hz
0.0 %
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
200H
201H
202H
203H
204H
205H
206H
207H
208H
209H
20AH
-
*1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10. If C1-10 is set to 1, the setting range for acceleration/deceleration times becomes 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds.
5-
12
S-Curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
Param eter
Number
Name
Display
Description
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
C2-05
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
S-Crv Acc @
Start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
S-Crv Acc @
End
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
S-Crv Dec @
Start
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
S-Crv Dec @
End
S-curve Characteristic time below leveling speed
Scurve @ leveling
Set the S-curve times at speed changes to reduce the jerk. The S-curves can be set separately for every kind of speed change.
C2-02
C2-01
T accel
= C2-01
2
T decel
= C2-03
2
C2-04
C2-03
C2-05
Time
When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the accel/decel times will increase by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.50 s
0.50 s
0.50 s
0.50 s
0.50 s
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
20BH
20CH
20DH
20EH
232H
5
5-
13
5
Motor Slip Compensation: C3
Param eter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
C3-01
Slip compensation gain
Slip Comp
Gain
Used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a load.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust this parameter under the following circumstances.
• When motor speed is lower than the frequency reference increase the set value.
• When motor speed is higher than the frequency reference decrease the set value.
In Closed Loop Vector control this value is the gain for compensating the slip caused by temperature variation.
C3-02
Slip compensation delay time
Slip Comp
Time
Sets the Slip Compensation delay time.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust this parameter under the following circumstances.
• Reduce the setting when Slip
Compensation responsiveness is low.
• When speed is not stable, increase the setting.
C3-03
Slip compensation limit
Slip Comp
Limit
Sets the slip compensation limit as a percentage of motor rated slip.
0.0 to
2.5
0 to
10000
0 to
250
1.0
2000 ms
200%
Yes
No
No
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
20FH
210H
211H
Page
C3-04
Slip compensation selection during regeneration
Slip Comp
Regen
0:Disable
1:Enabled
When the slip compensation during regeneration function has been activated and regeneration capacity increases momentarily, it might be necessary to use a braking option
(braking resistor, braking resistor unit or braking unit.)
0 or 1 1 No A 212H
C3-05
Output voltage limit operation selection
Output V limit Sel
0:Disabled
1:Enabled. (The motor flux will be lowered automatically when the output voltage become saturated.)
0 or 1 1 No A A 213H
5-
14
Torque Compensation: C4
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
C4-01
C4-02
Torque compensation gain
Torq Comp Gain
Torque compensation delay time constant
Torq Comp Time
Sets the torque compensation gain.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust it under the following circumstances:
• When the cable is long increase the set value.
• When the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (Max. applicable motor capacity), increase the set values.
• When the motor is oscillating, decrease the set values.
Adjust the torque compensation gain so that at minimum speed the output current does not exceed the Inverter rated output current.
Do not change the torque compensation gain from its default
(1.00) when using Open Loop
Vector control.
0.00 to
2.50
The torque compensation delay time is set in ms units.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust it under the following circumstances:
• When the motor is oscillating, increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness of the motor is low, decrease the set values.
0 to
10000
C4-03
Starting torque compensation
(FWD)
FTorqCmp @
Start
Sets the torque compensation value at start in FWD direction
0.0 to
200.0%
C4-04
Starting torque compensation
(REV)
RTorqCmp @
Start
C4-05
Starting torque compensation time constant
TorqCmpDelayT
Sets the torque compensation value at start in REV direction
Sets starting torque start-up time.
When 0 ~ 4 ms is set, it is operated without filter.
-
200.0% to 0.0
0 to 200
1.00
i
0.0%
0.0%
10 ms
Yes
No
No
No
No
A
200 ms
50 ms
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
215H
216H
217H
218H
219H
5
5-
15
5
Speed Control (ASR): C5
Name
Param eter
Number
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
C5-01
C5-02
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
ASR P Gain 1
ASR integral (I) time 1
Set the proportional gain 1 and the integral time 1 of the speed control loop (ASR) for the maximum frequency.
ASR I Time 1
0.00 to
300.00
0.000 to
10.000 sec i i
C5-03
C5-04
ASR proportional (P) gain 2 Set the proportional gain 2 and the integral time 2 of the speed control
ASR P Gain 2 loop (ASR) for the minimum fre-
ASR integral (I) time 2 quency.
The setting is active only for acceleration.
ASR I Time 2
0.00 to
300.00
i
C5-06
C5-07
C5-08
C5-09
C5-10
ASR delay time
ASR Gain SW
Freq
ASR switching frequency
ASR Gain SW
Freq
ASR integral (I) limit
Sets the ASR output delay time.
Sets the frequency for switching between Proportion Gain 1, 2,3 and
Integral Time 1, 2, 3.
ASR I Limit
Set the parameter to a small value to prevent any radical load change. A setting of 100% is equal to the maximum output frequency.
ASR proportional (P) gain 3
ASR P Gain 3
ASR integral (I) time 3
Set the proportional gain 3 and the integral time 3 of the speed control loop (ASR) for the minimum frequency.
The settings is active for deceleration only.
ASR I Time 3
0.000 to
0.500
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
100.0
0 to
400
0.00 to
300.00
0.000 to
10.000 sec
0.020 s i
400% i i
C5-15
ASR gain for encoder offset tuning
Pullin ASR
Pgain
Sets the ASR P gain which is used for the encoder offset tuning if Hiperface or EnDat encoders are used.
0.000 to
10.000 sec
0.500 s
0.00 to
300.00
5.00
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
-
Q
40.00
-
Page
21BH
-
Q
3.00
Q
0.500
-
-
21CH
-
Q
0.300
Q
20.00
-
-
21DH
-
Q
3.00
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Q
-
Q
0.0 Hz
-
A
Q
40.00
-
Q
0.500
-
-
Q
A
-
Q
2.0 %
A
-
Q
3.00
-
Q
0.300
A
21EH
220H
221H
222H
22EH
231H
238H
Carrier Frequency: C6
Param eter
Number
Name
Display
Description
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection 1
CarrierFreq Sel
Selects the carrier frequency for
Induction motor control modes.
1: 2 kHz
2: 5 kHz
3: 8 kHz
4: 10 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15 kHz
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
1 to 6 3 No A A A 224H
5-
16
Param eter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
C6-11
Carrier frequency selection 2
CarrierFreq Sel
Selects the carrier frequency for PM motor control modes
1:2 kHz
2:4 kHz
3:6 kHz
4:8 kHz
5:12 kHz
6:15 kHz
1 to 6 4 No A 22DH
Page
5
5-
17
5
Reference Parameters: d
Preset Reference: d1
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Frequency reference 1
0 to
120.00
*1,*2 d1-01
Reference 1
Sets the frequency reference.
d1-02
Frequency reference 2
Reference 2
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command
1 is ON for a multi-function input.
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
d1-03
Frequency reference 3
Reference 3
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command
2 is ON for a multi-function input. d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07
Frequency reference 4
Reference 4
Frequency reference 5
Sets the frequency when multistep speed command 3 is ON for a multi-function input.
Reference 5
Frequency reference 6
Reference 6
Frequency reference 7
Reference 7
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1 and 2 are ON for multifunction inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1 and 3 are ON for multifunction inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 2 and 3 are ON for multifunction inputs.
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
d1-08 d1-09
Frequency reference 8
Reference 8
Nominal speed
Nomin Speed vn
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1, 2, and 3 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when the nominal speed is selected by a digital input.
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
0 to
100.00
% i i i i i i i i i
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
V/f
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
Q
50.00
Hz
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
0.00
Hz
A
0.00
Hz
-
Pag e
280H
-
A
0.00 %
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
Q
50.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
-
A
0.00 %
-
A
0.00 %
-
A
0.00 %
-
A
0.00 %
-
A
0.00 %
-
A
0.00 %
-
A
0.00 %
281H
282H
283H
284H
285H
286H
287H
Q
50.00
Hz
-
-
Q
100.00
%
288H
5-
18
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Intermediate speed 1
Interm Speed v1
Sets the frequency reference when the intermediate speed 1 is selected by a digital input.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to
120.00
i i i i i i i
V/f
A
0.00
Hz
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
0.00
Hz
A
0.00
Hz
-
28BH
-
A
0.00 %
Pag e
d1-10 d1-11
Intermediate speed 2
Interm Speed v2
Sets the frequency reference when the intermediate speed 2 is selected by a digital input.
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
Yes
Yes
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
-
A
0.00 %
28CH
d1-12
Intermediate speed 3
Interm Speed v3
Sets the frequency reference when the intermediate speed 3 is selected by a digital input.
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
Yes
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
A
0.00
Hz
-
-
A
0.00 %
-
28DH
Releveling speed
Relevel Speed vr
Sets the frequency reference when the releveling speed is selected by a digital input.
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
A
0.00
Hz
A
0.00
Hz
A
0.00
Hz d1-13 d1-14
Inspection speed
Sets the frequency reference when the inspection speed is selected by a digital input.
Inspect Speed vi
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
Yes
Yes
-
Q
25.00
Hz
-
-
Q
25.00
Hz
-
-
Q
25.00
Hz
-
A
0.00 %
-
Q
50.00
%
28EH
28FH
d1-15
Rescue Operation Speed
Rescue OP Spd
Sets the frequency reference when rescue operation is enabled by a digital input.
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
Yes
A
5.00
Hz
-
A
5.00
Hz
-
A
5.00
Hz
-
-
A
10.00
%
290H
d1-17
Leveling Speed
Sets the frequency reference when the leveling speed is selected by a digital input.
Level Speed vl
0 to
100.00
%
0 to
120.00
Yes
Q
4.00
Hz
-
Q
4.00
Hz
-
Q
4.00
Hz
-
-
Q
8.00 %
292H
0 to
100.00
% d1-18
Speed priority selection
SpeedPriority-
Sel
Speed reference priority selection
0: Use Multi-Speed reference
(d1-01 to d1-08)
1: High Speed reference has priority.
2: Leveling speed reference has priority.
3: Use multi-speed reference
With no speed selected, the up/ down signal is switched off
0 to 3 1 Yes A A A A 2A7H
d1-19
Second motor speed
Spd@Door
Motor
Sets the speed reference if motor
2 is selected.
0.00 to
120.00
0.00
Hz
No A A A 2A8H
*1. The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor, default: 0.01 Hz). If the display unit is changed, the setting range values also change
*2. The maximum setting value depends on the setting of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
5
5-
19
5
Field Forcing: d6
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description d6-03
Field forcing function selection
Field Force
Sel
Enables or disables field forcing function.
0:Disabled
1:Enabled
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 or 1 0 No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A A 2A2H
d6-06
Field forcing function
Limit
FieldForce
Limit
Sets the upper limit for the excitation current applied by the field forcing function.
A setting of 100% is equal to the motor no-load current.
Field forcing is active during all types of operation except DC Injection.
100 to
400
400% No A A 2A5H
5-
20
Motor Parameters: E
V/f Pattern 1: E1
Param eter
Number
Name
Display
Description
E1-01
Input voltage setting
Input
Voltage
Max. output frequency
(FMAX)
Sets the Inverter input voltage.
This setting is used as a reference value for protection functions.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Chang e during
Operation
310 to
510
*1
400 V
*1
40.0 to
120.0
E1-04
Max Frequency
(PG-
F2)
0 to
1200
(PG-
X2)
0 to
3600 i
E1-05
Max. output voltage
(VMAX)
Max Voltage
Output Voltage (V)
0.0 to
510.0
*1
380.0
V
*1
Base frequency
(FA)
E1-06
Base Frequency
E1-07
E1-08
Mid. output frequency (FB)
Mid Frequency
A
Mid. output frequency voltage
(VB)
Mid Voltage A
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E1-07 and
E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-
08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07
(FB)
≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
0.0 to
120.00
20 to
7200 rpm
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
510
*1 i
3.0 Hz i
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Q
Q
50.00
Hz
Q
50.00
Hz
Q
50.00
Hz
-
Q
Q
50.00
Hz
Q
50.00
Hz
Q
50.00
Hz
-
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
Q
-
Q
-
A
Q
-
Q
-
-
Q
-
Q
150 rpm
-
-
Q
150 rpm
-
300H
303H
304H
305H
306H
307H
E1-09
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
Min Frequency
0.0 to
120.0
0 to
7200
E1-10
E1-13
Min. output frequency voltage
(VMIN)
Min Voltage
Base voltage
(VBASE)
Base Voltage
Sets the output voltage of the base frequency (E1-06).
*1. The given values are for a 400 V Class Inverter.
*2. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
0.0 to
510.0
*1
0.0 to
510.0
*1 i i i
*2
No
No
No
No
Q
37.3
V
*1
Q
0.5
Hz
Q
25.0
V
*1
-
Q
0.3 Hz
A
0.0 Hz
-
-
-
A
0 rpm
Q
19.4
V
*1
Q
5.0 V
*1
-
A
0.0 V
A
0.0V
-
Q
200 V
308H
309H
30CH
5
5-
21
5
Motor 1 Setup: E2
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06
E2-07
E2-08
E2-09
E2-10
Motor rated current
Motor Rated
FLA
Sets the motor rated current.
This set value will become the reference value for motor protection and torque limits.
This parameter is an input data for autotuning.
Motor rated slip
Motor Rated
Slip
Sets the motor rated slip.
This set value will become the reference value for the slip compensation.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Motor noload current
No-Load
Current
Number of motor poles
Number of
Poles
Motor lineto-line resistance
Term Resistance
Motor leak inductance
Leak Inductance
Sets the motor no-load current.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the number of motor poles.
This value is an input data for autotuning.
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
Saturation
Comp1
Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
Saturation
Comp2
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux.
This parameter is automatically set during rotating autotuning.
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux.
This parameter is automatically set during rotating autotuning.
Motor mechanical losses
Mechanical loss
Sets the motor mechanical losses as a percentage of motor rated power.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
The value can be adjusted if there is e.g. a great torque loss due to heavy friction in the machine. The output torque will be compensated for the set mechanical loss.
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Tcomp Iron
Loss
Sets motor iron losses.
0.85 to
17.00
*1
0.00 to
20.00
2.70 Hz
*2
0.00 to
6.99
*3
2.30 A
*2
2 to 48 4 poles
0.000
to
65.000
0.0 to
40.0
0.00 to
0.50
0.50 to
0.75
0.0 to
10.0
0 to
65535
7.00 A
*2
3.333
*2
Ω
19.3%
*2
0.50
0.75
0.0%
130 W
*2
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Q
Q
Q
-
Q
-
-
-
-
A
Q
Q
Q
-
Q
A
A
A
-
-
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
30EH
30FH
310H
311H
312H
313H
314H
315H
316H
317H
5-
22
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
E2-11
E2-12
Motor rated output power
Mtr Rated
Power
Sets the rated output power of the motor.
This parameter is an input data for autotuning.
Motor iron saturation coefficient 3 This parameter is automatically set
Saturation during rotating autotuning.
Comp3
0.00 to
650.00
1.30 to
1.60
3.70
*2
1.30
No
No
Q
-
Q
A
Q
A
-
-
318H
328H
*1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The given value is for a 400 V inverter with 3.7 kW.
*2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The given value is for a 400 V inverter with 3.7 kW.
*3. The setting range depends on the inverter capacity and on the setting of E2-01. The maximum value is E2-01 minus 0.01A. The given setting range is for a 400 V inverter with 3.7 kW.
V/f Pattern 2: E3
Param eter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
E3-01
E3-02
E3-03
E3-04
E3-05
E3-06
E3-07
E3-08
Control mode selection
Control Method
Sets the contol mode for motor 2.
0:V/f control
2:Open Loop Vector control
3:Closed Loop Vector control for induction motors
Max. output frequency
(FMAX)
Max Frequency
Max. output voltage
(VMAX)
Max Voltage
Base frequency
(FA)
Base Frequency
Mid. output frequency (FB)
Mid Frequency
Mid. output frequency voltage
(VB)
Mid Voltage
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
Min Frequency
Min. output frequency voltage
(VMIN)
Min Voltage
Output Voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX)
≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-
07 (FB)
≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
0 to 3
40.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
510.0
*1
0.0 to
120.00
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
510
*1
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
510.0
0
50.00
Hz
400.0
V
50.00
Hz i i i i
*1. These are values for a 400 V Class Inverter.
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
(2.5)
A
30.0
V
A
A
A
A
A
(3.0)
A
26.4
V
*1
A
1.2
Hz
A
0.5 Hz
A
0.0 Hz
A
18.0
A
4.8 V
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
319H
31AH
31BH
31CH
31DH
31EH
31FH
320H
5
5-
23
5
Motor 2 Setup: E4
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
E4-01
E4-02
E4-03
E4-04
E4-05
E4-06
E4-07
Motor rated current
Motor Rated
FLA
Sets the motor rated current.
This set value will become the reference value for motor protection and torque limits.
This parameter is an input data for autotuning.
Motor rated slip
Motor Rated
Slip
Sets the motor rated slip.
This set value will become the reference value for the slip compensation.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Motor noload current
No-Load
Current
Number of motor poles
Number of
Poles
Motor lineto-line resistance
Term Resistance
Motor leak inductance
Leak Inductance
Sets the motor no-load current.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the number of motor poles.
This value is an input data for autotuning.
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Motor rated power
Mtr Rated
Power
Sets the motor rated power.
0.85 to
17.00
*1
0.00 to
20.00
2.70 Hz
0.00 to
13.99
*3
7.00 A
*2
2.30 A
2 to 48 4 poles
0.000
to
65.000
0.0 to
40.0
0.00 to
650.00
3.333
Ω
19.3%
3.70 kW
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
-
A
-
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
321H
322H
323H
324H
325H
326H
327H
*1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The given value is for a 400 V inverter with 3.7 kW.
*2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The given value is for a 400 V inverter with 3.7 kW.
*3. The setting range depends on the inverter capacity and on the setting of E2-01. The maximum value is E2-01 minus 0.01A. The given setting range is for a
400 V inverter with 3.7 kW.
5-
24
PM Motor Setup: E5
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
E5-02
Motor rated power
Rated power
Sets the motor rated power.
E5-03
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
E5-07
E5-09
Motor rated current
Rated current
Number of motor poles
Number of
Poles
Motor lineto-line resistance
Term Resistance
D-Axis
Inductance
Sets the motor rated current.
This set value will become the reference value for motor protection and torque limits.
Sets the number of motor poles.
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance.
Leak Inductance
Q-Axis
Inductance
Leak Inductance
Motor voltage constant
Voltage constant
Sets the motors d-axis inductance
Sets the motors q-axis inductance
Sets the motor voltage constant.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.00 to
300.00
0.00 to
200.00
*2
2 to 48
0.000
to
65.000
0.00 to
300.00
0.00 to
600.00
50.0 to
4000.0
3.7kW
*1
7.31A
4 poles
1.326
Ω
19.11 mH
26.08 mH
478.6
mV
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
*1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The given value is for a 400V class inverter with 3.7 kW.
*2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The given value is for a 400 V class inverter of 3.7 kW is given.
32AH
32BH
32CH
32DH
32EH
32FH
330H
Page
5
5-
25
5
Option Parameters: F
PG Option Setup: F1
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
F1-01
PG constant
PG Pulses/Rev
Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution
F1-02
Operation selection at PG open circuit
(PGO)
PG Fdbk Loss
Sel
Sets the PG disconnection stopping method.
0:Ramp to stop (Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time
1, C1-02.)
1:Coast to stop
2:Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
3:Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, avoid to use this setting.)
0 to 3
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to
60000
512,
1024
*1
2048
, i No
V/f
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Q
1024
-
-
-
Q
2048
MEMO-
BUS
Register
380H
Page
1 No A A 381H
F1-03
Operation selection at overspeed (OS)
PG Overspeed
Sel
Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS) fault occurs.
0:Ramp to stop (Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time
1, C1-02.)
1:Coast to stop
2:Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
3:Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, avoid to use this setting.)
F1-04
Operation selection at speed deviation
PG
Deviation Sel
Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation (DEV) fault occurs.
0:Ramp to stop (Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time
1, C1-02.)
1:Coast to stop
2:Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
3:Continue operation (DEV is displayed and operation continued.)
F1-05
PG rotation direction
PG Rotation Sel
0:Phase A leads with forward run command. (Phase B leads with reverse run command; Counter
Clockwise rotation)
1:Phase B leads with forward run command. (Phase A leads with reverse run command; Clockwise rotation)
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 or 1
F1-06
PG division rate
(PG pulse monitor)
PG Output
Ratio
Sets the division ratio for the PG speed control card pulse output.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m
(n=0 or 1 m=1 to 32)
The first digit of the value of F1-06 stands for n, the second and the third stands for m.
This parameter is effective only when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio settings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1.
1 to 132
1
3
0
1
No
No
No
No
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
382H
383H
384H
385H
5-
26
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
F1-12
F1-13
F1-14
F1-18
Overspeed detection level
Sets the overspeed detection
PG Overspd
Level method.
Motor speeds that continue to
Overspeed detection delay time exceed the value set in F1-08 (set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency) for the time set in F1-09 are detected as overspeed
PG Overspd
Time faults.
Excessive speed deviation detection level
PG Deviate
Level
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
PG Deviate
Time
Number of PG gear teeth 1
Sets the speed deviation detection method.
Any speed deviation above the F1-
10 set level (set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency) that continues for the time set in
F1-11 is detected as a speed deviation.
The speed deviation is the difference between actual motor speed and the speed reference command.
PG#Gear
Teeth1
Number of PG gear teeth 2
Sets the number of teeth on the gears if there are gears between the
PG and the motor.
PG Input Pulses x 60
F1-01 x
F1-13
F1-12
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if one of these parameters is set to 0.
PG#Gear
Teeth2
PG open-circuit detection delay time
PGO Detect
Time
Used to set the PG disconnection detection time. PGO will be detected if the detection time exceeds the set time.
DV3 fault detection selection
DV3 detect sel
Sets the number of scans (5ms) until a DV3 fault (wrong direction) is detected.
0:No DV3 detection n: A DV3 fault is detected after n x
5msec.
0 to 120 115%
0.0 to
2.0
0 to 50
0.0 to
10.0
0 to
1000
0.0 to
10.0
0 to 5
0.0 s
10%
0.5 s
0
0
2.0 s
1
F1-19
DV4 fault detection selection
DV4 detect sel
Sets the number of pulses until a
DV4 fault (wrong direction) is detected.
0:No DV4 detection n: A DV3 fault is detected after n pulses.
0 to
5000
1024
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
387H
388H
389H
38AH
38BH
38CH
38DH
3ADH
3AEH
F1-21
Absolute encoder resolution
PG-F2 Resolution
Sets the serial line resolution for absolute encoders (Hiperface or
EnDat).
0:16384
1:32768
2:8192
(if EnDat is selected (n8-35=5),
F1-21 is fixed to 2)
0 to 2 2 No A 3B0H
5
5-
27
5
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
F1-22
Magnet position offset
Mag Theta
Comp
Sets the Offset between the rotor magnet and encoder zero position.
F1-25
Encoder copy selection
Enc Copy Sel
Used to memorize encoder and motor data in the encoder memory
(for Hiperface and EnDat encoders)
0:Normal operation
1:WRITE (Inverter to encoder)
2:COPY (Encoder to inverter)
3:VERIFY
F1-26
Encoder copy write permission selection
Write Allowable
Sets wether saving parameters in the encoder is permitted or not.
0:Write prohibited
1:Write permitted
*1. Can be set only if HIPEFACE y
is selected as encoder type.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 to 360 60 °
0 to 3
0 or 1
0
0
No
No
No
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
3B1H
3B4H
3B5H
5-
28
Analog Monitor Cards: F4
Param eter
Number
Name
F4-01
Channel 1 monitor selection
AO Ch1 Select
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
Channel 1 gain
AO Ch1 Gain
Channel 2 monitor selection
AO Ch2 Select
Channel 2 gain
AO Ch2 Gain
Channel 1 output monitor bias
AO Ch1 Bias
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Using an AO-08 option card the possible outputs signal is 0 to
+10V only. The setting of F4-07 and F4-08 has no effect.
Sets the channel 1 item bias to
100%/10 V when the analog monitor card is used.
This function is enabled when the analog monitor card is used.
1 to 56
1 to 75
0.0 to
1000.0
1 to 56
1 to 75
Monitor selection: Sets the number of the monitor item to be output.
(Numerical portion of U1-
)
4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28, 34,
35, 39 and 40 cannot be set.
0.0 to
1000.0
-110.0 to
110.0
i
100.0% Yes
3
50.0%
0.0%
No
No
Yes
Yes
A
2
-
A
A
-
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
2
A
2
-
-
A
5
MEMO
BUS
Register
391H
Page
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
392H
393H
394H
395H
F4-06
Channel 2 output monitor bias
AO Ch2 Bias
Gain: Sets the percentage of the monitor item, which is equal to
10V output.
Bias: Sets the percentage of the monitor item, which is equal to
0V output.
-110.0 to
110.0
0.0% Yes A A A A 396H
F4-07
F4-08
Analog output signal level for channel 1
AO Opt Level Sel
Analog output signal level for channel 2
AO Opt Level Sel
Selects the analog output signal level for channel 1 (effective for the AO-12 option card only).
0: 0 to 10V
1: -10 to +10
Using an AO-08 option card the possible outputs signal is 0 to
+10V only. The setting of F4-07 and F4-08 has no effect.
0 or 1
0 or 1
0
0
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
397H
398H
5
5-
29
5
Digital Output Card (DO-02 and DO-08): F5
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
F5-01
F5-02
F5-03
F5-04
F5-05
F5-06
F5-07
F5-08
Channel 1 output selection
DO Ch1 Select
Channel 2 output selection
DO Ch2 Select
Channel 3 output selection
DO Ch3 Select
Channel 4 output selection
DO Ch4 Select
Channel 5 output selection
DO Ch5 Select
Channel 6 output selection
DO Ch6 Select
Channel 7 output selection
DO Ch7 Select
Channel 8 output selection
DO Ch8 Select
Effective when a Digital Output
Card (DO-02 or DO-08) is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a Digital Output
Card (DO-02 or DO-08) is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
0 to 47
0 to 47
0 to 47
0 to 47
0 to 47
0 to 47
0 to 47
0 to 47
0
1
2
4
6
37
0F
0F
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
399H
39AH
39BH
39CH
39DH
39EH
39FH
3A0H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
F5-09
DO-08 output mode selection
DO-08 Selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the output mode.
0:8-channel individual outputs
1:Binary code output
2:Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
0 to 2 0 No A A A A 3A1H -
5-
30
Serial Communications Settings: F6
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
F6-01
Operation selection after communications error
Comm Bus Fault
Sel
Sets the stopping method for communications errors.
0:Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1-02
1:Coast to stop
2:Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09
3:Continue operation
0 to 3
F6-02
F6-03
F6-04
F6-05
F6-06
Input level of external error from Communications Option
Card
EF0 Detection
Stopping method for external error from Communications Option Card
EF0 Fault Action
0:Always detect
1:Detect during operation
0:Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1-02
1:Coast to stop
2:Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09
3:Continue operation
Trace Sampling
Time
Trace Sample Tim
Current monitor unit selection
Current Unit Sel
Torque reference/ torque limit selection from communications option card
Torque Ref/Lmt Sel
Sets the unit of current monitor
0:Ampere
1:100%/8192
0:Torque reference/torque limit by communications option disabled.
1:Torque reference/torque limit by communications option enabled.
-
0 or 1
0 to 3
0 to
60000
0 or 1
0 or 1
1
0
1
0
0
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
3A2H
3A3H
3A4H
3A5H
3A6H
3A7H
-
-
-
-
-
-
5
5-
31
5
Terminal Function Parameters: H
Multi-function Digital Inputs: H1
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
Terminal S3 function selection
Terminal S3 Sel
Terminal S4 function selection
Terminal S3 Sel
Terminal S5 function selection
Terminal S3 Sel
Terminal S6 function selection
Terminal S3 Sel
Terminal S7 function selection
Terminal S3 Sel
Description
Multi-function input 1
Multi-function input 2
Multi-function input 3
Multi-function input 4
Multi-function input 5
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 to 89 80 No A A A A 400H
0 to 89
0 to 89
0 to 89
0 to 89
84
81
83
F
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
401H
402H
403H
404H
Multi-function Digital Input Functions
82
83
84
85
86
87
Setting
Value
9
F
7
8
5
6
3
4
Multi-step speed reference 1
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 3
Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)
Accel/decel time 1 switch over
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
Not used (Set when a terminal is not used)
Function
14
15
16
17
18
Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)
Emergency stop. (NO: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when ON.)
Motor 2 selection (NO: Motor 2 (E3- and E4-) is selected when ON.)
Emergency stop (NC: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when OFF)
Timer function input (the times are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function output is set in H2-.)
Yes Yes
1A Accel/decel time switch over 2 Yes Yes
20 to 2F External fault; Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation Yes Yes
80
81
Nominal Speed Selection (d1-09)
Intermediate Speed Selection (d1-10)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Releveling Speed Selection (d1-13)
Leveling Speed Selection (d1-17)
Inspection Run Selection (d1-14)
Rescue Operation Selection
Motor Contactor Answer Back Signal
High Speed Limit Switch (UP)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5-
32
Setting
Value
Function
88
89
High Speed Limit Switch (Down)
PG direction change over (0: Clockwise, 1: Counterclockwise)
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes Yes Yes
Page
Yes
No No Yes No
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
H2-01
H2-02
H2-03
Terminal
M1-M2 function selection
Term
M1-M2 Sel
Terminal
M3-M4 function selection
Term
M3-M4 Sel
Terminal
M5-M6 function selection
Term
M5-M6 Sel
Description
Multi-function contact output 1
Multi-function contact output 2
Multi-function contact output 3
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 to 47
0 to 47
0 to 47
40
41
6
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
40BH
40CH
40DH
Multi-function Contact Output Functions
E
F
10
11
5
8
9
6
7
A
B
Setting
Value
0
1
2
3
4
Function
V/f
During run 1 (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output)
Zero-speed f ref
/f out
agree 1 (detection width L4-02 is used.) f ref
/f set
agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, with detection width L4-02 used and during frequency agree)
Frequency detection 1 (ON: +L4-01
≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, with detection width L4-
02 used)
Frequency detection 2 (ON: Output frequency
≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L4-01, with detection width L4-02 used)
Inverter operation ready; READY: After initialization or no faults
During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection
During baseblock (ON: during baseblock)
Frequency reference source selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Run command source selection status (ON: Run command from Operator) Yes
Car stuck/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact, ON: Overtorque/undertorque detection) Yes
Fault (ON: Digital Operator/Monitor communications error or fault other than CPF00 and
CPF01 has occurred.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Not used. (Set when the terminal is not used.)
Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)
Fault reset command active
Yes
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
Open loop
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Page
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
5
5-
33
5
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
1D
1E
1F
20
30
33
19
1A
1B
1C
15
16
17
18
37
Setting
Value
12
13
14
38
40
Timer function output f ref
/f set
agree 2 (detection width L4-04 is used) f ref
/f set
agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, with detection width L4-04 is used, and during frequency agree)
Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency
≤ -L4-03, detection width L4-04 is used)
Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency
≥ -L4-03, detection width L4-04 is used)
Car stuck/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact, OFF: Torque detection)
Car stuck/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact, ON: Torque detection)
Car stuck/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact, OFF: Torque detection)
During reverse run (ON: During reverse run)
During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock)
Motor 2 selected (ON: Motor 2 (E3- and E4-) is selected)
During regenerative operation
Restart enabled (ON: Automatic fault restart enabled)
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting)
During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit)
Zero-servo end (ON: Zero-Servo completed)
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop)
Cooling fan running
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Brake Release Command
Output Contactor Close Command
Function
Speed detection at deceleration (Door zone)
Not Zero Speed
Light load direction output (ON: Forward, OFF: Reverse)
Light load detection status (ON: Ready for light load test, OFF: Light load test in progress)
Hardware base block monitor 1 (ON: terminal BB and BB1 closed)
Hardware base block monitor 2 (ON: terminal BB or BB1 off)
V/f
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
Open loop
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Page
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5-
34
Analog Inputs: H3
Constant
Number
H3-01
*1
H3-02
H3-03
H3-04
H3-05
H3-06
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
AI-14B Channel 1 signal level selection
AI-14 CH1 LvlSel
Selects the input signal level of
Channel 1 if an AI-14B option card is installed.
0: 0 to +10V
1: -10 to +10V
AI-14B Channel 1 gain
AI-14 CH1 Gain
AI-14B Channel 1 bias
AI-14 CH1 Bias
Sets the frequency reference value when 10 V is input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency set in E1-04.
Sets the frequency reference value when 0 V is input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency set in E1-04.
AI-14B Channel 3 signal level selection
AI-14 CH3 LvlSel
Selects the input signal level of
Channel 3 if an AI-14B option card is installed.
0: 0 to 10V
1: -10 to +10V
AI-14B Channel 3 function selection
AI-14 CH3FuncSel
AI-14B Channel3 gain
AI-14 CH3 Gain
Selects the function for the channel 3 input if an AI-14B option card is installed. See the table below for the available functions.
Sets the input level according to the 100% value of the function set in parameter H3-05 when the voltage at channel 3 of the
AI-14B option card is 10 V.
0 or 1
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
0 or 1
2,3,14
0.0 to
1000.0
0
100.0%
0.0%
0
2
100.0%
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
410H
411H
412H
413H
414H
415H
H3-07
AI-14B Channel 3
Bias
AI-14 CH3 Bias
Sets the input level according to the 0% value of the function set in parameter H3-05 when the voltage at channel 3 of the
AI-14B option card is 0 V.
-100.0 to
+100.0
0.0% Yes A A A A 416H
H3-08
AI-14B Channel 2 signal level selection
AI-14 CH2 LvlSel
Selects the input signal level of
Channel 2 if an AI-14B option card is installed.
0: 0 to 10V
1: -10 to +10V
2: 4 to 20 mA.
If current input is selected, channel 2 must be set to current input by hardware as well. Refer to the
AI-14B manual.
H3-09
AI-14B Channel 2 function selection
AI-14 CH2FuncSel
AI-14B Channel 2
Gain
H3-10
AI-14 CH2 Gain
H3-11
AI-14B Channel 2
Bias
AI-14 CH2 Bias
0 to 2 0 No
Selects the function for the channel 2 input if an AI-14B option card is installed. See the table below for the available functions.
Sets the input level according to the 100% value of the function set in parameter H3-09 when the voltage/current at channel 2 of the AI-14B option card is 10V/
20mA.
Sets the input level according to the 0% value of the function set in parameter H3-09 when the voltage/current at channel 2 of the AI-14B option card is 0V/
0mA.
2, 3, 14
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
3
100.0% Yes
0.0%
No
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
417H
418H
419H
41AH
5
5-
35
5
Constant
Number
H3-12
H3-15
H3-16
H3-17
Terminal A1 function selection
Terminal A1 Func gain
Name
Display
Analog input filter time constant
CH1-3 FilterTime
Terminal A1 input
Terminal A1 Gain
Terminal A1 input bias
Terminal A1 Bias
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
Sets delay filter time constant for the three analog input channels of the AI-14B option card.
Effective for noise control etc.
Sets the multi-function analog input function for terminal A1.
0: Frequency Reference
1: Torque compensation
Sets the frequency reference value when 10 V is input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency set in E1-04.
Sets the frequency reference value when 0 V is input as a percentage of the maximum frequency set in E1-04.
0.00 to
2.00
0 or 1
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.03
s
0
100.0%
0.0%
No
No
Yes
Yes
A
No
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
41BH
434H
435H
436H
*1. This parameter is available only if an analog input option board AI-14B is installed.
H3-05,H3-09 Settings
Setting
Value
2
3
14
Function
Auxiliary frequency reference (is used as multi speed reference 2)
Auxiliary frequency reference (is used as multi speed reference 3)
Torque compensation
Contents (100%)
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Page
Maximum output frequency (AI-14B use only) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Maximum output frequency (AI-14B use only)
Motor’s rated torque
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5-
36
Protection Function Parameters: L
Motor Overload: L1
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
L1-01
Motor protection selection
MOL Fault
Select
Sets whether the motor thermal overload protection function is enabled or disabled.
0:Disabled
1:General-purpose motor protection
(fan cooled motor)
2:Inverter motor protection (externally cooled motor)
3:Vector motor protection
When the Inverter power supply is turned off, the thermal value is reset, so even if this parameter is set to 1, protection may not be effective.
5:Permanent magnet constant torque motor protection
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 3
0 or 5 i No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Q
1
-
Q
1
-
Q
1
-
-
A
5
480H
L1-02
Motor protection time constant
MOL Time
Const
Sets the electric thermal detection time in seconds units.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
The factory setting is 150% overload for one minute.
When the motor's overload capability is known, also set the overload resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started.
0.1 to
5.0
1.0 min No A A A -A 481H
Power Loss Settings: L2
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
L2-05
Undervoltage detection level
PUV Det Level
L2-11
Rescue Operation DC bus
Voltage
Volt@batterydr
Description
Sets the DC bus undervoltage
(UV) detection level (DC bus voltage).
Sets the DC bus voltage during rescue operation.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
150 to
210
*1
190 VDC
No A A A A 489H -
0 to
400
0 VDC No
*1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. The value for a 400 V class Inverter is the double.
A A A A 4CBH
5
5-
37
5
Stall Prevention: L3
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
L3-01
Stall prevention selection during accel
StallP Accel
Sel
0:Disabled (Acceleration as set.
With a too heavy load, the motor may stall.)
1:Enabled (Acceleration stopped when L3-02 level is exceeded.
Acceleration starts again when the current has fallen below the stall prevention level).
2:Intelligent acceleration mode
(Using the L3-02 level as a basis, acceleration is automatically adjusted. The set acceleration time is disregarded.)
0 to 2 1 No A A 48FH
L3-02
Stall prevention level during accel
StallP Accel
Lvl
Sets the stall prevention during acceleration operation current level as a percentage of Inverter rated current.
Effective when L3-01 is set to 1 or 2.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary. Reduce the setting when the motor stalls.
0 to 200 150%
L3-05
Stall prevention selection during running
StallP Run Sel
Selects the stall prevention during running.
0:Disabled (Runs as set. With a heavy load, the motor may stall.)
1:Deceleration using deceleration time 1 (C1-02.)
2:Deceleration using deceleration time 2 (C1-04.)
L3-06
Stall prevention level during running
StallP Run
Level
Set the stall prevention during running operation current level as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Reduce the setting when the motor stalls.
0 to 2
30 to
200
1
150%
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
490H
493H
494H
Reference Detection: L4
Param eter
Number
Name
Display
L4-01
Speed agreement detection level
Spd Agree Level
L4-02
Speed agreement detection width
Spd Agree Width
Description
Effective when "f out
/f set
agree
1", "Frequency detection 1" or
"Frequency detection 2" is set for a multi-function output.
Effective when "f ref
/f out
agree
1", "f out
/f set
agree 1" or "Frequency detection 1" or "Frequency detection 2" is set for a multi-function output.
Setting
Range
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
100.0
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation i No
V/f
A
0.0Hz
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
0.0Hz
A
0.0Hz
-
-
A
0.0%
MEMO-
BUS
Register
499H
Page
0.0 to
20.0
0.0 to
40.0% i No
A
2.0Hz
A
2.0Hz
A
2.0Hz
-
-
A
4.0%
49AH
5-
38
Param eter
Number
Name
Display
Description
L4-03
Speed agreement detection level (+/-)
Spd Agree Lvl+-
Effective when "f out
/f set
agree
2", "Frequency detection 3" or
"Frequency detection 4" is set for a multi-function output.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
-120.0 to
+120.0
-100.0 to
+100.0
i No
V/f
A
0.0Hz
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
0.0Hz
A
0.0Hz
-
Page
49BH
-
A
0.0%
L4-04
Speed agreement detection width (+/-
)
Spd Agree Wdth+-
Effective when "f ref
/f out
agree
2" "f out
/f set
agree 2", "Frequency detection 3" or "Frequency detection 4" is set for a multi-function output.
0.0 to
20.0
0.0 to
40.0% i No
A
2.0Hz
A
2.0Hz
A
2.0Hz
-
-
A
4.0%
49CH
Fault Restart: L5
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
L5-01
Number of auto restart attempts
Num of Restarts
Sets the number of auto reset attempts.
The auto resetable faults are:
OV, UV1, GF, OC, OL2, OL3,
OL4, UL3, UL4, PF, LF, SE1,
SE2, SE3
0 to 10 2 No A A A A 49EH
L5-02
Auto restart operation selection
Restart Sel
Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during fault restart.
0:No output (Fault contact is not activated.)
1:Output (Fault contact is activated.)
0 or 1
L5-05
Under voltage fault restart selection
UV1 Restart Sel.
Selects the reset method for a
UV1 fault.
0:UV1 fault is reset like set in parameter L5-01
1:UV1 fault is always automatically reset
0 or 1
1
0
No A A A A 49FH
No A A A A 4CCH
5
5-
39
5
Torque Detection: L6
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
L6-01
L6-02
L6-03
L6-04
Torque detection selection 1
Torq Det 1 Sel
Torque detection level 1
Torq Det 1 Lvl
0:Torque detection disabled.
1:Car stuck detection only with speed agreement; operation continues (warning is output).
2:Car stuck detected continuously during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
3:Car stuck detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection.
4:Car stuck detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection.
5:Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues (warning is output).
6:Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
7:Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection.
8:Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection.
Vector control: Motor rated torque is set as 100%.
V/f control: Inverter rated current is set as 100%.
0 to 8 4
0 to 300 150%
Torque detection time 1
Torq Det 1 Time
Torque detection selection 2
Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection time.
0.0 to
10.0
0 to 8
10.0 s
0
Torq Det 2 Sel
L6-05
Torque detection level 2
See L6-01 to L6-03 for a description.
Torq Det 2 Lvl
L6-06
Torque detection time 2
Torq Det 2 Time
0 to
300
0.0 to
10.0
150%
10.0 s
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4A1H
4A2H
4A3H
4A4H
4A5H
4A6H
5-
40
Torque Limits: L7
Param eter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04
L7-06
L7-07
Forward drive torque limit
Torq Limit Fwd
Reverse drive torque limit
Torq Limit Rev
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
Four individual regions can be set.
Forward regenerative torque limit
Torq Lmt Fwd
Rgn
Reverse
Output torque
Positive torque
Regenerative state
Regenerative state
Motor speed
Forward
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Torq Lmt Rev
Rgn
Torque limit integral time constant
Torque Limit
Time
Sets the torque limit integration time constant
Negative torque
Torque limit integral operation selection during accel/ decel
Torque Limit Sel
Sets the torque limit operation during acceleration and deceleration.
0:P-control (I control is added at constant speed operation)
1:I-control
Normally changing this setting is not necessary.
If the torque limitation accuracy during accel/decel. has preference, I control should be selected. This may result in an increased accel./decel. time and speed deviations from the reference value.
0 to
300
0 to
300
0 to
300
0 to
300
5 to
10000
200 ms
0 or 1
300%
300%
300%
300%
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
A
A
A
A
-
-
4A7H
4A8H
4A9H
4AAH
4ACH
4C9H
5
5-
41
5
Hardware Protection: L8
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
L8-02
Overheat prealarm level
OH Pre-Alarm Lvl
Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection pre-alarm in
°C.
The pre-alarm detects when the cooling fin temperature reaches the set value.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
50 to
130
90
°C
*1
No
L8-03
Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm
OH Pre-Alarm Sel
Sets the operation when an
Inverter overheat pre-alarm occurs.
0: Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time
C1-09.
3: Continue operation (Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting
0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3.
0 to 3 3 No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AEH
4AFH
L8-07
Output open-phase detection selection
Ph Loss Out Sel
0: Disabled
1: Enabled, 1 Phase Observation
2: Enabled, 2 and 3 Phase
Observation
An output open-phase is detected at less than 5% of
Inverter rated current.
When the applied motor capacity is small compared to the
Inverter capacity, the detection may not work properly and should be disabled.
0 to 2 2
Ground fault
L8-09 0 or 1 1
L8-10
L8-11
L8-12
L8-18
L8-20
Ground Fault Sel
Cooling fan control selection
Fan On/Off Sel
Set the ON/OFF control for the cooling fan.
0: ON when Inverter is running only
1: ON whenever power is ON
0 or 1 0
Cooling fan control delay time
Fan Delay Time
Set the time in seconds to delay turning OFF the cooling fan after the inverter STOP command is given. (Valid only if
L8-10 = 0)
0 to 300 60 s
Ambient temperature
Sets the ambient temperature.
45 to 60 45
°C
Ambient Temp
Soft CLA selection 0:Disable
Soft CLA Sel
1: Enable
0 or 1 1
Output phase loss detection time
0.0 to
2.0
0.2sec
Pha loss det T
Sets the detection time of output phase loss detection (LF.)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
*1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 3.7 kW is given.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A-
A
A
A
A
-
A
4B3H
4B5H
4B6H
4B7H
4B8H
4BFH
--
4C0H
5-
42
Special Adjustments: n2 / n5
Automatic Frequency Regulator: n2
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page n2-01
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) gain
AFR Gain
Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain.
Normally, there is no need to change this setting.
If necessary, adjust this parameter as follows:
• If hunting occurs, increase the set value.
• If response is low, decrease the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a time, while checking the response.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00
No A 584H
n2-02 n2-03
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time constant
AFR Time
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time constant 2
AFR Time 2
Set the time constant 1 to decide the rate of change in the speed feedback detection control.
0 to
2000
0 to
2000
50 ms
750 ms
No
No
-
-
A
A -
-
-
585H
586H
Feed Forward: n5
Constant
Number n5-01 n5-02 n5-03
Name
Display
Description
Feed forward control selection
Feedfoward Sel
Motor acceleration time
Motor Accel Time
Feed forward proportional gain
Feedfoward Gain
Enables or disables the feed forward control.
0:Disabled
1:Enabled
Set the time required to accelerate the motor at the rated torque
(T
100
) to the rated speed (Nr).
J: GO
2
/4, P: Motor rated output t
a
=
2 ⋅
2
r
[
rpm
]
⋅
100
[
Nm
]
However,
100
=
2
π
⋅
P kW
]
r
[
rpm
]
⋅
3
[
Nm
Sets the proportional gain for feed forward control.
Speed reference response will increase as the setting of n5-03 is increased.
0.001 to
60.000
0.00 to
500.00
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
0 or 1 i No -
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
1
-
-
-
A
0
MEMO
BUS
Register
5B0H
Page
0.154 s
*1
1.00
No
No
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
5B1H
5B2H
5
5-
43
Constant
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page n5-05
Motor acceleration time tuning
N5-02 Tuning
Enables or diables the tuning for the motor acceleration time
N5-02.
0:Disabled
1:Enabled
0 or 1 0 No A A 5B4H
*1. The factory setting depends on the inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 3.7 kW is given.Automatic Frequency Regulator: n2
5
PM Motor Adjustments: n8 / n9
PM Motor Adjustment 1: n8
Constant
Number
Name
Display
Description n8-29
Automatic Current
Regulator q axis P gain
ACR q gain
Sets the proportional gain for the q-axis current regulator
(ACR)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
0 to
2000
1000 rad/s
No A 55CH
n8-30
Automatic Current
Regulator q axis integral time
ACR q Itime
Sets the integral time for the q-axis current regulator
(ACR)
0 to
100.0
10.0 ms No n8-32
Automatic Current
Regulator d axis P gain
ACR d gain
Sets the proportional gain for d-axis current regulator
(ACR)
0 to
2000
1000 rad/s
No n8-33
Automatic Current
Regulator q axis integral time
ACR d Itime
Sets the integral time for the d-axis current regulator
(ACR)
0 to
100.0
10.0 ms No
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
55DH
55FH
560H
n8-35
Magnet position detection method
Mag det sel n8-46
Inductance measurement current level
Induct Meas Lev
Sets the magnet position detection method.
0:Estimate method
4:Hiperface detection
5:EnDat detection
0, 4 or
5
5
Sets the current which is used for the inductance measurement during rotating auto tuning. The value is set in % of the motor rated current.
0.0 to
99.9
10.0 %
No
No
-
-
-
-
-
-
Q 5B0H
A .56DH
-
PM Motor Adjustment 2: n9
n9-60
A/D conversion start delay timer
AD DelayT@Start
Sets the A/D conversion delay time.
0.0 to
40
0.0 µs No A 64DH
5-
44
Digital Operator/LED Monitor Parameters: o
Monitor Selections: o1
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page o1-01 o1-02
Monitor selection
User Monitor Sel
Set the number of the 4rd. monitor item to be displayed in the
Drive Mode. (U1-)
(On LED operator JVOP-161 only.)
Monitor selection after power up
Power-On Monitor
Sets the monitor item to be displayed when the power is turned on.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-
01
4 to 56
4 to 75
1 to 4
6
1
Yes
Yes
A
-
A
A
-
A
A
-
A
-
A
A
500H
501H
o1-03
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0: 0:0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum output frequency is 100%)
2: min
-1
(2 poles)
3: 0.000 m/s
4 to 39: rpm units (Set the motor poles.)
40 to 39999:User desired display Set the desired values for setting and display for the max. output frequency.
0 to
39999
Display
Scaling
Sets the value that is to be displayed at
100% excluding the decimal point.
Sets the number of decimal places.
Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0, set
12000.
o1-04
Setting unit for
V/f characteristics parameters
Display Units
Set the setting unit for V/f pattern related parameters.
0: Hz
1: rpm o1-05
LCD Display contrast adjustment
LCD Contrast
0 or 1
Sets the contrast on the optional
LCD operator
(JVOP-160-OY).
0: light
2:
3: normal
4:
5: dark
0 to 5 i i
3
No
No
Yes
A
0
-
-
A
A
0
-
-
A
A
0
-
A
0
A
-
A
1
-
A
1
A
502H
503H
504H
5
5-
45
5
Digital Operator: o2
Parameter
Number o2-01
LOCAL/
REMOTE key enable/disable
Local/Remote
Key
Name
Display
Description
Enables/Disables the Digital
Operator Local/Remote key
0:Disabled
1:Enabled (Switches between the Digital Operator and the parameter settings b1-01, b1-02.)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 or 1 o2-02
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
Oper Stop Key
Enables/Disables the Stop key in the run mode.
0:Disabled (When the run command is issued from an external terminal, the Stop key is disabled.)
1:Enabled (Effective even during run.)
0 or 1
0
0
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
505H
506H
o2-03 o2-04 o2-05
User parameter initial value
User Defaults kVA selection
Inverter Model #
Frequency reference setting method selection
Operator M.O.P.
Clears or stores user initial values.
0:Stores/not set
1:Begins storing (Records the set parameters as user initial values.)
2:All clear (Clears all recorded user initial values)
When the set parameters are recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be set in A1-03.
Sets whether the ENTER key is needed for a frequency reference change or not when the
Digital Operator is selected as frequency reference source.
0:Enter key needed
1:Enter key not needed
If “1” is selected, a frequency reference change is accepted without the need of pressing the
Enter key.
0 to 2
Do not set unless after replacing
for the setting values).
0 to FF
0 or 1
0
0
0
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
507H
508H
509H
o2-06
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
Oper
Detection
Sets the operation when the Digital Operator/LED Monitor is disconnected.
0:Operation continues even if the Digital Operator/LED
Monitor is disconnected.
1:OPR is detected at Digital
Operator/LED Monitor disconnection. Inverter output is switched off, and the fault contact is operated.
o2-07 o2-08
Cumulative operation time setting Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units.
Elapsed Time Set
Cumulative operation time selection
Elapsed Time
Run
0:Accumulated inverter power on time.
1:Accumulated inverter run time.
0 or 1
0 to
65535
0 or 1
0
0 hr.
1
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
50AH
50BH
50CH
5-
46
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description o2-10 o2-12 o2-15
Fan operation time setting
Fan ON Time Set
Fault trace initialize
Fault Trace Init
Number of Travels counter initialize
Initialize Sel
Sets the initial value of the fan operation time.
The operation time is accumulated starting from this set value.
0:No initialisation
1: Initialize (= zero clear) after setting ”1“ o2-12 will be returned to ”0“
Operation counter initialization.
0:Number of travels counter is kept
1: Number of travels counter
monitor clear
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 to
65535
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 hr.
0
0
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
50EH
510H
513H
Copy Function: o3
Parameter
Number
Name
Display o3-01 o3-02
Copy function selection
Copy Function Sel
Read permission selection
Read
Allowable
Description
0:Normal operation
1:READ (Inverter to Operator)
2:COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3:Verify (compare)
0:READ prohibited
1:READ permitted
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 to 3
0 or 1
0
0
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
515H
516H
Lift Function Parameters: S
Brake Sequence
:
S1
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
S1-01
S1-02
S1-03
S1-04
Zero speed level at stop
DC Inj I @start
DC injection braking current at start
DC Inj I @start
DC injection braking current at stop
DC Inj I @stop
DC injection braking/ Zero speed time at start
DC Inj T@start
Sets the speed level at which the
DC injection / zero speed operation starts during stop.
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at start in units of
1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor and restart it. When the set value is 0,
DC injection braking at start is not performed.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 to
10.0
0 to
100
0 to
100
0.00
to
10.00
i
50%
50%
0.40 s
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
1.2
Hz
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
0.5
Hz
A
0.1 Hz
A
0.5 Hz
680H
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
A
-
-
A
681H
682H
683H
5
5-
47
5
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
S1-05
S1-06
DC injection braking/ Zero speed time at stop
DC Inj T@stop
Brake release delay time
Brake open delay
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at stop in units of
1 second.
Used to prevent coasting after the stop command is input. When the set value is 0.00, DC injection braking at stop is not performed.
Sets the time delay from the brake open command to the start of acceleration.
This timer can be used to avoid running against the closed brake at start.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.00
to
10.00
0.00
to
10.00
0.60 s
0.20
No
No
S1-07
S1-14
S1-15
S1-16
Brake close delay time
Brake CloseDelay
Sets the time delay from the internal brake close command until the brake control output is switched.
This timer can be used to avoid closing the brake when the motor is still turning.
SE2 detection delay time
SE2 det T
SE3 detection delay time
SE3 det T
RUN delay time
Run Delay T
0.00
to
S1-05
Used to set the delay time for the detection of a SE2 fault.
At the time S1-06 + S1-14 after the
Fwd/Rev command was given the output current is measured. If it is below 25% of the no-load current
(E2-03) setting a SE2 fault will be output.
Used to set the delay time for the detection of a SE3 fault.
At the time S1-15 after the fwd/rev command was given, the inverter starts to observe the output current continuously. If it falls below 25% of the no-load current (E2-03) setting a SE3 will be output.
0 to
S1-04 -
S1-06
0 to
5000
Sets the delay time from the Run signal input to the internal run enable.
0.00
to
1.00
0.10
200ms
200ms
0.10sec
S1-17
S1-18
S1-19
DC injection current gain at regenerative operation
DC Inj gain@gen
DC injection current gain at motoring operation
DC Inj gain@mot
Output contactor open delay time
Cont open delay
Used to set the DC injection gain when inverter is in the regenerative mode.
Used to set the DC injection gain when inverter is in the motoring mode.
Sets the contactor control output delay time after stop.
0 to
400
0 to
400
0.00
to
1.00
100%
20%
0.10sec
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
A
A
A
A
-
-
A
-
-
A
684H
685H
686H
68DH
68EH
68FH
690H
691H
692H
5-
48
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
S1-20
S1-21
S1-22
S1-23
S1-24
S1-25
S1-26
S1-27
S1-28
Zero-servo gain
Zero Servo
Gain
Adjust the strength of the zeroservo lock.
When Closed Loop Vector control is selected, a position control loop is created at start and stop. Increasing the zero-servo gain increases the strength of the lock. Increasing it too much can cause oscillation.
0 to 100
Zero-servo completion width
Zero Servo
Count
Starting torque compensation increase time
Torque incr T
Sets the bandwidth of the Zero
Servo completion output.
Enabled when the “zero-servo completion (end)” is set for a multi-function output. The zeroservo completion signal is ON when the current position is within the range (the zero-servo position + zero-servo completion width.)
Set S1-21 to 4 times of the allowable displacement pulse amount at the PG.
Sets the increase time for the analog input torque compensation signal. Sets the time the torque reference needs to reach 300% torque reference.
Torque compensation gain during lowering
TorqCompgain@low
Torque compensation bias during raising
TorqComp-
Bias@ri
Torque compensation bias during lowering
TorqComp-
Bias@red
Sets the torque compensation gain at lowering when the torque compensation at start function is used.
Sets the torque compensation bias at raising when the torque compensation at start function is used.
Sets the torque compensation bias at lowering when the torque compensation at start function is used.
Dwell speed reference
DWELL speed
Hold speed reference when the load is heavy.The frequency reference follows the C1-07 acceleration 4 setting time.
Acceleration time will be changed when the motor speed exceeds the
C1-11 setting frequency.
0 to
16383
0 to
5000
0.500
to
10.000
-200.0
to
+200.0
-200.0
to
+200.0
0.0
to
120.0
Door zone speed level
Door Zone
Level
SE1 detection
Selection
SE1 Selection
Sets the door zone speed level.
If the motor speed (in CLV and
OLV) or the output frequency (in
V/f control) falls below S1-27 and a multifunction output is set for the
“Door zone” signal
(H2-=42), this output will be closed.
Sets how a SE1 fault is reset.
0: Manual Reset
1: Automatic reset at stop
2: No SE1 detection
0.0
to
120.0
0 to 2
5
10
500ms
1.000
0.0%
0.0%
0.0Hz
0.0Hz
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
693H
694H
695H
696H
697H
698H
699H
69AH
69BH
5
5-
49
5
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
S1-29
S1-30
Torque compensation fadeout level
Torq Fadeout-
Freq
Torque compensation fadeout time
Torq Fadeout-
Time
Sets the frequency level at which the torque compensation value is started to fade out to zero.
Sets the time constant which is used to fade out the torque compensation value.
The set value is the time used to decrease the compensation value from 300% to 0%.
S1-31
Torque limit time at stop
TrqLimit T
@Stop
Sets the time which is used to reduce the torque limit to 0 after zero speed .
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0.0 to
120.0
0~5000
0.0Hz
1000 msec
0~1000 0 msec
No
No
No
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
-
A
A
A
69CH
69DH
69EH
Slip Compensation: S2
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
S2-01
S2-02
S2-03
S2-05
S2-06
S2-07
Motor rated speed
Rated rpm
Slip compensation gain in motoring mode
SlipComp gainMot
Slip compensation gain in regenerative mode
SlipComp gain-
Gen
Slip compensation torque detection delay
TorqueDet
Delay T
Slip compensation torque detection time
Torque detect T
Slip compensation delay time
SlipCompDelay T
Sets the motor rated speed.
Sets the slip compensation gain in motoring mode.
It can be used to improve the leveling accuracy.
Sets the slip compensation gain in regenerative mode.
It can be used to improve the leveling accuracy.
Sets the delay time for the slip compensation torque detection.
The torque detection is started at
S2-05 sec. after speed agree
Sets the time for which the torque is measured for the slip compensation calculation.
Sets the Slip compensation delay time.
300 to
1800
0.0
to
5.0
0.0
to
5.0
0.0
to
10.0
0.00 to
2.00
0 to
10000
1380 rpm
0.7
1.0
1.0 sec
0.50 sec
200ms
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6AEH
6AFH
6B0H
6B2H
6B3H
6B4H
Page
5-
50
Special Sequence Functions: S3
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
S3-01
S3-03
S3-04
S3-05
S3-06
S3-07
S3-08
S3-09
S3-10
S3-11
S3-12
S3-13
Short-floor function selection
Short floor sel
Enables or disables the short floor operation function
0:disabled
1:enabled (Standard)
2:enabled (Advanced)
Inspection deceleration time
Dec ramp inspec
Nominal/Leveling speed detection level
Vn/Vl level sel
Nominal speed for short floor calculation
Vn@ Short floor
Light load search for rescue operation
Sets the deceleration time for the inspection run.
Sets the speed level for Nominal/
Leveling speed detection when multispeed inputs are used.
(d1-18=0/3)
Sets the nominal speed value which is used for the short floor calculation.
LightLoad
Search
Enables or disables the Light load search function for rescue operation.
0:disabled
1:enabled
2:enabled (for motor 1 only)
Light load search time
LightLd Srch-
Time
Output phase order
Exchg Phase Sel
Frequency reference loss detection
Sets the light load search time for the rescue operation.
Sets the output phase order.
0:Output phase order is U-V-W
1:Output phase order is U-W-V
FRL selection
Enables or disables the frequency reference loss detection when d1-
18 = 1 and H1-K83.
0:Disabled
1:Enabled
Light load search frequency
LightLd Srch-
Freq
Traction sheave diameter
Sheave diameter
Sets the light load speed for the rescue operation.
Rescue operation torque limit Sets the torque limit for the rescue
Rescue OP
TLM operation.
Base Block restart selection
BB Restart
Sets the behaviour of the inverter if a Base Block command is set during run.
0:Disabled
The Run command must be cycled to restart.
1:Enable
The inverter restarts when the
Base Block signal is released and the Run signal is still active.
Sets the diameter of the traction sheave.
0 or 1
0.0 to
2.0
0.0 to
120.0
0.0 to
120.0
0 or 2
0.0 to
5.0
0 or 1
0 or 1
0.00 to
20.00
0
0.0sec
0.0Hz
0.0Hz
0
1.0 sec
0
1
3.00 Hz
0 to 300 100 %
0 or 1
100 to
2000
0
400 mm
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6BDH
6BFH
6C0H
6C1H
6C2H
6C3H
6C4H
6C5H
6C6H
6C7H
6C8H
6C9H
5
5-
51
5
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
S3-14
S3-15
S3-16
S3-17
S3-18
S3-19
S3-20
S3-21
S3-22
S3-23
Roping
Roping Ratio
Sets the roping ratio of the elevator
1:1:1
2:1:2
Gear Ratio
Gear Ratio
Over acceleration detection level
Over Acc Det
Lvl
Sets the mechanical gear ratio.
Sets the maximum car acceleration value.
If the acceleration rate is higher that this value the inverter trips with an over acceleration fault
(DV6)
Over acceleration deceleration time constant
Over Acc Det
Fil
Over acceleration detection method selection
Over Acc Det
Sel
Inspection speed upper limit
Inspection
UpLmt
Short floor minimum constant speed time
ShortF2
MinTime
Sets the time for which an over acceleration must be detected before the inverter stops with an over acceleration fault (DV6)
Selects wether the over acceleration detection is always active or during run only.
0:Detection during power on
1:Detection during run only
Sets the upper frequency limit for the inspection speed detection if multi speed operation is selected
(d1-18 = 0 or 3)
Sets the minimal constant speed time for the advanced short floor function. The parameter is effective only if paramter S3-01is set to
“2” (Advanced short floor operation enabled)
Distance calculation acceleration time gain
Tacc Gain
Distance calculation deceleration time gain
Tdec Gain
Distance calculation deceleration time gain
Sets the acceleration time gain for the optimal speed calculation of the advanced short floor function.
Sets the deceleration time gain for the optimal speed calculation of the advanced short floor function.
Sets the deceleration time gain for the optimal speed calculation of the advanced short floor function.
1 or 2
0.10 to
10.00
0.0 to
50.0
0.000 to
5.000
0 or 1
S3-04 to
120.0
Hz
0.0 to
2.0
50.0 to
200.0
50.0 to
200.0
50.0 to
200.0
2
1.000
1.5 m/s²
0.05 sec
0
25.0 Hz
0.0 sec
150.0%
150.0%
150.0%
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6CAH
6CBH
6CCH
6CDH
6CEH
6CFH
6D0H
6D1H
6D2H
6D3H
S3-24
Light Load
Direction
Search Method
LLS method sel
Selects the light load direction search method.
0:Motor Current comparison
1:Regenerative direction detection
0 or 1 0 No A A 6D4H
5-
52
Motor Autotuning: T
T1: Autotuning 1
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
T1-01
Autotuning mode selection
Tuning Mode Sel
Sets the autotuning mode.
0:Rotating autotuning
1:Non-rotating autotuning
2:Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
4:Encoder offset tuning
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 2
0 or 4 i
T1-02
T1-03
T1-04
T1-05
T1-06
T1-07
T1-08
T1-09
Motor output power
Mtr Rated Power
Motor rated voltage
Rated Voltage
Motor rated current
Rated
Current
Motor rated frequency
Rated Frequency
Number of motor poles
Number of Poles
Motor base speed
Rated Speed
Number of PG pulses
PG Pulses/Rev
No load current
No load current
Sets the output power of the motor in kilowatts.
Sets the rated voltage of the motor.
Sets the rated current of the motor.
Sets the rated frequency of the motor.
Sets the number of motor poles.
Sets the base speed of the motor in r/min.
Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution.
Sets the no load current of motor.
0.00 to
650.00
0 to
255.0
*2
1.75 to
35.00
*3
14.00 A
*1
0 to
120.0
2 to 48 poles
0 to
24000
0 to
60000
0.0 to
13.99
*1
3.70 kW
*1
190.0 V
*2
50.0 Hz
4 poles
1450 r/min
1024
E2-03
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Yes
(2)
Yes
(1)
Yes
(1)
-
701H
-
Yes
(4)
Yes Yes
-
Yes Yes
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
702H
703H
704H
705H
706H
707H
708H
709H
Page
*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW is given.)
*2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
*3. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
5
5-
53
5
T2: Autotuning 2
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
T2-01
T2-02
T2-03
T2-04
T2-05
T2-08
T2-09
T2-10
Motor output power
Mtr Rated Power
Motor base frequency
Base Frequency
Motor rated voltage
Rated Voltage
Motor rated current
Rated
Current
Number of motor poles
Number of Poles
Motor voltage constant k e
Voltage constant
Sets the output power of the motor in kilowatts.
Sets the motor base frequency.
Sets the rated voltage of the motor.
Sets the rated current of the motor.
Sets the number of motor poles.
Sets the motor voltage constant if T2-99 was set to 0 before.
(Otherwise this parameter is not displayed)
Number of PG pulses
PG Pulses/Rev
Motor voltage constant calculation selection
VoltConst-
CalcSel
Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution.
Selects if the voltage constant is calculated during auto tuning or if it has to input manually.
0:Manual input in parameter
T2-08
1:Automatic calculation
0.00 to
75.00
20 to
3600
0 to
480.0
0.00 to
200.00
2 to 48 poles
50.0 to
2000.0
512,
1024
*2 or 2048
0 or 1
3.70 kW
*1
150 rpm
200.0 V
*2
14.60 A
*1
4 poles
239.3 mVsec/ rad
2048
1
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW is given.)
*2. Can be set only if HIPEFACE y
is selected as encoder type.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
730H
731H
732H
733H
734H
737H
738H
72FH
Page
5-
54
Monitor Parameters: U
Status Monitor Parameters: U1
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level at Multi-
Function Analog Output (AOoption card)
Min.
Unit
V/f
U1-01
U1-02
Frequency reference
Frequency Ref
Output frequency
Output Freq
Monitors/sets the frequency reference value.
*1
Monitors the output frequency.
*1
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
0.01
%
0.01
Hz
0.01
%
A
-
A
-
U1-03
Output current
Output Current
Monitors the output current.
10 V: Inverter rated output current
(0 to +10 V, absolute value output)
0.1 A A
U1-04
Control method
Control Method
Displays the current control method.
(Cannot be output.) A
U1-05
Motor speed
Motor Speed
Monitors the detected motor speed.
*1
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
0.01
%
No
U1-06
U1-07
Output voltage
Output Voltage
DC bus voltage
DC Bus Voltage
Monitors the output voltage reference value.
Monitors the main DC bus voltage.
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to +10 V output)
10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
(0 to +10 V output)
U1-08
Output power
Output kWatts
Monitors the output power
(internally detected value).
10 V: Inverter capacity
(max. applicable motor capacity)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
U1-09
Torque reference
Torque
Reference
Monitors the internal torque reference value for open vector control.
10 V: Motor rated torque
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
*1. The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor)
0.1 V
1 V
0.1 kW
A
A
A
0.1% No
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A A -
40H
A
A
-
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
41H
42H
43H
44H
45H
46H
47H
48H
Parameter
Number
U1-10
Name
Display
Input terminal status
Input Term Sts
Description
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Shows input ON/OFF status.
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON
1: REV command
(S2) is ON
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON
1: Multi input 2
(S4) is ON
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON
(Cannot be output.) A A A A 49H
5
5-
55
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
U1-11
Output terminal status
Output Term Sts
Shows output ON/OFF status.
1: Multi-function contact output 1
(M1-M2) is ON
1: Multi-function contact output 2
(M3-M4) is ON
1: Multi-function contact output 3
(M5-M6) is ON
Not used
(Always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/MB-MC) is
ON
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
(Cannot be output.)
Min.
Unit
-
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A A A A 4AH
5
U1-12
Operation status
Int Ctl Sts 1
Inverter operating status.
Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
1: Reset signal
input
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter ready
(Cannot be output.)
1: Minor fault
1: Major fault
A A A A 4BH
U1-13
U1-14
U1-15
U1-16
*1
U1-17
U1-18
U1-19
Cumulative operation time
Elapsed Time
Monitors the total operating time of the Inverter.
The initial value and the operating time/power ON time selection can be set in o2-07 and o2-
08.
(Cannot be output.)
Software No.
(flash memory)
FLASH ID
Terminal A1 input level
Term A1 Level
AI-14B channel
2 input level
AI-14 Ch2
InpLvl
AI-14B channel
3 input level
AI-14 Ch3
InpLvl
Motor secondary current (Iq)
Mot SEC Current
(Manufacturer’s ID number)
Monitors the input level of analog input A1. A value of 100% corresponds to 10V input.
Monitors the input level of analog input 2 on a AI-14B option board. A value of 100% is equal to 10V input.
Monitors the input level of analog input 3 on a AI-14B option board. A value of 100% is equal to 10V input.
Monitors the calculated value of the motor secondary current.
The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.
(Cannot be output.)
10 V: 100%
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: 100%
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: 100%
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V:Motor rated current)
(0 to ±10 V output)
Motor excitation current (Id)
Mot EXC current
Monitors the calculated value of the motor excitation current.
The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.
10 V:Motor rated current)
(0 to ±10 V output)
1 hr.
-
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
A
A
A
A
A
A
0.1% -
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A 4CH
A 4DH
A 4EH
A 4FH
A 50H
A 51H
A 52H
5-
56
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
U1-20
U1-21
U1-22
Frequency reference after softstarter
SFS Output
ASR input
ASR Input
ASR output
ASR output
Monitors the frequency reference after the soft starter.
This frequency value does not include compensations, such as slip compensation.
The unit is set in o1-03.
Monitors the input to the speed control loop.
The maximum frequency corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the output from the speed control loop.
The maximum frequency corresponds to 100%.
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V:Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
U1-25
DI-16H2 input status
DI-16 Reference
Monitors the reference value from a DI-16H2 Digital Reference Card.
The value will be displayed in binary or BCD depending on user constant F3-01.
(Cannot be output.)
U1-26
U1-27
U1-28
U1-32
U1-33
U1-34
U1-35
U1-40
U1-41
Output voltage reference (Vq)
Voltage Ref(Vq)
Output voltage reference (Vd)
Voltage Ref(Vd)
Monitors the Inverter internal voltage reference for motor secondary current control.
Monitors the Inverter internal voltage reference for motor excitation current control.
Software No.
(CPU)
CPU ID
ACR output of q axis
ACR(q)
Output
(Manufacturer’s CPU software
No.)
Monitors the current control output value for the motor secondary current.
ACR output of d axis
ACR(d) axis
Monitors the current control output value for the motor excitation current.
OPE fault parameter
OPE Detected
Zero servo movement pulses
Zero Servo
Pulse
Cooling fan operating time
FAN Elapsed
Time
Inverter Heatsink Temperature
Actual Fin Temp
Shows the first parameter number when an OPE fault is detected.
Shows the number of PG pulses of the movement range when zero servo was activated. The shown value is the actual pulse number times 4.
Monitors the total operating time of the cooling fan. The time can be set in
02-10.
Shows the inverter heatsink temperature measured by the
IGBT thermal protection sensor.
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
(Cannot be output.)
10 V: 100%
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: 100%
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output)
Min.
Unit
0.01H
z
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
-
0.1 V
0.1 V
-
0.1
%
0.1
%
-
-
1 hr.
°C
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
-
-
-
-
A
-
A
-
-
A
-
A
A
A
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
53H
54H
55H
58H
59H
5AH
5BH
5FH
60H
61H
62H
67H
68H
5
5-
57
5
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
Min.
Unit
U1-44
ASR output without filter
ASR Out w/o Fil
Monitors the output from the speed control loop (i.e., the primary filter input value). 100% is displayed for rated secondary current of the motor.
U1-45
Feed forward control output
FF Cout Output
U1-50
Slip compensation value
Slip comp value
10 V: Rated secondary current of motor
(-10 V to 10 V)
Monitors the output from feed forward control. 100% is displayed for rated secondary current of the motor.
Monitors the slip compensation value.100% is displayed for rated slip
10 V: Rated secondary current of motor
(-10 V to 10 V)
10 V: Rated slip of motor
(-10 V to 10 V)
U1-51
U1-52
U1-53
U1-54
U1-55
U1-56
U1-57
U1-74
U1-75
Max Current during acceleration
MaxCurrent@Acc
Max Current during deceleration
MaxCurrent@Dec
Max Current during Top speed
MaxCurretn@Run
Max Current during leveling speed
Max Amp at Vl sped
Number of travels
Monitors the maximum current during acceleration.
Monitors the maximum current during deceleration.
Monitors the maximum current at top speed.
Monitors the maximum current at Vl speed.
10 V: Rated current of motor
(0 V to 10 V)
10 V: Rated current of motor
(0 V to 10 V)
10 V: Rated current of motor
(0 V to 10 V)
10 V: Rated current of motor
(0 V to 10 V)
No of travels
Monitors the lift operation counter.
Using parameter O2-15 the counter can be cleared.
(Cannot be output.)
AI-14B channel
1 input level
AI-14 Ch1
InpLvl
Car acceleration rate
Cage accel q-axis motor current reference
Iq Reference d-axis motor current reference
Id Reference
Monitors the input level of analog input 1 on a AI-14B option board. A value of 100% is equal to 10V input.
Shows the elevator car acceleration rate value.
Monitors the q-axis current reference.
Monitors the d-axis current reference.
10 V: 100%
(-10 to 10 V)
10V: 9.8 m/s²
(-10V to 10 V)
10 V: Motor rated current
(-10 to 10 V)
10 V: Motor rated current
(-10 to 10 V)
*1. The parameter is displayed only if a AI-14B option board is installed.
0.01%
0.01%
0.01
m/s²
-
-
0.01% A
0.1 A
0.1 A
0.1 A
0.1 A
-
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6BH
6CH
71H
72H
73H
74H
75H
76H
77H
57H
7C6H
7C7H
5-
58
Fault Trace: U2
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog
Output
Min.
Unit
U2-01
U2-02
U2-03
U2-04
U2-05
U2-06
U2-07
U2-08
U2-09
U2-10
U2-11
U2-12
U2-13
U2-14
Current fault
Current Fault
Last fault
Last Fault
Reference frequency at fault
Frequency Ref
Output frequency at fault
Output Freq
Output current at fault
Output
Current
The output current when the last fault occurred.
Motor speed at fault The motor speed when the last
Motor Speed fault occurred.
Output voltage reference at fault
Output
Voltage
The output reference voltage when the last fault occurred.
DC bus voltage at fault
DC Bus Voltage
Output power at fault
Output kWatts
The main current DC voltage when the last fault occurred.
The output power when the last fault occurred.
Torque reference at fault
Torque
Reference
Input terminal status at fault
Input Term Sts
The content of the current fault.
The error content of the last fault.
The reference frequency when the last fault occurred.
The output frequency when the last fault occurred.
The reference torque when the last fault occurred. The motor rated torque corresponds to
100%.
The input terminal status when the last fault occurred.
The format is the same as for U1-
10.
Output terminal status at fault
Output Term Sts
Operation status at fault
Inverter Status
Cumulative operation time at fault
Elapsed Time
The output terminal status when the last fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-11.
The operating status when the last fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-12.
The operating time when the last fault occurred.
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output.)
-
-
0.01
Hz
0.01
Hz
0.1 A
0.01
Hz
0.1 V
1 V
0.1 kW
0.1%
-
-
-
1 hr.
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A A A 80H
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
81H
82H
83H
84H
85H
86H
87H
88H
89H
8AH
8BH
8CH
8DH
5
IMPORTANT
The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
5-
59
5
Fault History: U3
Parameter
Number
Name
Last fault
Display
U3-01
Last Fault
Description
The error content of 1st last fault.
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
U3-02
Second last fault
Fault Message 2
U3-03
Third last fault
Fault Message 3
The error content of 2nd last fault.
The error content of 3rd last fault.
Fourth last fault
U3-04
U3-05
Fault Message 4
Cumulative operation time at fault
Elapsed Time 1
The error content of 4th last fault.
The total operating time when the 1st previous fault occurred.
U3-06
Accumulated time of second fault The total operating time when the 2nd previous fault occurred.
Elapsed Time 2
(Cannot be output.)
U3-07
Accumulated time of third fault
Elapsed Time 3
U3-08
Accumulated time of fourth/oldest fault
Elapsed Time 4
Fifth last to tenth last fault
U3-09
–
U3-14
Fault Message 5 to 10
The total operating time when the 3rd previous fault occurred.
The total operating time when the 4th previous fault occurred.
The error content of the 5th to 10th last fault
Min. Unit
MEMO-
BUS
Register
-
-
-
-
1 hr.
1 hr.
1 hr.
1 hr.
–
90H
91H
92H
93H
94H
95H
96H
97H
Accumulated time of fifth to tenth fault
U3-15
–
U3-20
Elapsed Time 5 to 10
Total generating time when 5th...10th previous fault occurred
1hr
804
805H
806H
807H
808H
809H
806H
80FH
810H
811H
812H
813H
IMPORTANT
The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
5-
60
Settings which change with the Control Mode (A1-02)
Parameter
Number
C3-01
C4-02
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-07
C5-09
C5-10
E1-04
E1-06
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-13
E2-05
E3-06
E3-07
E3-08
F1-01
F1-05
F1-04
L1-01
Slip compensation gain
Torque compensation delay time
ASR P gain 1
ASR Integral time 1
ASR P gain 2
ASR gain switching frequency
ASR P gain 3
ASR Integral time 3
Max. Frequency
Base Frequency
Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)
*1
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
Base Frequency
Mid. output frequency (FB)
Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)
*1
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
*1
PG constant
Name
PG rotation direction
AO-12 Channel 1 Signal selection
Motor protection selection
L4-01/03 Speed agreement detection level
L4-02/04 Speed agreement detection width
L8-09 Output open phase detection selection n5-01 o1-03 o1-04
S1-01
Feed forward control selection
Frequency monitor/reference display
V/f pattern frequency parameter unit
Zero speed level
*1. The given values are for a 400 V class Inverter.
*2. Can be set only if Hiperface is selected as interface.
Setting Range
Hz
V
-
-
Hz rpm
V
V
Hz
V i
sec
Hz rpm
Hz rpm
msec
sec
-
V
0.0 to 2.5
0 to 10000
1.00 to 300.00
0.000 to 10.000
1.00 to 300.00
0.0to 120.0
1.00 to 300.00
0.000 to 10.000
0 to 120.00 Hz
20 to 7200 rpm
0 to 120.00 Hz
20 to 7200 rpm
0.0 to 510.0
0 to 120.00 Hz
20 to 7200 rpm
0.0 to 510.0
0.0 to 510.0
0 to 120.00 Hz
0.0 to 510.0
0.0 to 120.0
0.0 to 510.0
0 to 60000
512, 1024
*2
, 2048
0 or 1
1 to 56
1 to 75
0 to 3
0 or 5
0 to 120.00
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 20.0
0.0 to 40.o
0 to 2
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to 39999
0 or 1
0.00 to 10.00
Unit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Hz
%
Hz
%
-
Hz
V/f Control
A1-02=0
0.5
4.8
-
-
-
0
-
0.5
2
-
2.0
-
1
-
0.0
-
2
-
-
-
-
-
50.00
-
50.00
-
25.0
Factory Setting
Open Loop
Vector
A1-02=2
Closed
Loop Vector A1-
02=3
1.0
1.0
20
-
-
40.00
-
-
0.500
20.00
0.0 Hz
0.3
-
5.0
0.0
3.0
26.4
-
-
0.0
-
-
-
40.00
0.500
50.00
-
50.00
-
-
0.0
-
1024
-
0
0.1
1
0
2.0
-
2
-
0.0
-
1
-
2
-
0
-
1.2
18.0
-
-
-
0
-
1.2
2
-
2.0
-
1
-
0.0
-
2
-
-
-
-
-
50.00
-
50.00
-
37.4
1.0
200
-
-
-
-
0.5
-
19.4
0.0
2.5
30.0
-
-
-
2048
0
1
1
0.5
-
0
-
4.0
-
5
-
0.0
-
5
-
1
12.00
0.300
-
150
-
150
-
-
0
-
400
-
-
Closed
Loop Vector (PM)
A1-02=5
1.0
-
12.00
0.300
6.00
2.0 %
5
5-
61
5
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 3.7 to 45 kW*
Para meter
Number
E1-
03
Unit
-
E1-04
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Factory Setting
7 8 9 A B C D E F
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
Closed
Loop
Vector
Control
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Hz 50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0 180.0
50.0
50.0
rpm -
50.0
-
-
150
E1-05
*1
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 190.0 190.0
190.0
200.0
E1-06
E1-07
*1
Hz 50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
rpm
Hz rpm
-
2.5
-
-
3.0
-
-
3.0
-
-
3.0
-
-
25.0
-
-
25.0
-
-
30.0
-
-
30.0
-
-
2.5
-
-
2.5
-
-
3.0
-
-
3.0
-
-
3.0
-
-
3.0
-
-
3.0
-
-
3.0
-
-
3.0
-
E1-08
*1
V 14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
18.0
23.0
18.0
23.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
18.6
12.5
1.5
-
1.5
-
1.5
-
0.5
-
0.3
-
E1-09
Hz rpm
E1-10
*1
V
1.3
-
7.0
1.5
-
7.0
1.5
-
7.0
1.5
-
7.0
1.3
-
6.0
1.3
-
7.0
1.5
-
6.0
1.5
-
7.0
1.3
-
9.0
1.3
-
11.0
1.5
-
9.0
1.5
-
13.0
E1-13 V 0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
*1. The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
7.0
0.0
7.0
0.0
7.0
0.0
9.7
0.0
2.5
0.0
50.0
-
-
-
-
0.0
-
-
0.0
-
150
-
-
-
0
-
-
200.0
200 V and 400V Class Inverters of 55 kW*
Para meter
Number
E1-
03
Unit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Factory Setting
7 8 9 A B C D E F
Hz 50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0 180.0
50.0
50.0
E1-04
Open
Loop
Vector
Control rpm -
E1-05
*1
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 190.0 190.0
Closed
Loop
Vector
Control
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
50.0
-
190.0
-
150
200.0
E1-06
E1-07
Hz 50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
rpm -
Hz rpm
2.5
-
3.0
-
3.0
-
3.0
-
25.0
-
25.0
-
30.0
-
30.0
-
2.5
-
2.5
-
3.0
-
3.0
-
3.0
-
3.0
-
3.0
-
3.0
-
3.0
-
E1-08
V 12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
15.0
20.0
15.0
20.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
16.0
12.5
E1-09
Hz rpm
E1-10
V
1.3
-
6.0
1.5
-
6.0
1.5
-
6.0
1.5
-
6.0
1.3
-
5.0
1.3
-
6.0
1.5
-
5.0
1.5
-
6.0
1.3
-
7.0
1.3
-
9.0
1.5
-
7.0
1.5
-
11.0
1.5
-
6.0
1.5
-
6.0
1.5
-
6.0
0.5
-
8.3
0.3
-
2.5
E1-13 V 0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
*1. The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
50.0
-
-
-
-
0.0
-
-
0.0
-
-
-
150
-
0
-
-
200.0
5-
62
Factory Settings Changing with Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
200 V Class Inverters
Parameter
Number
Name
o2-04
C6-02
E2-01 (E4-01)
E2-02 (E4-02)
E2-03 (E4-03)
E2-05 (E4-05)
E2-06 (E4-06)
E2-10
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
Carrier frequency
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
E5-02
E5-03
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
E5-07
E5-09
L8-02
PM motor rated power
PM motor rated current
PM number of poles
PM motor line-to-line resistance
PM d-axis inductance
PM q-axis inductance
PM voltage constant
Overheat pre-alarm level n5-02 (A1-02=3) Motor acceleration time n5-02 (A1-02=5) Motor acceleration time
Unit kW
-
-
A
Hz
A
W
%
W
3.7
4
3
2.73
5.5
5
3
1.50
7.5
6
3
14.00
19.60
26.60
1.30
11
7
3
39.7
1.70
15
8
3
53.0
1.60
18.5
9
3
65.8
1.67
22
A
3
77.2
1.70
4.50
5.10
8.00
11.2
15.2
15.7
18.5
0.771
0.399
0.288
0.230
0.138
0.101
0.079
19.6
18.2
15.5
19.5
17.2
20.1
19.5
112 172 262
Factory Setting
245 272 505 538 kW
A
3.70
5.50
7.50
14.60
20.00
29.30
11.00
15.00
18.50
22.00
37.9
53.2
65.0
76.4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Ohm 0.331
0.370
0.223
0.153
0.095
0.069
0.054
mH 0.478
0.539
0.358
0.346
0.246
0.199
0.170
mH 0.652
0.736
0.489
0.469
0.370
0.299
0.255
mV 2.393
2.543
3.270
2.700
2.543
2.567
2.611
°C
75 73 75 80 65 75 75 sec 0.154
0.168
0.175
0.256
0.244
0.317
0.355
sec 0.121
0.081
0.075
0.082
0.099
0.098
0.096
Parameter Number Name Unit Factory Setting
o2-04
C6-02
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
Carrier frequency
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
E2-10
E5-02
E5-03
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
E5-07
E5-09
L8-02
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
PM motor rated power
PM motor rated current
PM number of poles
PM motor line-to-line resistance
PM d-axis inductance
PM q-axis inductance
PM voltage constant
Overheat pre-alarm level n5-02 (A1-02=3) Motor acceleration time n5-02 (A1-02=5) Motor acceleration time kW
-
-
A
Hz
A
W
%
W
30
B
2
105.0
1.80
21.9
0.064
20.8
699
37
C
2
131.0
1.33
38.2
0.039
18.8
823
45
D
2
160.0
1.60
44.0
0.030
20.2
852
55
E
2
190.0
1.43
45.6
0.022
20.5
960 kW 30.00
37.00
45.00
55.00
A 103.5
133.1
149.4
181.6
4 4 4 4
Ohm 0.041
0.027
0.022
0.016
mH 0.129
0.091
0.090
0.072
mH 0.200
0.141
0.139
0.111
mV 2.604
2.451
2.760
2.771
°C
70 85 90 80 sec 0.323
0.320
0.387
0.317
sec 0.126
0.124
0.188
0.186
5
5-
63
5
400 V Class Inverters
Parameter Number Name Unit Factory Setting
o2-04
C6-02
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
Carrier frequency
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
E2-10
E5-02
E5-03
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
E5-07
E5-09
L8-02
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
PM motor rated power
PM motor rated current
PM number of poles
PM motor line-to-line resistance
PM d-axis inductance
PM q-axis inductance
PM voltage constant
Overheat pre-alarm level n5-02 (A1-02=3) Motor acceleration time n5-02 (A1-02=5) Motor acceleration time kW
-
-
A
Hz
A
W
%
W
3.7
24
3
7.00
2.70
2.30
3.333
19.3
130
4.0
25
3
7.00
2.70
2.30
3.333
19.3
130
5.5
26
3
9.80
1.50
2.60
1.595
18.2
193
7.5
27
3
13.30
1.30
4.00
1.152
15.5
263
11
28
3
19.9
1.70
5.6
0.922
19.6
385
15
29
3
26.5
1.60
7.6
0.550
17.2
440 kW
A
3.70
7.31
4.00
7.31
5.50
7.50
10.00
14.60
4 4 4 4
Ohm 1.326
1.326
1.479
0.892
11.0
19.0
4
0613
15.0
26.6
4
0.378
mH 1.911
1.911
2.158
1.433
1.384
0.985
mH 26.08
26.08
2.944
1.956
1.983
1.479
mV 4.786
4.786
5.084
4.739
5.400
5.084
°C
90 90 85 90 73 90 sec 0.154
0.154
0.168
0.175
0.265
0.244
sec 0.121
0.081
0.081
0.075
0.082
0.099
Parameter Number Name Unit Factory Setting
o2-04
C6-02
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
Carrier frequency
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
E2-10
E5-02
E5-03
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
E5-07
E5-09
L8-02
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
PM motor rated power
PM motor rated current
PM number of poles
PM motor line-to-line resistance
PM d-axis inductance
PM q-axis inductance
PM voltage constant
Overheat pre-alarm level n5-02 (A1-02=3) Motor acceleration time n5-02 (A1-02=5) Motor acceleration time kW
-
-
A
Hz
A
W
%
W
18.5
2A
3
32.9
1.67
7.8
0.403
20.1
508
22
2B
3
38.6
1.70
9.2
0.316
23.5
586
30
2C
2
52.3
1.80
10.9
0.269
20.7
750
37
2D
2
65.6
1.33
19.1
0.155
18.8
925
45
2E
2
79.7
1.60
22.0
0.122
19.9
1125
55
2F
2
95.0
1.46
24.0
0.088
20.0
1260 kW
A
18.5
32.5
22.0
38.2
30.0
51.8
37.0
66.6
45.0
74.7
55.0
90.8
4 4 4 4 4 4
Ohm 0.276
0.217
0.165
0.107
0.087
0.064
mH 0.795
0.680
0.515
0.362
0.359
0.287
mH 1.194
1.022
0.800
0.563
0.555
0.444
mV 5.137
5.223
5.208
4.902
5.520
5.544
°C
80 80 72 80 82 73 sec 0.317
0.355
0.323
0.320
0.387
0.317
sec 0.098
0.096
0.126
0.124
0.188
0.186
5-
64
6
Parameter Settings by
Function
Carrier Frequency Derating and Current Limitation ............6-2
Control / Brake Sequence...................................................6-3
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics .................6-20
Adjusting Analog Input Signals .........................................6-25
Speed Detection and Speed Limitation.............................6-26
Improving the Operation Performance..............................6-29
Protective Functions .........................................................6-40
Inverter Protection.............................................................6-47
Input Terminal Functions ..................................................6-50
Output Terminal Functions................................................6-56
Motor and V/f Pattern Setup .............................................6-59
Digital Operator/LED Monitor Functions ...........................6-64
PG Option Cards...............................................................6-72
Rescue System.................................................................6-77
Automatic Fault Reset.......................................................6-81
Memobus Communications ..............................................6-83
Carrier Frequency Derating and
Current Limitation
6
Carrier Frequency Setting
The carrier frequency selection has a direct influence on the motor noise. The higher the carrier frequency the lower is the motor noise. On the other hand the overload capability of the inverter is reduced with a higher carrier frequency. Both have to be considered when the setting is changed.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C6-02
Name
Carrier frequency selection
Factory
Setting
3
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
Q
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Q
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Q
Carrier Frequency Selection
The factory setting is 8 kHz for units from 3.7 to 22 kW and 5 kHz for units from 30 to 55 kW. Usually the value has not to be changed. However, if it necessary to change it, observe the following precautions:
•
•
If speed and torque oscillate at low speeds: Lower the carrier frequency.
If inverter noise affects peripheral devices: Lower the carrier frequency.
•
•
If leakage current from the Inverter too is large: Lower the carrier frequency.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Increase the carrier frequency.
Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Capability
If the carrier frequency is increased the rated current is decreased and vice versa (refer to
). The overload capability is always 150% of the derated inverter current for 30 sec. If this
over load limit is exceeded the inverter trips with an inverter overload fault (OL2).
Current limitation level at low speeds
The Varispeed L7 limits the output current at low frequencies. This current limitation does not change with the carrier frequency selection. The current limitation in the low frequency range is as follows.
150%
140%
130%
120%
110%
200V Class 15kW
400V Class 30kW
200V Class 3.7, 18, 30kW
400V Class 18, 22kW
200V Class 5.5kW
400V Class 3.7, 5.5, 7.5, 11, 55kW
200V Class11kW
200V Class 7.5, 22 , 37, 45, 55kW
400V Class 4.0, 15, 37, 45kW
0
Output
Frequency
1.5Hz
3Hz 4.5Hz
6Hz
Fig 6.1 Low frequency current limitation
IMPORTANT
• If the torque at low frequencies is too low, check whether the current runs into the limitation explained above. If so, check the motor data settings (E2-
) and the V/f pattern (E1-
).
• If the current still runs into the limit it might be necessary to install a one size bigger inverter.
• For selecting an inverter please consider the low frequency current limit as described above and select an inverter with an appropriate current margin.
6-
2
Control / Brake Sequence
Up and Down Commands
Travel start in Up or Down direction
UP and Down commands are the travel direction information.
To start in the elevator in Up or Down direction the following conditions have to be fulfilled:
•
At least one speed reference must be selected if digital inputs are used for speed reference selection.
•
•
•
The hardware base block signal must be set (not base block condition).
When a digital input is set as contactor confirmation input, the contactor confirmation signal must be present before the travel starts.
To start in the Up direction the Up signal must be set. To start in the Down direction the Down signal must be set.
Travel stop
The inverter can be stopped as follows:
•
The direction command (UP or Down) signal is removed.
•
•
The speed reference selection signal is removed if digital inputs are used for speed reference selection.
If d1-18 is set to 3 and all speed inputs are removed
Up / Down Command Source Selection
The input source for the Up and Down signal can be selected in parameter b1-02.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b1-02
Name
RUN command source selection
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1 No
V/f
Q
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Q
Up/Down Commands Using the Digital Operator (b1-02=0)
When b1-02 is set to 0 the Up/Down command must be input using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP, and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator refer to
page 3-1, LED Monitor / Digital Operator and
. This operation can be used for test purposes only.
Up/Down Commands Using Control Circuit Terminals (b1-02=1, factory setting)
When b1-02 is set to 1 the Up/Down command is input at the control circuit terminals S1 and S2. This is the factory setting and the most common configuration.
Up/Down Commands Using an Input Option Card (b1-02=3)
When b1-02 is set to 2 the Up/Down command can be set using an input option card, for example a field bus communications card.
6
6-
3
6
Speed Reference Source Selection
Speed Reference Source Selection
The speed reference source can be selected using parameter b1-01.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b1-01
Name
Frequency reference source selection
Factory
Setting
0
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
Q
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Q
Input the Speed Reference from the Digital Inputs (b1-01=0)
When b1-01 is set to 0 the speed reference can be selected from preset speeds using the digital inputs of the
page 6-5, Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs
Input the Speed Reference Using a Voltage Signal (b1-01=1)
When b1-01 is set to 1 the speed reference can be input at terminal A1 as a 0 to +10V signal. If an analog option card AI-14B is installed, the A1 signal is replaced by the Channel 1 input of the AI card.
The analog reference signal can also be used as 1st speed if multispeed operation is selected (d1-18=0, refer to
page 6-5, Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs
If parameter d1-18 is set to 0 and b1-01 is set to 1, the analog input value replaces any speed selected by the digital inputs except the service speed.
Input the Speed Reference Using an Input Option Card (b1-01=3)
When b1-01 is set to 2 the speed reference can be input using an input option card, for example a field bus communications card.
6-
4
Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs
If the digital inputs are used for speed selection, the speed selection method and the speed priority depends on the setting of parameter d1-18.
Control Methods
Parameter
No.
d1-18
Name
Speed Priority Selection
Factory
Setting
1
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
Q
Open
Loop
Vector
Q
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Q
Multi-Step Speed Operation 1/2 (Binary Input) (d1-18=0/3)
If d1-18 = 0
8 preset speed steps (defined in the parameters d1-01 to d1-08) can be selected using 3 binary coded digital inputs. The Up/Down command starts the inverter. It stops when the Up/Down command is removed.
If d1-18 = 3
7 preset speed steps (defined in the parameters d1-02 to d1-08) can be selected using 3 binary coded digital inputs. The Up/Down command starts the inverter. It is stopped when the Up/Down command is removed or when no speed is selected (all D/Is off).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d1-01 to d1-08
Name
Multi-Step speed 1 to 8 reference value
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.00 Hz
0.00%
Yes
V/f
A
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
-
A
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
A
Multi-function Digital Input Settings (H1-01 to H1-05) (Example)
Terminal
S4
S5
S6
Parameter
Number
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
Set Value
3
4
5
Multi-step speed command 1
Multi-step speed command 2
Multi-step speed command 3
Details
6
6-
5
6
1
6
7
8
4
5
2
3
Speed Selection Table
The following table shows the combinations of the digital input and the according speed.
If b1-02 is set to “1”, speed 1 is input as analog reference at terminal A1 or Channel CH1 of an analog input option card AI-14B if it is installed.
If an AI-14B option card is used and the functions for channel CH2 and CH3 are set to “Auxiliary Frequency
2” (H3-05/09=2) and “Auxiliary Frequency 3” (H3-05/09=3).
Speed
Multi-step Speed
Command 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Multi-step Speed
Command 2
Multi-step Speed
Command 3
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Selected Frequency d1-18 = 0
Frequency reference 1 d1-01 or A1/AI-14B CH1 d1-18 = 3
Stop
Frequency reference 2, d1-02 or AI-14B CH2
Frequency reference 3, d1-03 or AI-14B CH3
Frequency reference 4, d1-04
Frequency reference 5, d1-05
Frequency reference 6, d1-06
Frequency reference 7, d1-07
Frequency reference 8, d1-08
Nominal / Leveling Speed Detection with Multi Speed Inputs
Using this function the inverter can distinguish between the nominal and leveling speed when the speed selection is done by multifunction inputs which is required by other functions like the ASR controller, short floor operation and slip compensation for V/f control.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
S3-04 Nominal/Leveling speed detection level 0.00 Hz No
If the
•
reference speed >= S3-04 the selected speed is regarded as nominal speed
•
reference speed < S3-04 the selected speed is regarded as leveling speed
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
6-
6
Separate Speed Selection Inputs, High Speed Has Priority (d1-18=1)
If d1-18 is set to 1, 6 different speeds can be set and selected using four digital inputs.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation d1-09 d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13 d1-17
Nominal Speed
Intermediate Speed 1
Intermediate Speed 2
Intermediate Speed 3
Releveling Speed
Leveling Speed
50.00 Hz
100.00%
0.00 Hz
0.00%
0.00 Hz
0.00%
0.00 Hz
0.00%
0.00 Hz
0.00%
4.00 Hz
8.00%
S3-09
Frequency reference loss detection when d1-18 = 1 and
H1-K83.
0:Disabled
1:Enabled
1
*1. This speed can be selected by a combination of two inputs
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
V/f
A
-
A
-
A
-
Q
-
Q
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
Q
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
Q
-
Closed
Loop Vector (PM)
-
Q
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
Q
Digital Input
Setting (H1-01 to H1-05)
80
81
-
*1
-
82
83
A
Digital Input Factory Settings
Terminal
S3
Parameter
Number
H1-01
Set Value
80
S4
S5
S6
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
84
81
83
Details
Nominal speed selection (d1-09)
Inspection speed selection (d1-14)
Intermediate speed selection (d1-10)
Leveling speed selection (d1-17)
A A -
Higher Speed has Priority and a Leveling Speed Input is Selected (H1-=83)
If d1-18 is set to 1 and one multi-function digital input is set to leveling speed selection (H1-=83), the inverter decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-17) when the selected speed signal is removed. Inspection Speed can not be selected as travel speed. The higher speed has priority over the leveling speed, i.e. as long as a higher speed is selected, the leveling signal is disregarded (see the fig. below)
The inverter stops when the leveling signal or the Up/Down signal is removed.
DC Injection/ zero servo
DC Injection/ zero servo
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Donw
Leveling speed
Selected speed
No effect
Input is set
6
6-
7
6
The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs.
Terminal function
Nominal Speed command (H1-=80)
Nominal
Speed d1-09
1
Intermed.
Speed 1 d1-10
0
Intermed.
Speed 2 d1-11
1
Intermed.
Speed 3 d1-12
0
Relevel.
Speed d1-13
0
Leveling
Speed d1-17
0
Intermediate speed command (H1-=81)
Releveling speed command (H1-=82)
Leveling speed command (H1-=83)
0
0
X
1
0
X
1
1
X
1
1
X
0
1
X
0
0
1
* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, X = no meaning
0Hz
0
0
0
0
Higher Speed Priority is Selected and a Leveling Speed Input is Not Selected (H1-K83)
When the leveling speed command is not selected for any digital input, the inverter decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-17) when the selected speed signal is removed. Inspection Speed can not be selected as travel speed
To select the leveling speed as travel speed the frequency reference loss detection must be disabled (S3-09=0).
The inverter stops when the direction signal Up/Down is removed.
When no speed selection input is set the leveling speed is taken as the speed reference.
DC Injection/ zero servo
DC Injection/ zero servo
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down
Selected speed
The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs.
Terminal function
Nominal Speed command (H1-=80)
Nominal
Speed d1-09
1
Intermed.
Speed 1 d1-10
0
Intermed.
Speed 2 d1-11
1
Intermed.
Speed 3 d1-12
0
Relevel.
Speed d1-13
0
Leveling
Speed d1-17
0
Intermediate speed command (H1-=81)
Releveling speed command (H1-=82)
Leveling speed command (H1-=83)
0
0
N/A
1
0
N/A
1
1
N/A
1
1
N/A
0
1
N/A
0
0
N/A
* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, N/A = not available
The inverter stops when the direction signal (UP or DOWN signal) is removed.
IMPORTANT
With this configuration the drive stops with a “FRL” (frequency reference loss fault) when no speed reference input is selected during the start.
To disable the FRL detection, set parameter S3-09 to “0”.
Separate Speed Selection Inputs, Leveling Speed Has Priority (d1-18=2)
The related parameters and the digital input pre-settings are the same as for the High Speed Priority setting
(d1-18=1).
Leveling Speed has Priority and a Leveling Speed Input is Selected (H1-=83)
If d1-18 is set to “2” and one multi-function digital input is set to leveling speed (H1-=83) the inverter decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-17) when the leveling speed selection input is activated. The leveling signal has priority over the selected speed, i.e. the selected speed is disregarded. The selected travel speed must be different from inspection speed.
6-
8
The inverter stops when the leveling speed command is removed.
DC Injection/ zero servo
DC Injection/ zero servo
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down
Leveling speed
Selected speed
Leveling speed has priority
The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs.
Terminal function
Nominal Speed command (H1-=80)
Nominal
Speed d1-09
1
Intermed.
Speed 1 d1-10
Intermed.
Speed 2 d1-11
Intermed.
Speed 3 d1-12
0 1 0
Relevel.
Speed d1-13
0
Leveling
Speed d1-17
0
Intermediate speed command (H1-=81)
Releveling speed command (H1-=82)
Leveling speed command (H1-=83)
0
0
X
1
0
X
1
1
X
1
1
X
0
1
X
0
0
1
* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, X = no meaning
0Hz
0
0
0
0
Leveling Speed Priority is Selected and a Nominal Speed Input is Not Selected (H1-K80))
If d1-18 is set to “2” and no digital input is set to nominal speed selection, the speed reference with speed selection input set is nominal speed (d1-09). When the leveling speed signal is set, the inverter starts to decelerate to the leveling speed. The leveling speed signal has priority over all other speed signals, i.e. the intermediate speed 1 and 2 and the releveling signals are disregarded when leveling speed is selected.
The inverter can be stopped by removing the leveling speed signal or the Up/Down command.
CAUTION: This sequence can be risky if e.g. the speed selection doesn’t work for any reason (broken wire etc.).
DC Injection/ zero servo
DC Injection/ zero servo
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down
Leveling speed
The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs.
Terminal function
Nominal Speed command (H1-=80)
Nominal
Speed d1-09
N/A
Intermed.
Speed 1 d1-10
N/A
Intermed.
Speed 2 d1-11
N/A
Intermed.
Speed 3 d1-12
N/A
Relevel.
Speed d1-13
N/A
Leveling
Speed d1-17
N/A
Intermediate speed command (H1-=81)
Releveling speed command (H1-=82)
Leveling speed command (H1-=83)
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
X
X
1
* 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled, N/A = not available, X = no meaning
The intermediate speed 2 can not be selected using this configuration.
6
6-
9
6
Emergency Stop
If a digital input terminal (H1-) is set to 15 or 17 (emergency stop), this input can be used to fast stop the inverter in the case of emergency. In this case the emergency stop deceleration time set in C1-09 is used. If the emergency stop is input with an NO contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 15, if the emergency stop is input with an NC contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 17.
After the emergency stop command has been input, the operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.
Related parameters
Parameter
No.
C1-09
Name
Emergency stop time
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1.50 s No
V/f
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
15
17
Emergency Stop, NO contact
Emergency Stop, NC contact
Function
V/f
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes
Yes
6-
10
Inspection RUN
The inspection run can be activated in two ways:
1. A digital input can be used if parameter d1-18 = 1 or 2. Therefore a inspection speed must be set and any of the digital inputs must be set to “Inspection Run Selection” (H1-=84) (see below).
2. A speed reference comparison value (parameter S3-19) decides if inspection run is activated or not. This function work only if parameter d1-18 = 0 or 3 and if the inspection speed command is not assigned to any digital input (H1-K84).
Related parameters
Parameter
No.
d1-14
S3-03
S3-19
Name
Inspection Speed
Inspection Deceleration time
Inspection speed detection upper level
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
25.00 Hz
50.00%
0.0 sec
0.00 Hz
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
A
A
A
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
84 Inspection Run Selection
Function
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes
Inspection Run Selection by Digital Input
The inspection run digital input must be set before the Up/Down signal is set. During the start of the inspection RUN, the normal brake sequence is used and the inverter accelerates to the inspection speed (d1-14). The stop method depends on the setting of parameter S3-03.
Inspection Speed Selection by Comparison Value
Using this function the inverter can detect the inspection speed by the selected speed reference. The speed must be selected before the Up/Down signal is set. If S3-04 < selected speed O S3-19 the selected speed is regarded as inspection speed. The normal start sequence is used, the stop method depends on the setting of parameter S3-03.
Inspection Run Stop Behavior
S3-03 = 0.0 sec., Stop without deceleration ramp
The inverter stops when the Inspection Speed command or the Up/Down command is removed. In this case:
•
The inverter output is cut by baseblock immediately
•
•
The brake open signal is removed immediately
The contactor control output is removed immediately
6
6-
11
6
The falling edge of the Inspection Speed command or UP/DOWN commands triggers the contactor open command, the motor brake close command and the base block.
Inspection RUN
(Stop by Up/Down signal removal)
Inspection RUN
(Stop by Inspection Speed signal removal)
DC Injection/ zero servo
DC Injection/ zero servo
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down (D/I)
Inspection Speed
Internal RUN
MC closed (D/O)
Brake opened (D/O)
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down (D/I)
Inspection Speed
Internal RUN
MC closed (D/O)
Brake opened (D/O)
S3-03 > 0 sec., Stop with deceleration ramp
The inverter stops when the Inspection Speed command or the Up/Down command is removed. In this case:
•
The output frequency is reduced using the deceleration time set in S3-03.
•
•
When the minimum frequency is reached the brake open signal is removed immediately and the contactor control output is removed immediately
The inverter output is cut after the brake open command removal.
The falling edge of the Inspection Speed command or UP/DOWN commands triggers the deceleration.
Inspection RUN
(Stop by Up/Down signal removal)
Inspection RUN
(Stop by Inspection Speed signal removal)
DC Injection/ zero servo
DC Injection/ zero servo
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down (D/I)
Inspection Speed
Internal RUN
MC closed (D/O)
Brake opened (D/O)
Speed
Hardware BB
Up/Down (D/I)
Inspection Speed
Internal RUN
MC closed (D/O)
Brake opened (D/O)
INFO
During inspection run the carrier frequency is reduced to 2 kHz.
6-
12
Brake Sequence
The L7 supports two types of brake sequences, one with torque compensation at start using an analog input value and one without torque compensation at start.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
H3-15
S1-01
S1-02
S1-03
S1-04
S1-05
S1-06
S1-07
S1-16
S1-17
S1-18
S1-19
S1-20
S1-21
S1-22
S1-23
S1-24
S1-25
S1-29
S1-30
S1-31
Terminal A1 function selection
Zero speed level
DC injection braking current at start
DC injection braking current at sop
DC injection braking/Zero speed time at start
DC injection braking/Zero speed time at stop
Brake open delay time
Brake close delay time
Run delay time
DC injection current gain at regeneration
DC injection current gain at motoring
Output contactor open delay time
Zero-servo gain
Zero-servo completion width
Starting torque compensation increase time/ starting torque fade-out time
Torque compensation gain in Down direction
Torque compensation bias in Up direction
Torque compensation bias in Down direction
Torque fade out speed level
Torque fade out compensation time
Torque limit fade out time at stop
Factory setting
0 i
50%
50%
0.40 sec
0.60 sec
0.20 sec
0.10 sec
0.10 sec
100%
20%
0.10 sec
5
10
500 ms
1.0
0.0%
0.0%
0.0 Hz
1000 msec
0 msec
Change during operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
-
A
A
-
A
1.2 Hz
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Control Method
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
A
0.5 Hz
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
-
A
A
A
0.1 Hz
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
-
A
A
Closed
Loop Vector (PM)
A
A
0.5 Hz
A
A
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set Value Function
80 to 84
86
Speed selection inputs (refer to
page 6-5, Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital
)
Contactor closed answer back signal
Multi-function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
V/f
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Set Value
33
40
41
Zero servo end
Brake release command
Output contactor close command
Function
V/f
-
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
-
Yes
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes
Yes
Yes
6
6-
13
6
Brake Sequence without torque compensation at start
To use the brake sequence without torque compensation at start,
•
•
the Terminal A1 function must be set to 0 (H3-15 = 0, speed reference input) the AI-14B Ch2 and Ch3 input functions must not be set to 14. (H3-05/09
≠ 14, torque reference not selected)
The figure below shows the timing chart for this brake sequence.
Selected Speed
S1-04
Zero servo/
DC Injection at start
Leveling Speed
S1-05
Zero servo/
DC inhection at stop
Speed
RUN
Inverter Hardware BB D/I
Contactor Control D/O
Contactor Confirmation D/I
Brake Open Command t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7
Fig 6.2 Timing chart of Brake sequence without torque compensation at start t8 t9
The timing chart above is divided in time zones. The following table explains the sequence in each time zone.
Timing Description
The inverter gets the direction signal (UP/DOWN) t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8 t9
The inverter gets the hardware base block disable signal (Not BB condition).
The inverter receives the speed reference signal.
The inverter sets the contactor closed signal.
The inverter waits for the contactor confirmation signal. If no digital input is set to contactor confirmation signal (H1-=86), the sequence is proceeded after exceeding the operation start delay time (S1-16).
When the RUN delay time (S1-16) has elapsed, DC injection (Open Loop) or zero servo operation (position lock in
Closed Loop) is started.
When the brake open delay time (S1-06) has elapsed, the inverter sets the brake open command.
The inverter keeps DC injection/zero speed operation until
* the time S1-04 – S1-06 has elapsed if S1-06 < S1-04 or
* the time S1-06 has elapsed if S1-06 > S1-04 (try to avoid this setting since the motor could be driven against the brake)
The speed is increased to the selected speed and is kept constant until the leveling speed is selected.
The speed is decreased to the leveling speed and is kept constant until the stop signal is given (depending on d1-18 either
Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs
The speed is decreased to the zero speed level.
When the zero speed level is reached (S1-01), the DC injection (Open Loop) or zero servo operation (position lock in
Closed Loop) is applied for the time set in S1-05.
When the brake close delay time (S1-07) has elapsed, the brake open command is removed.
The inverter continues DC Injection (Open Loop) or zero speed operation (Closed Loop) until the time S1-06 – S1-07 has elapsed. After that the inverter output is shut down and the hardware base block signal must be set.
After the output contactor open delay time (S1-19) has elapsed, the output contactor close signal is removed.
6-
14
Brake Sequence with Torque Compensation at Start
(Closed Loop Vector for IM and PM only)
Torque Compensation function
If a load measuring device is installed in the elevator, an analog input can be used to input a torque compensation value to the inverter. This function requires Closed Loop Vector control for IM or PM.
The input torque compensation value is latched when the direction command is given. At the start it is increased from zero to the latched value using the torque increase time set in parameter S1-22. The torque compensation value fades out to 0 using the time constant S1-30 after the speed has reached the torque compensation fade out level.
The torque compensation function can be adjusted using the parameters shown in the block diagram below.
Adjust the parameter so that the torque compensation value is zero when the elevator is balanced.
terminal A1
H3-15=1
H3-16
%
Torque compensation bias during raising
S1-24
+ +
UP direction torque compensation
Torque compensation
H3-17
0 10v
S1-23
Torque compensation gain
+ during lowering
S1-25
+
DOWN direction
Torque compensation bias during lowering
The torque compensation input source can be selected as follows:
•
the analog input A1 can be used, if b1-01 is not set to 1 (speed reference source is not the A1 input) and the
A1 function is selected for torque compensation (H3-15=1)
•
•
the channel Ch1 of an AI-14B option card can be used, if b1-01 is not set to 1 (speed reference source is not the A1 input) and the A1 function is selected for torque compensation (H3-15=1) one of the input channels Ch2 or Ch3 of an AI-14B option card can be used when the input function for is set to “Torque Compensation” (H3-05 or H3-09=14). The setting of b1-01 has no influence here.
Brake Sequence
The figure below shows the timing chart for this brake sequence.
Selected Speed
S1-04
Zero speed control at start
Torque compensation
fade out level S1-29
Leveling Speed
Speed
Torque comp level at start
300% Torque
Comp
Torque compensation fade out using S1-30 when S1-29 is reached
Torque Comp increase time
S1-22
RUN
Inverter Hardware BB D/I
Contactor Control D/O
Contactor Confirmation D/I
Brake Open Command t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7
Fig 6.3 Timing chart of Brake sequence with torque compensation at start
S1-05
Zero servo control at stop t8 t9
6
6-
15
6
The timing chart above is divided in time zones. The following table explains the sequence in each time zone
Timing Description
The inverter gets the direction signal (UP/DOWN) t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8 t9
The inverter gets the hardware base block signal disable signal (Not BB condition).
The inverter receives the speed reference signal.
The inverter sets the contactor close signal.
The inverter waits for the contactor confirmation signal. If no digital input is set to contactor confirmation signal (H1-=86), the sequence is proceeded after exceeding the operation start delay time (S1-16).
The zero speed control operation is started.
The analog torque compensation input is latched and the torque compensation value is increased from zero to the latch value using the time constant set in parameter S1-22.
After reaching the torque compensation level at start, the inverter sets the brake open command.
The brake opens and the zero speed operation (no position lock) is continued until S1-04 has elapsed.
The speed is increased to the selected speed and is kept constant until the leveling speed is selected.
During acceleration, when the torque fade out speed level S1-29 is reached, the torque compensation value is fade out to 0 using the time constant set in S1-22.
The speed is decreased to the leveling speed and is kept constant until the stop signal is given (depending on d1-18 either by removing the direction signal, by removing the leveling signal or by deleting the speed inputs, see
).
The speed is decreased to the zero speed level.
When the Zero Speed Level (S1-01) is reached, zero servo operation (position lock in Closed Loop) is applied for the time set in S1-05. When the brake close delay time (S1-07) has elapsed, the brake open command is removed.
The inverter continues the zero speed operation until the time S1-06 – S1-07 has elapsed. After that the inverter output is shut down and the hardware base block signal must be set.
After the output contactor open delay time (S1-19) has elapsed, the output contactor close signal is removed.
Torque Limit Fade Out Function (Closed Loop Vector for PM)
The torque limit fade out function smoothly reduced the torque limit to 0 after the zero speed time at stop has elapsed. It thereby can help to prevent shocks or vibrations when the motor stops and the brake is closed. The used time constant can be set in parameter S1-31. The function can be used in Closed Loop Vector control for
PM motors only (A1-02 = 6).
Zero Speed Control / Zero Servo (position lock)
In Closed Loop Vector control the inverter uses zero speed or zero servo control during the brake open or close procedure.
Zero Speed Control:
The inverter keeps the motor speed at zero, a roll-back is not compensated. This method is used for the start with a torque compensation value by analog input. The strength of the control can be tuned using the ASR
page 6-32, Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) (Closed Loop Vector only)
ing details.
Zero Servo Control:
The inverter tries to keep the rotor position, i.e. a roll back is compensated. This method is used for the start when no torque compensation is used and always for during stop (without and with torque compensation).
Additionally to the ASR parameters C5- the zero servo control can be tuned using the parameter S1-20
(Zero servo gain).
•
•
Increase S1-20 if there is a rollback when the brake opens.
Decrease S1-20 if vibrations occur when the zero servo function is active.
If a digital output is set to “Zero Servo End” (H2-=33), this output can be used to signalize, that the rotor position is within a certain bandwidth around the zero position which can be set in parameter S1-21 (the bandwidth is set in PG pulses and must be set 4 times of the allowable actual PG pulses).
6-
16
Short Floor Operation
The short floor operation is activated if the leveling speed command is set before the nominal speed was reached. The L7 inverter supports 2 methods of short floor operation:
•
Simple short floor operation which can be enabled by setting S3-01 = 1.
When the leveling speed input is set and the reached speed is higher than 40% of the nominal speed, the inverter decelerates to 40% and keeps this speed for a calculated time before it decelerates to the leveling speed and finally stops. If the reached speed is below 40% of the nominal speed, the inverter accelerates to
40% speed and keeps it for a calculated time before it decelerates to the leveling speed.
If the leveling input is set during constant speed run and the speed reference is lower than 40% of the nominal speed, the speed is hold for a calculated time in order to minimize the leveling distance. If the speed reference is higher than 40% but lower than the nominal speed, the speed is decreased to t 40% first, is hold for a calculated time an then decreased to the leveling speed.
•
Advanced short floor operation which can be enabled by setting S3-01 = 2.
If the leveling speed command is set the inverter calculates the optimal speed using the speed reference, two gain factors (S3-21/22) and a time constant (S3-20). If the leveling input is set before the optimal speed has been reached, the inverter accelerates to the optimal speed and keeps it for the time constant S3-
20. If the leveling input is set when the optimal speed was exceeded, the inverter keeps the reached speed for a certain time before it decelerates to the leveling speed.
The table below shows the behavior of the short floor functions under different conditions.
Condition Standard Short Floor
Leveling Signal before 40% of the nominal speed has been reached v
Nominal
Advanced Short Floor
Leveling speed signal before V
Opt
is reached
V
Nominal
S3-20
V
Opt
40% x
V
Nominal
During Acceleration
V
Leveling
V
Leveling f out f out
Leveling command
Leveling Signal after 40% of the nominal speed has been reached.
Leveling command
Leveling speed signal after V
Opt
has been reached
V
Nominal v
Nominal
40% x
V
Nominal
V
Opt
Optimal speed profile
(S2-20 calculated)
V
Leveling f out
V
Leveling
Leveling command f out
Leveling command
6
6-
17
6
Condition Standard Short Floor
Leveling command during run with constant speed higher than 40% v
Nominal
40% x
V
Nominal
Advanced Short Floor
During Run with constant speed
V
Leveling f out
Leveling command
Leveling command during run with constant speed lower than 40% v
Nominal
40% x
V
Nominal
V
Leveling f out
Leveling command
Related parameters
Parameter
No.
d1-09 d1-18
S3-01
S3-04
S3-05
S3-20
S3-21
S3-22
Name
Nominal Speed
Speed reference priority selection
Short floor operation
Nominal / Leveling Speed detection level
Nominal speed for short floor calculation
Minimum constant speed time
Distance calculation acceleration time gain
Distance calculation deceleration time gain
No effect
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
50.00 Hz
100.00%
1
0
0.0 Hz
0.0Hz
0.0 sec.
150.0%
150.0%
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
-
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
Simple Short Floor Operation Setup
•
•
•
The short floor function can be activated by setting parameter S3-01 to 1.
If parameter d1-18 is set to 0 or 3 (multispeed input), the set value of parameter S3-05 is taken as nominal speed reference for the short floor calculation. Additionally it is required to use the nominal/leveling speed detection (refer to
page 6-6, Nominal / Leveling Speed Detection with Multi Speed Inputs
).
If parameter d1-18 is set to 1 or 2 (dedicated speed inputs), the value of parameter d1-09 is taken as nominal speed. The set value of S3-05 has no meaning. The nominal/leveling speed detection must not be used.
Advanced Short Floor Operation Setup
•
•
•
The advanced short floor operation can be activated by setting parameter S3-01 to 2.
If parameter d1-18 is set to 0 or 3 (multispeed input), the speed reference value, which was selected at the start, is taken as nominal speed for the speed pattern calculation. Parameter S3-04 is used for the leveling speed detection (refer to
).
If parameter d1-18 is set to 1 or 2 (dedicated speed input), the value of parameter d1-09 is taken as nominal speed for the speed pattern calculation.
6-
18
Setup the Acceleration and Deceleration Gain (S3-21, S3-22)
These parameters are used for the optimal speed calculation to compensate the S-curves (S-curves are not considered in the optimal speed calculation).
•
Increase the gains S3-21 and S3-22 if the leveling time is too short or the calculated optimal speed is too high.
•
Decreases the gains S3-21 and S3-22 if the leveling time is too short of the calculated optimal speed is too low.
IMPORTANT
1. S-Curves are not considered in the optimal speed calculation and have to be compensated by the gains S3-21 and S3-22.
2. A too low gain setting can result in a too high optimal speed and too short leveling time. Very low settings can lead to an overrun. Do not set the values lower than 100% (100% means, that the Scurve is not compensated.
3. If parameter d1-18 is set to 0 or 3 and the leveling speed input is released during short floor operation, the inverter accelerates or decelerates to the selected reference speed.
4. If the Dwell function (b6 parameters) is activated, the dwell function is performed during short floor operation but it is not considered in the optimal speed calculation. The influence of the Dwell function must be compensated using the gains S3-21 and S3-22.
5. The advanced short floor function does not work during rescue operation and inspection run.
6. If the speed reference is input using an analog input the advanced short floor function should not be used.
7. If the advanced short floor function is used, the following parameter settings should be in given range:
9.6 Hz
O
E1-04
O
100 Hz
4.8 Hz
O
d1-08
O
100Hz
0.1 sec.
O
C1
O
50 sec.
6
6-
19
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
6
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
The acceleration time indicates the time to increase the speed from 0% to 100% of the maximum speed set in
E1-04. The deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the speed from 100% to 0% of E1-04.
Four separate acceleration and deceleration times can be set. They can be switched over between using:
•
digital input signals
•
the automatic accel./decel. time switch over function with a changeable switching speed level
The display unit and the setting range for the times can be selected between 0.0 sec. or 0.00 sec.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
C1-10
C1-11
S1-26
Name
Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 2
Acceleration time 3
Deceleration time 3
Acceleration time 4
Deceleration time 4
Acceleration/deceleration time setting unit
Deceleration time switching frequency
Dwell at start speed reference
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1.5 sec
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
0.0 Hz
0.00%
0.0 Hz
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
-
-
A
Q
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
Q
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
Q
-
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Q
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
-
Q
A
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
7 Acceleration/Deceleration switch over 1
1A Acceleration/Deceleration switch over 2
Function
V/f
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes
Yes
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units
Set the acceleration/deceleration time number od decimals using C1-10. The factory setting is 1.
Set value
0
1
Details
The acceleration/deceleration time setting range is 0.00 to 6000.0 in units of 0.01 s.
The acceleration/deceleration time setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.1 s.
6-
20
Switching Over the Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input
Commands
When two digital input terminals are set to “Accel./Decel. time switch over 1 and 2” (H1-=7 and 1A), the acceleration/deceleration times can be switched over even during operation by a binary combination of the inputs. The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/Deceleration
Time Selection 1 Terminal
OFF
Acceleration/Deceleration
Time Selection 2 Terminal
OFF
Acceleration Time
C1-01
Deceleration Time
C1-02
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
C1-03
C1-05
C1-07
C1-04
C1-06
C1-08
Automatic Deceleration Time Switch Over Using a Speed Level
The deceleration times C1-02 and C1-08 can be switched over automatically at a certain speed which can be set in parameter C1-11.
shows the working principle of the function.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.
Output
Frequency
Decel. time
Switching Freq.
C1-11
C1-01 C1-02
When output frequency ≥ C1-11the deceleration time 1 (C1-02) is used.
When output frequency < C1-11the deceleration time 4 (C1-08) is used.
C1-08
Fig 6.4 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
Dwell at Start Function (Closed Loop Vector only)
The Dwell function can be used to reduce a staring jerk caused by high static friction.
After a start command, the output frequency is increased up to the Dwell speed set in parameter S1-26 using the acceleration time C1-07. As soon as the motor starts turning and the motor speed (PG feedback) reaches the acceleration time switching level C1-11, the acceleration is continued using the selected acceleration time starting with the S-curve set in parameter C2-01.
RUN
C1-02
No S-Curve
C1-07
C1-11
C2-01
S1-26
6
Fig 6.5 Dwell at start function
Note: When C1-11 is set much higher than S1-26, the motor speed cannot reach C1-11 and the motor can not accelerate to the selected speed. Therefore always set C1-11 equal or lower than S1-26!
6-
21
6
Acceleration and S-curve Settings
Five different S-curve times are used to reduce the jerk when the speed changes.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
C2-05
Name
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
S-curve characteristic time below leveling
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
V/f
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
shows the influence of the different S-curve times.
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
C2-01
C2-05
Leveling Speed
Fig 6.6 S-curve settings
Output Speed Hold (Dwell Function)
The dwell function holds the speed temporarily.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b6-01 b6-02 b6-03 b6-04
Dwell frequency at start
Dwell time at start
Dwell frequency at stop
Dwell time at stop
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
A
A
6-
22
Applying an Output Speed Dwell
The dwell function at start is applied when the speed level set in parameter b6-01 is reached. The dwell speed is kept for the time set in parameter b6-02. The dwell function at stop is applied when the speed reaches the level set in parameter b6-03. The dwell speed is kept for the time set in parameter b6-04. The setting is shown
.
Run command
Output frequency
ON
OFF b6-01 b6-03
Time b6-02 b6-04
Fig 6.7 Output Frequency Dwell Settings
Stall Prevention During Acceleration
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if the load is too heavy.
If L3-01 is set to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current reaches 85% of the set value in L3-02, the acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, the acceleration will stop.
If L3-01 is set to 2 (optimal adjustment), the motor accelerates so that the current is held at the level set in L3-
02. With this setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L3-01
L3-02
Name
Stall prevention selection during acceleration
Stall prevention level during acceleration
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1
150%
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
-
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
-
6
6-
23
Time Chart
The following figure shows the output frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Output current
L3-02
85% of L3-02
Stall level during acceleration
Time
Output frequency
6
*1.
*2.
* 1. The acceleration rate is lowered.
* 2. The acceleration is stopped to reduce the output current.
Fig 6.8 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
Time
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
•
Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.
Do not increase the stall prevention level unnecessarily. An extremely high setting can reduce the inverter lifetime. Also do not disable the function.
If the motor stalls with the factory settings check the V/f pattern settings (E1-) and the motor setup
(E2-).
If the stall level has to be increased very much to get the elevator running, consider to use a one size bigger inverter.
6-
24
Adjusting Analog Input Signals
Adjusting Analog Frequency References
Using the H3- parameters, the analog input values of terminal A1 or the Channels 1 to 3 of the optional analog input card AI-14B can be adjusted.
Related Parameters
H3-09
H3-10
H3-11
H3-12
H3-15
H3-16
H3-17
H3-01
H3-02
H3-03
H3-04
H3-05
H3-06
H3-07
H3-08
Parameter
No.
Name
Frequency reference AI-14B CH1signal level selection
Frequency reference AI-14B CH1 input gain
Frequency reference AI-14B CH1 input bias
AI-14B CH3 signal level selection
AI-14B CH3 function selection
AI-14B CH3 input gain
AI-14B CH3 input bias
AI-14B CH2 signal level selection
AI-14B CH2 function selection
AI-14B CH2 input gain
AI-14B CH2 input bias
Analog input filter time constant for the AI-14B
Terminal A1 function selection
Terminal A1 input gain
Terminal A1 input bias
0
100.0%
0.0%
0.03 s
0
100.0%
0.0%
0
100.0%
0.0%
0
2
100.0%
0.0%
3
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
V/f
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
A
Adjusting Analog Input Signals
The frequency reference can be input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage. The voltage level at terminal A1 is 0 to +10V. The analog input channels of the AI-14B option card can be used with 0 to
+10V or -10 to +10V.
The input signal levels can be selected using,
•
H3-01 for AI-14B CH1
•
•
H3-04 for AI-14B CH3
H3-08 for AI-14B CH2
The signals can be adjusted using the parameters:
•
H3-02 (Gain) and H3-03 (Bias) for Channel 1 of the AI-14B option card
•
•
•
H3-06 (Gain) and H3-07 (Bias) for Channel 3 of the AI-14B option card
H3-10 (Gain) and H3-11 (Bias) for Channel 2 of the AI-14B option card
H3-16 (Gain) and H3-17 (Bias) for analog input A1
The gain sets the level of the selected input value if 10V is input, the bias sets the level of the selected input value if 0V is input.
6
6-
25
Speed Detection and Speed Limitation
6
Speed Agreement Function
There are eight different types of frequency detection methods available. The digital outputs M1 to M6 can be set to this function and can be used to indicate a frequency detection or agreement to any external equipment.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L4-01
L4-02
L4-03
L4-04
Name
Speed agreement detection level
Speed agreement detection width
Speed agreement detection level (±)
Speed agreement detection width (±)
Factory
Setting
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
A
A
Multifunction Output Settings: H2-01 to H2-03 (M1 – M6 function selection)
The table below shows the necessary H2-01 to H2-03 parameter setting for each of the speed agreement functions. Refer to the timing charts on the following page for details.
f ref
/f out
Agree 1
Function Setting
2 f out
/f set
Agree 1
3
4
5
Frequency detection 1
Frequency detection 2 f ref
/f out
Agree 2 f out
/f set
Agree 2
Frequency detection 3
Frequency detection 4
13
14
15
16
Setting Precautions
•
•
With L4-01 an absolute speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected in both directions
(Up and Down).
With L4-03 a signed speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected only in the set direction (positive level
→ Up direction, negative level → Down direction).
6-
26
Time Charts
The following table shows the time charts for each of the speed agreement functions.
Related parameter f ref
/f out
Agree 1
L4-01: Speed Agree Level
L4-02: Speed Agree Width
L4-03: Speed Agree Level +/–
L4-04: Speed Agree Width f ref
/f out
Agree 2 f ref
/f out
Agree
Frequency reference
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-02
Frequency reference
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-04 f out
/f set
Agree
L4-02 f ref
/f out
Agree 1
OFF
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 2) f out
/f set
Agree 1
(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)
L4-02
L4-01
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
OFF f out
/f set
Agree 1
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 3)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1
(L4-01 > | Output frequency |)
L4-02
L4-04 f ref
/f out
Agree 2
OFF
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 13) f out
/f set
Agree 2
(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)
L4-04
L4-03
Output frequency or motor speed
OFF ON f out
/f set
Agree 2
(Multi-function output setting = 14)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 3
(L4-03 > Output frequency)
L4-04
L4-01 L4-03
Output frequency or motor speed
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 1
ON
OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 4)
Frequency
Detection
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2
(L4-01 < | Output frequency |)
Freq. Detection 3
ON
OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 15)
Frequency Detection 4
(L4-03 < Output frequency)
L4-02
L4-04
L4-01
L4-03
Output frequency or motor speed
Output frequency or motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 2
OFF
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 5)
Freq. Detection 4 OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 16)
6
6-
27
6
Limiting the Elevator Speed to the Leveling Speed (d1-17)
To use a high speed limit in the UP or DOWN direction to the leveling speed, one of the digital inputs must be set to “High speed limit switch Up” or “High speed limit Down” (H1- = 87/88).
Multifunction Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set Value
87
88
Function
High speed limit switch (Up direction)
High speed limit switch (Down direction)
V/f
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop Vector (PM)
Yes
Yes
High speed limit switch Up
The high speed limit switch UP function limits the speed to the leveling speed when the UP direction signal is given. The DOWN direction has no speed limit.
High speed limit switch Down
The high speed limit switch DOWN function limits the speed to the leveling speed when the DOWN direction signal is given, the UP direction has no speed limit.
6-
28
Improving the Operation Performance
Reducing the Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)
When the load is large, the motor slip also increases and the motor speed decreases. The slip compensation function keeps the motor speed constant, regardless of changes in load. When the motor is operating at the rated load, parameter E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip)
× the slip compensation gain value in parameter C3-01 is added to the output frequency. The function can be used in V/f control or Open Loop Vector control.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C3-01
C3-02
C3-03
C3-04
C3-05
Name
Slip compensation gain
Slip compensation delay time
Slip compensation limit
Slip compensation during regeneration
Output voltage limit operation selection
Factory
Setting
1.0
2000 ms
200%
1
0
Change during
Operation
Yes
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
-
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A -
Closed
Loop Vector (PM)
-
-
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01)
If C3-01 is set to 1.0, the slip compensation value at 100% load is equal to the rated slip set in parameter
E2-02.
If necessary (motor speed is too high or too low) adjust the slip compensation gain as follows:
1. With Open Loop Vector control set E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) and E2-03 (Motor No-load Current). The motor rated slip can be calculated using the values on the motor nameplate and the following formula: slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency (Hz) –
The motor data can be set automatically using the autotuning function.
2. With V/f control set C3-01 to 1.0.
3. Apply a load and compare the speed reference and the actual motor speed during run with constant speed.
Adjust the slip compensation gain by 0.1 at a time. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain, if the speed is higher than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.
4. Setting C3-01 to 0.0 disables the slip compensation function.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant (C3-02)
The slip compensation delay time constant is set in ms. The setting value of C3-02 is 2000ms. Normally, there is no need to change these settings. When the slip compensation responsiveness is low, lower the set value.
When the speed is unstable, increase the set value.
6
6-
29
Adjusting Slip Compensation Limit (C3-03)
Using parameter C3-03 the upper limit for the slip compensation can be set as a percentage, taking the motor rated slip as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even after adjusting the slip compensation gain, the slip compensation limit may have been reached. Increase the limit, and check the speed again. Always make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency does not exceed the tolerance of the machine.
The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range.
Slip compensation limit
6
Output frequency
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-04: Maximum output frequency
Fig 6.9 Slip Compensation Limit
Enable the Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration (C3-04)
Enables or disables the slip compensation function during regenerative operation. The factory setting is enabled.
Operation Selection when the Output Voltage is Saturated (C3-05)
Generally the Inverter cannot output a voltage that is higher than the input voltage. If in the high-speed range the output voltage reference for the motor (monitor parameter U1-06) exceeds the input voltage, the output voltage becomes saturated, and inverter cannot respond to speed or load changes. This function automatically reduces the output voltage to avoid voltage saturation.
Thereby the speed control accuracy can be maintained even at high speeds (around the rated speed of the motor). By the lowered voltage the current can be around 10% higher compared to the operation without voltage limiter.
Torque Compensation Function Adjustments
The torque compensation function detects a rising motor load, and increases the output torque.
In V/f control the inverter calculates the motor primary loss voltage using the terminal resistance value (E2-
05) and adjusts the output voltage (V) to compensate insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation.
The compensation voltage is calculated by the calculated Motor primary voltage loss
× parameter C4-01.
In Open Loop Vector control the motor excitation current and the torque producing current are calculated and controlled separately. The torque compensation affects the torque producing current only.
The torque producing current is calculated by the calculated torque reference
× C4-01.
6-
30
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
C4-01
C4-02
Torque compensation gain
Torque compensation delay time constant
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1.00
2000 ms
Yes
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
-
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
-
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01)
Normally, there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:
Open Loop Vector control
•
If the torque response is slow increase the set value.
•
If vibrations occur decrease the set value.
V/f control
•
If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
•
•
If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (max. applicable motor capacity), increase the set value.
If the motor vibrates, reduce the set value.
Setting precautions
•
Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated output current range.
•
Adjust the value in steps of 0.05 only.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Delay Time Constant (C4-02)
The factory setting depends on the control mode. The factory settings are:
•
V/f control: 200 ms
•
Open loop vector control: 20 ms
Normally, there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:
•
If the motor vibrates or if overshooting occurs, increase the set value.
•
If the torque response is slow, decrease the set value.
6
6-
31
6
Starting Torque Compensation Function (C4-03 to C4-05)
A starting torque compensation can be applied to speed up the torque establishment at start in Open Loop Vector control.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
C4-03
C4-04
C4-05
Starting torque compensation value (forward direction)
Starting torque compensation value (reverse direction)
Starting torque compensation time constant
It works like shown in the following diagram.
Forward (Reverse) Run command
ON
OFF
Time constant: C4-05
Time constant: C4-02
C4-03 (forward)
C4-04 (reverse, negative polarity)
Torque compensation volume
0.0
0.0
1 ms
No
No
No
-
-
-
C4-05 x 4
E1-09
Output frequency
E1-09
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
-
-
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
-
-
Fig 6.10 Time Chart for Starting Torque Frequency
When this function is used, the following should be considered:
•
Both values, C4-03 and C4-04 have to be set.
•
•
•
The compensation works for motoring operation only. It can not be used for regenerative operation.
If the starting torque compensation is used and a large shock is generated at the start, increase the starting torque compensation time constant (C4-05)
The function can be not be used unrestricted for elevators, since the load is not know before the start.
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) (Closed Loop Vector only)
In Closed Loop Vector control the automatic speed regulator (ASR) adjusts the torque reference in order to eliminate the deviation between the speed reference and the measured speed (PG feedback). The ASR settings determine the motor speed accuracy and stability.
Frequency
Reference
Motor
Speed
+
-
C5-01/03/09
P
I
C5-02/04/10
C5-08
I-Limit
+
+
Delay
Time
Torque
Limits
Torque
Reference
Fig 6.11 ASR Block Diagram
6-
32
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04
C5-07
C5-08
C5-09
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
ASR integral (I) time 1
Name
ASR proportional (P) gain 2
ASR integral (I) time 2
ASR switching frequency
ASR integral limit
ASR proportional (P) gain 3
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
40.00
12.00
0.500 sec.
0.300 sec.
20.00
6.00
0.500 sec.
0.0 Hz
2.0%
400%
40.00
12.00
0.500 sec.
0.300 sec.
5.00
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
V/f
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Q
A
Q
-
A
-
-
Q
Q
Q
Q
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
Q
-
Q
-
-
Q
-
-
A
Q
Q
Q
-
Q
-
Q
-
C5-10
C5-11
ASR integral (I) time 3
ASR gain for encoder offset tuning
ASR Gain and Integral Time Adjustments
There are three sets of ASR gain and integral times, one for the maximum speed (C5-01/02), one for the minimum speed at acceleration (C5-03/04) and one for the minimum speed at deceleration (C5-09/10) (see the figure below).
ASR P, I
ASR P, I
C5-03 ASR Gain 2
C5-04 ASR I time 2
C5-09 ASR Gain 3
C5-10 ASR I time 3
C5-01 ASR Gain 1
C5-02 ASR I time 1
C5-01 ASR Gain 1
C5-02 ASR I time 1
6
0Hz C5-07 E1-04
Speed
During Acceleration
0Hz C5-07 E1-04
Speed
During Deceleration
When the ride starts with the nominal speed selected, the ASR P gain and I time change from C5-03/04 to C1-
01/02 at nominal speed. When the speed selection changes to leveling speed, the P gain and I time are changed from C1-01/02 to C1-09/10.
If parameter d1-18 is set to 0 or 3, the nominal/leveling speed detection function must be enabled (refer to
page 6-6, Nominal / Leveling Speed Detection with Multi Speed Inputs
) in order to use the ASR 3 settings.
Adjusting ASR Proportional Gains (C5-01/03/09)
The gain settings determine how much the ASR input (= speed deviation) is amplified in order to eliminate the speed deviation. The responsiveness of the ASR is increased when the gain setting is increased but oscillations can occur when this setting is too high.
•
•
Increase C5-03 if the ASR is too slow at start or very low frequencies, decrease it if vibrations occur.
Increase C5-01 if the ASR is too slow at high speed or if overshooting occurs at speed changes in the high speed area, decrease it if vibrations occur
6-
33
•
Increase C5-09 if ASR is slow in the low speed area or if undershooting occurs at leveling speed. If vibrations occur in the low speed area during deceleration decrease the value.
Adjusting ASR Integral Times (C5-02/04/10)
The integral time determines how fast the ASR input is integrated in order to eliminate the speed deviation.
Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness of the ASR and the speed accuracy when the load changes suddenly. Oscillations can occur if the setting of this value is too low.
•
•
•
Decrease C5-02 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow at high speeds or if overshooting occurs at speed changes in the high speed area. Increase it if vibrations occur.
Decrease C5-04 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow at start or at very low frequencies. Increase it if vibrations occur.
Decrease C5-10 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow in the low speed area at leveling or if undershooting occurs at leveling speed. If vibrations occur in the low speed area during deceleration increase the value.
Adjusting the ASR Gain for Encoder Offset Tuning (C5-11)
During the encoder offset tuning for Hiperface y
or EnDat uses the value of parameter C5-11 as ASR gain.
•
•
Decrease C5-11 if vibrations occur during the tuning and repeat the tuning.
Increase C5-11 if the accuracy of the tuning is low and repeat the tuning.
6
Stabilizing Speed (Automatic Frequency Regulator) (Open Loop Vector)
The speed feedback detection control (AFR) function controls the stability of the speed when a load is suddenly applied or removed. It calculates the amount of speed fluctuation using the torque current (Iq) feedback value and compensates the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation. f ref f out
6-
34
I q
Fig 6.12 AFR Control Loop
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
n2-01 n2-02
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) gain 1.00
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant 1 50 ms
No
No
V/f
-
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
-
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
-
Setting the AFR Gain (n2-01)
Normally there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary, do the following:
•
If hunting occurs increase n2-01.
•
If the response is too low, decrease n2-01.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a time while checking the response.
Setting the AFR Time Constants (n2-02)
Parameter n2-02 sets the time constant for the AFR control. If adjustments are necessary,
•
Increase the setting if hunting occurs or the speed is over-compensated
•
Decrease the setting if the compensation is too slow
Normally there is no need to change this setting.
Inertia Compensation (Closed Loop Vector Only)
Feed Forward Control is used to eliminate the speed overshoot or undershoot by compensating inertia effects.
The function can be enabled using parameter n5-01.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
n5-01 n5-02 n5-03 n5-05
Name
Feed forward control selection
Motor acceleration time
Feed forward proportional gain
Motor acceleration time auto tuning
Factory setting
1
0 kVA dependent
1.0
0
Change during operation
No
No
No
No
V/f
-
-
-
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
-
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
A
A
A
A
Adjustments
Motor acceleration time (n5-02)
The motor acceleration time n5-02 is the time, which is needed to accelerate the to the rated speed with the rated torque of the motor. The time can be estimated like follows:
•
•
Make the general setup (V/f pattern, Motor Setup, etc.)
Balance the elevator (car in middle position, Car weight = Counter weight)
•
•
•
•
Set the torque limits to 100% using the L7- parameters.
Set the acceleration time very short (the inverter must reach the torque limit very fast).
Start in any direction and measure the time from zero speed to top speed.
Set this time in n5-02.
Feed Forward Gain (n5-03)
This value usually has not to be changed.
•
Increase the gain to improve the responsiveness to the speed reference.
•
Decrease the gain if vibrations occur.
Motor Acceleration Time Auto Tuning (n5-05)
The motor acceleration time n5-02 can be calculated by an auto tuning function. It sets the internal acceleration time to 0.1 sec., disabled the S-curve and sets the torque limit to 100%. After that a start in each direction must be performed. The measured acceleration times are used to calculate the n5-03 value.
Before the n5-02 auto tuning is performed, the motor data autotuning and the general setup should have been finished. Do the tuning with the factory settings for the n5- parameters.
6
6-
35
Use the following procedure:
1. Set n5-05 to “1” to enable the auto tuning and go back to the speed reference display.
2. Set the base block input.
3. Enable the inspection speed input. “FFCAL” will blink in the display to signalize that the calculation is active.
4. Set an UP command. The inverter will accelerate the motor up to the nominal speed. Release the UP command a few seconds after the top speed has been reached.
5. When the motor has stopped, apply a DOWN command. The inverter will accelerate the motor in the opposite direction to the nominal speed. Release the DOWN command a few seconds after the nominal speed has been reached.
To abort the tuning set parameter n5-05 to “0”.
IMPORTANT
1. The order of giving the UP or DOWN command has no influence.
2. n5-01 should not be changed from the factory value for the tuning.
3. After the run in both directions is finished, parameter n5-05 is automatically set back to “0”.
4. The autotuning will be performed only if the inspection speed input is set.
5. Do not change the mechanical constants (load, inertia) between the runs.
6
Automatic Current Regulator (ACR) Tuning
The ACR controller consists of two PI control loops, one for the d-axis and one for the q-axis current. The
ACR parameters can be accessed in the Closed Loop Vector control for PM mode only.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
n8-29 n8-30 n8-32 n8-33
Name
ACR q axis proportional gain
ACR q axis integral time
ACR d axis proportional gain
ACR d axis integral time
Factory setting
1000 rad/s
10.0 ms
1000 rad/s
10.0 ms
Change during operation
No
No
No
No
V/f
-
-
-
-
Open
Loop
Vector
-
-
-
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
-
-
-
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
A
A
Adjustments
Normally there is no need to change these values. However, if short cycle vibrations occur which can’t be eliminated by the ASR controller setup, it might help to adjust ACR values like follows:
•
•
If the motor generates very strange high frequency noise (not carrier frequency related), reduce both ACR gains (n8-29 and n8-32) for the same value. If the gain is reduced too much, the performance will be reduced.
If vibrations occur, reduce both integral times (n9-30 and n9-33) for the same value.
6-
36
A/D Conversion Delay Time Tuning
The A/D conversion delay timer sets a delay for the current signal A/D conversion.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
n9-60
Name
Current signal A/D conversion delay time
Factory setting
0.0 µsec.
Change during operation
No
V/f
-
Open
Loop
Vector
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
Adjustments
occur during constant speed run, the A/D conversion delay can be increased in order to eliminate the vibrations.
Torque Signal
Motor Speed
Fig 6.13 Oscillations caused by bad A/D conversion adjustment
Improving the Leveling Accuracy by Leveling Speed Slip Compensation
This function can be used in V/f and Open Loop Vector control to improve the leveling accuracy by compensating the motor slip influence at leveling speed.
The inverter measures the current level or torque reference S2-05 sec. after the speed-agree condition (acceleration finished) for the time set in S2-06 and calculates the average value to estimate the load. This value is
used for the calculation of slip which is added to the speed reference at leveling speed (see
).
S2-05 S2-06
6
Speed reference is increased or decreased depending on measured load
Fig 6.14 Slip Compensation Working Principle
6-
37
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
S2-01
S2-02
S2-03
S3-05
S3-06
S2-07
Name
Motor Rated rpm
Slip Compensation Gain at Motoring
Slip Compensation Gain at Regenerating
Slip Compensation Torque Detection Delay
Slip Compensation Torque Detection Time
Slip Compensation primary Delay Time
Factory setting
1380rpm
0.7
1.0
1.0 sec.
0.5 sec.
200ms
Change during operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
-
Open
Loop
Vector
-
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
-
-
-
-
-
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
-
-
-
-
Adjustments
The Slip compensation values can be set separately for motoring and regenerative operation. Before adjusting this function the general setup should have been done (Motor Setup, V/f pattern, Speeds, ASR settings etc.).
To adjust the Slip compensation function do the following in motoring and regenerative mode:
•
•
Set the motor speed in S2-01 if V/f control is used.
Try to measure the actual motor speed during leveling.
•
•
•
If the motor speed is lower than the leveling speed reference increase S2-02 in motoring mode or decrease
S2-03 in regenerative mode.
If the motor speed is higher than the leveling speed reference decrease S2-02 in motoring mode or increase
S2-03 in regenerative mode.
S2-05 and S2-06 should not be modified, except if the stop accuracy is poor and the constant speed time after the speed agree is shorter than S2-05 + S2-06.
6
Field Forcing
The field forcing function controls the motor flux and compensates the flux establishment delay of the motor.
Thereby it improves the motor responsiveness to changes in the speed reference or the load.
Field forcing is applied during all operation conditions except DC Injection.
Using parameter d6-06 a field forcing limit can be applied. A setting of 100% is equal to the no-load current set in parameter E2-03.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d6-03 d6-06
Field forcing selection
Field forcing limit
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0
400%
No
No
V/f
-
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
-
6-
38
Adjusting the DC Injection Current
The DC current injection is used in V/f and Open Loop Vector Control in order to hold the motor when the brake is opened or closed.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
S1-02
S1-03
S1-17
S1-18
Name
DC injection current level at start
DC injection current level at stop
DC injection gain at stop in regenerative operation
DC injection gain at stop in motoring operation
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
50%
50%
100%
20%
No
No
No
No
-
-
A
A
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
-
-
-
Adjusting the DC Injection Current Levels (S1-02/03)
Two different DC injection current levels can be set to start and stop.
•
Increase the corresponding set value when the holding torque during brake open or brake close is too low.
•
Decrease the corresponding set value when the holding torque is enough but e.g. the DC injection noise is too loud.
Adjusting the DC Injection Gains for Stop (S1-17/18)
In Open Loop Vector control two different DC injection current gains for motoring and regenerative operation can be adjusted in order to improve the stopping behavior. The gains are related to the S1-03 set value. The function can be used to equalize jerk effects if the DC injection is too low with motoring load and too high with regenerative load. The load condition (regenerative or motoring) is detected when the inverter is running at another speed than the leveling speed.
•
•
If the DC injection is ok with motoring load but not with regenerative load adjust parameter S1-17.
If the DC injection is ok with regenerative load but not with motoring load adjust parameter S1-18.
6
6-
39
Protective Functions
6
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation
Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the inverter output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
Stall prevention during operation can be enabled in V/f control only. If the Inverter output current continues to exceed the setting in parameter L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Enable or disable the stall prevention using parameter L3-05. Set the according deceleration times using C1-02 (Deceleration time
1) or C1-04 (Deceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 – 2%, the motor will accelerate again to the set frequency.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L3-05
L3-06
Name
Stall prevention selection during running function selection
Stall prevention level during running
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1
150%
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
-
Precautions
If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory settings, lower the stall prevention level during operation.
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
•
Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.
Do not increase the stall prevention level unnecessarily. An extremely high setting can reduce the inverter lifetime. Also do not disable the function.
If the motor stalls with the factory settings check the V/f pattern (E1-) and the motor setup (E2-).
If the stall level has to be increased very much to get the elevator running, check the mechanical system or consider using a one size bigger inverter.
Motor Torque Detection / Car Stuck Detection
The inverter provides a torque detection function to detect overtorque (Car stuck) or undertorque. An alarm signal can be output to the digital output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, or M5-M6.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (overtorque/undertorque detection NO/
NC) in one of the parameter H2-01 to H2-03 (digital output terminals M1 to M6 function selection).
Overtorque/undertorque is detected by:
•
observing the output current in V/f control (the inverter rated output current is equal to 100%).
•
observing the torque reference value in Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control (the motor rated torque is equal to 100%).
6-
40
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L6-01
L6-02
L6-03
L6-04
L6-05
L6-06
Name
Torque detection selection 1
Torque detection level 1
Torque detection time 1
Torque detection selection 2
Torque detection level 2
Torque detection time 2
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
4
150%
10.0 s
0
150%
0.1 s
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
A
A
A
A
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
B
17
18
19
Function
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
L6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and Operator Display (JVOP-160-OY only)
The relationship between alarms displayed on the digital operator when overtorque or undertorque is detected, and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.
Set
Value
0
Function
Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
Operator Display
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Detection 1
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Detection 2
– –
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Overtorque/Car stuck detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning is output).
Overtorque/Car stuck detected continuously during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
OL3 flashes
OL3 flashes
OL4 flashes
OL4 flashes
Overtorque/Car stuck detection only with speed agree; output is stopped upon detection.
Overtorque/Car stuck detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon detection.
OL3 lights up
OL3 lights up
Undertorque detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning is output).
UL3 flashes
OL4 lights up
OL4 lights up
UL4 flashes
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues (warning is output).
UL3 flashes UL4 flashes
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output is stopped upon detection.
UL3 lights up UL4 lights up
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon detection. UL3 lights up UL4 lights up
6
6-
41
Timing Charts
show the timing charts for over torque and under torque detection.
Motor current (output torque)
L6-02 or L6-05
Over torque detection 1 NO or over torque detection 2 NO
L6-03 or
L6-06
L6-03 or
L6-06
*Overtorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output current (or motor rated torque).
Fig 6.15 Overtorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
L6-02 or L6-05
6
Under torque detection 1 NO or under torque detection 2 NO
L6-03 or
L6-06
L6-03 or
L6-06
*Undertorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output current (or motor rated torque).
Fig 6.16 Undertorque Detection
Car Stuck Detection (OL3, Using the Overtorque detection)
The Over torque detection function can be used to detect a stuck car. The torque detection function 1 can be used for this. Therefore a digital output has to be set to “Over torque detection 1” (H2- = B or 17). Using this with the factory settings a car stuck is detected (output is switched) when the torque/current is higher than
150% for 10 sec. The level can be adjusted in L6-02, the time in L6-03. The output is switched of and an OL3
)
DC Injection/ zero servo speed
Inverter enable (D/I)
Up/Down (D/I)
Selected Speed (D/I)
Fault
Torque is higher than L6-02 detect. time
L6-03
Fig 6.17 Car Stuck fault detection
6-
42
Limiting the Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)
This function allows limitation of motor shaft torque independently for each of the four quadrants. The torque limit can be set as a fixed value using parameters or as a variable value using an analog input. The torque limit function can be used with Open Loop Vector and Closed Loop Vector control only.
Related Parameters
Parameter No.
Name
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04
L7-06
L7-07
Forward drive torque limit
Reverse drive torque limit
Forward regenerative torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Torque limit integral time constant
Torque limit integral operation during accel./ decel. selection
* A setting value of 100% is equal to the motor rated torque.
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)
Factory Setting
Change during Operation
V/f
300%*
300%*
300%*
300%*
200 ms
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
-
-
-
-
-
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
A
A
-
A -
Set
Value
30 During torque limit
Function
V/f
No
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes
Setting the Torque Limit Using Parameters
Using L7-01 to L7-04, four torque limits in the following directions can be set individually: Forward drive,
reverse drive, forward regenerative and reverse regenerative (see
)
Output Torque
L7-01
L7-04
Reverse
Regenerative
Forward
Drive
Output Speed
Reverse
Drive
Forward
Regenerative
L7-03
L7-02
Fig 6.18 Torque Limit Parameters
Using a Digital Output to Signalize Operation at the Torque Limit
If a multifunction output is set to this function (H2-01 to H2-03 is set to “30”), the output is switched ON when the motor output torque reaches one of the torque limits.
6
6-
43
Adjusting the Torque Limit Integral Time (L7-06)
In Open Loop Vector control, during constant speed the limit function works with an integral control part (during acceleration and deceleration just a P-control is used). Normally there is no need to change this setting.
•
•
Increase the setting if vibrations or short cycle oscillations occur when the motor is running at the set torque limit
Decrease the setting if long cycle oscillations occur when the motor is running at the set torque limit.
Enabling the Torque Limit Integral Operation during Accel./Decel. (L7-07)
In Open Loop Vector control an integral operation can be applied to the torque limit function (P-control is standard). This improves the torque limit responsiveness and smoothes the torque limit operation. To enable the integral operation set parameter L7-07 to 1. The integral time set in parameter L7-07 is used.
Setting Precautions
•
•
When the output torque reaches the torque limit, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled to prevent the output torque from exceeding the torque limit. The torque limit has the priority.
The torque limit accuracy is ±5% at an output frequency of 10 Hz or above. When output frequency is lower than 10 Hz, the accuracy is lower.
6
Motor Overload Protection
The motor can be protected from overload using the built-in electronic thermal overload relay function.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
E2-01
E4-01
E5-02
L1-01
L1-02
Motor 1 rated current
Motor 2 rated current
PM Motor rated current
Motor protection selection
Motor protection time constant
7.00 A
*1
7.00 A
7.31 A
1
1.0 min
No
No
No
No
No
*1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The given value is for a 400 V Class Inverter with 3.7 kW.)
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
-
-
A
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
1F
Function
V/f
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level) Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes
Setting the Motor Rated Current (E2-01, E4-01 or E5-02))
Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in parameters E2-01 (for motor 1), E4-01 (for motor 2) or
E5-02 (PM motor). This set value is the base current for the internal thermal overload calculation.
6-
44
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics (L1-01)
Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the used motor.
As the motors thermal behavior depends on the motor type, the thermal motor protection characteristics must be properly selected.
Set L1-01 to:
0: to disable the thermal motor protection function.
1: to enable the thermal motor protection for a fan cooled general purpose motor (self-cooled).
2: to enable the thermal motor protection for an inverter motor (externally cooled).
3: to enable the thermal motor protection for a special vector motor (externally cooled).
5: to enable the thermal motor protection for a permanent magnet motor
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time (L1-02)
The motor protection operation time is the time for that the motor can handle a 150% overload when it was running with the rated load before (i.e. operating temperature was reached before applying the 150% overload). Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02. The factory setting is 60 sec.
shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time (L1-02 =
1.0 min., operation at 50 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Operation time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)
E2-01 is set to 100%
Fig 6.19 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting a Motor Overload Pre-Alarm
If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to a value different from 0) and H2-01 to
H2-03 (output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to 1F (motor overload OL1 prealarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be output at the selected terminals. If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
6
6-
45
Output Current Observation
The inverter can observe the output current and thereby detect e.g a wrong motor contactor sequence or bad motor connection. There are two observation functions, one for the start and one during run.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
S1-14
S1-15
SE2 detection time
SE3 detection time
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
200 ms
200 ms
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
-
SE2 fault (SE2, Current observation at start)
The current is measured for the time S1-06 + S1-14 (Brake open delay plus SE2 detection time) after the Up/
Down command input. If it is/falls below 25% of the motor no-load current (E2-03) a SE2 fault is output.
S1-06 + S1-14 must be smaller than S1-04 (DC injection at start).
SE3 fault (SE3, Current observation during Run)
When the acceleration is started (DC injection/Zero Speed time S1-04 after the Up/Down command input), the inverter observes the output current continuously. If it falls below 25% of the motor no-load current (E2-03) a
SE3 fault is output.
6
Over Acceleration Detection (“DV6” Fault Detection)
Using this function an over acceleration of the car caused by too high load or wrong settings can be detected.
The function works in Closed Loop Vector for PM motors only (A1-02 = 6). If an over acceleration is detected, the inverter stops and a “DV6” fault is displayed.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
S3-16
S3-17
S3-18
Name
Over acceleration detection level
Over acceleration time constant
Over acceleration detection method
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1.5 m/s²
0.05 sec.
0
No
No
No
V/f
-
-
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
-
-
-
-
-
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
A
Adjusting the Over Acceleration Detection
Over acceleration is detected when the acceleration of the car exceeds the value set in S3-16 for longer than the time set in S3-17. The setting of parameter S3-18 decides the over acceleration is always activate if the power supply is on (S3-16 = 0) or only during run (S3-16 = 1).
Setting parameter S3-16 to 0.0 m/s² disables the over acceleration detection.
IMPORTANT
It is imperative to set up the parameters S3-13, S3-14 and S3-15 (traction sheave diameter, roping and gear ratio) in order to make this function working properly!
6-
46
Inverter Protection
Inverter Overheat Protection
The Inverter is protected against overheating using a thermistor that detects the heatsink temperature.
When the overheat temperature level is reached the inverter output is switched off.
To prevent a sudden and unexpected stop of the inverter due to an over temperature, an overheat pre-alarm can be output. The temperature level for that pre-alarm can be set in parameter L8-02. Using parameter L8-03 the inverter operation when an over temperature occurs can be selected.
If a multifunction output is set to this function the output is switched ON when the heatsink temperature exceeds the overheat pre-alarm level set in L8-02.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
L8-02
L8-03
Overheat pre-alarm level
Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm operation selection
*1. The factory setting depends on the inverter capacity.
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
95
°C
*1
3
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A A A
Multifunction Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set Value
20 Inverter overheat (OH)
Function
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes
6
Input Open Phase Protection
*
This function detects an open input phase by observing the DC bus voltage ripple level.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L8-05
Name
Input open-phase protection selection
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1 No
V/f
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
The factory setting is enabled. It is not recommended to disable this function.
* This function is not available in software version VSL701034 and higher.
6-
47
Output Open Phase Detection
This function detects an open output phase by comparing the output current value of each phase with the output open phase detection level (5% of inverter rated current). The detection does not work when the output frequency is below 2% of the base frequency.
Three settings are available:
•
L8-07=0, no output open phase detection
•
•
L8-07=1, the loss of one phase is detected only
L8-07=2, the loss of 2 or 3 phases is detected as well
The detection delay time can be set in parameter L8-20.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L8-07
L8-20
Name
Output open-phase detection selection
Output phase loss detection time
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
2
0.2 sec
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
6
Ground Fault Detection
This function detects the earth leakage current by calculating the sum of the three output currents. Normally it should be 0. If the earth leakage current gets too high, the inverter output is switched off and a GF fault is shown on the display. The fault contact is activated.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L8-09 Ground detection selection
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1 No
V/f
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
Precautions
•
•
It is not recommended to disable this function.
A Ground Fault can also be detected if the contactors at the inverter output are opened when the output is still active. Therefore, to prevent false Ground Fault detection check the sequence and make sure, that the output is switched of or base blocked before opening the contactors.
6-
48
Cooling Fan Control
This function controls the fan which is mounted to the inverters heatsink.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L8-10
L8-11
Name
Cooling fan control selection
Cooling fan control delay time
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0
60 s
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
Selecting the Cooling Fan Control
Using parameter L8-10 two modes can be selected:
0: The fan is ON only when the inverter output is ON, i.e. a voltage is output. This is the factory setting. The turn OFF delay time for the fan can be set in parameter L8-11. After a stop command the inverter waits for this time before switching OFF the cooling fan. The factory setting is 60 sec.
1. The fan is ON whenever the inverter power supply is switched ON.
Setting the Ambient Temperature
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A L8-12 Ambient Temperature 45° C No A
At high ambient temperatures an output current derating has to be considered. The derating depends on the
ambient temperature. The derating curve is shown in
. To ensure a safe inverter protection at high ambient temperatures, always set parameter L8-15 to the actual ambient temperature.
10 0
8 0
6 0
4 0
2 0
0
0 10 2 0 3 0 4 0
Temperature (°C)
50 6 0
Fig 6.20 Ambient Temperature Derating Curve
6
6-
49
Input Terminal Functions
The digital multifunction inputs can be set to several functions using the H1-01 to H1-05 parameters (terminal
S3 to S7 function selection). The following section describes the input functions not mentioned in any other section.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
Name
Terminal S3 function selection
Terminal S4 function selection
Terminal S5 function selection
Terminal S6 function selection
Terminal S7 function selection
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
80
84
81
83
F
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
A
Close d Loop
Vector
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6
Disable the Inverter Output (Baseblock)
Using a baseblock command the inverter output can be cut immediately. There are two baseblock functions available, a hardware baseblock and a software baseblock.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
S3-12 Baseblock restart selection
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 No
V/f
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
A
Close d Loop
Vector
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
Multifunction Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
Function
8 External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
V/f
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
Open Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector (PM)
Yes
Yes
Hardware Baseblock
When hardware baseblock is activated, the power supply of the IGBT driver circuit is cut off and the motor starts to coast. To use this baseblock function the digital input S8 must be used. The input is a NC input, i.e. if terminal S8 is open, the inverter is base block condition.
Software Baseblock
When software baseblock is used, the inverter output is cut by a software function. To use this baseblock function one of the digital inputs must be set to baseblock, i.e. one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) must be set to 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC). The input can be used with a NC as well as with a NO contact.
Baseblock Restart Behavior
If baseblock is activated, the inverter output is immediately stopped. Using parameter S1-12 it can be selected, whether the Up/Down command input has to be cycled to restart when the baseblock is disabled or not.
6-
50
•
If S1-12 = 0 the Up/Down command has to be cycled.
Up/Down
Baseblock
OFF ON
ON
OFF
S1-16 +
S1-04
S1-16 +
S1-04
Output frequency
During Run 1 Output
During Run 2 Output
OFF ON
OFF
ON
•
If S1-12=1 the Up/Down command must not be cycled. The inverter automatically restarts when baseblock is deactivated and the Up/Down command is still active.
Up/Down
Baseblock
OFF ON
ON
OFF
S1-16 +
S1-04
S1-16 +
S1-04
Output frequency
During Run 1 Output
During Run 2 Output
OFF ON
OFF
ON
Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors (External Fault Function)
Set
Value
24
25
26
20
21
22
23
The external fault function activates the fault contact output and stops the Inverter operation. Using this function the inverter operation can be stopped by the break down of peripheral devices or other external errors. The digital operator will display EFx (External fault [input terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the number of the terminal at which the external fault signal is input. For example, if an external fault signal is input to terminal
S3, EF3 will be displayed.
To use the external fault function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection).
Select the set value for H1-01 to H1-05 by a combination of any of the following three conditions.
•
Signal input level from peripheral devices
•
•
External fault detection method
Operation after external fault detection
The following table shows the relationship between the external fault conditions and the set value in H1-.
Input Level
(See Note 1.)
NO Contact NC Contact
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
-
Error Detection Method
(See Note 2.)
Constant
Detection
Detection
During Operation
Yes -
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Operation During Error Detection
Decelerate to Stop
(Error)
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Coast to
Stop (Error)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
Emergency
Stop (Error)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Continue
Operation
(Warning)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6
6-
51
Set
Value
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
27
28
29
2A
-
-
-
-
Input Level
(See Note 1.)
NO Contact
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NC Contact
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
Error Detection Method
(See Note 2.)
Constant
Detection
Detection
During Operation
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Decelerate to Stop
(Error)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operation During Error Detection
Coast to
Stop (Error)
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Emergency
Stop (Error)
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
* 1. Sets the input level at which errors are detected. (NO contact: External error when ON; NC contact: External error when OFF).
* 2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.
Continue
Operation
(Warning)
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
6
Using the Timer Function
The multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S7 can be used as a timer function input and the multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 can be used as a timer function output.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b4-01 b4-02
Name
Timer function ON-delay time
Timer function OFF-delay time
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 s
0.0 s
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
Function
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes 18 Timer function input
Multifunction Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
12
Function
Timer function output
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes
6-
52
Setting Example
When the timer function input is ON for longer than b4-01, the timer output function is turned ON. When the timer function input is OFF for longer than b4-02, the timer output function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.
Timer function input
Timer function output
Fig 6.21 Timer Function Operation Example
Motor Contactor Answer Back Detection
The motor contactors can be observed using the motor contactor answer back function. Therefore an auxiliary contact of the motor contactors must be connected to a digital input which is set to for this function
(H1-=86). If the contactor close command is set and no answer back signal comes from the contactor, the inverter detects a SE1 fault (see below). Parameter S1-28 selects if the detection is enabled or disabled and whether the SE1 fault is reset automatically or if has to be reset manually.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
S1-28
Selects how a SE1 fault is reset.
0: Manual Reset
1: Automatic reset at stop
2: No SE1 detection
0 No A A A A
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
86
Function
Motor contactor answer back
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop ´
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes
6
6-
53
SE1 fault (SE1:Contactor Feed-back Faults)
There are 3 possible fault conditions.
Case 1: The motor contactor was closed (Contactor feedback input was on) before the contactor close
command was output.
Case 2: The motor contactor cannot be closed within the contactor close delay time.
Case 3: The motor contactor is opened during inverter run.
Case 4: The contactor confirmation input was enabled before the contactor close output was set.
DC Injection/
Zero Servo
Speed
Run Delay
Up/DownSpeed
Inverter enable (D/I)
Speed Selection
Contactor Control (D/O)
Contactor confirmation (D/I)
Case 1
Case 2
Case 3
Case 4
6
Changing the PG direction
A digital input can be used to change over the PG feedback signal direction. Therefore one of the parameters
H1- must be set to 89.
The PG direction is clockwise (CW) when the input is open and counterclockwise (CCW) when the input is closed. The parameter F1-05 has no effect if this function is activated.
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
89
Function
PG direction change over
V/f
No
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
No
Closed
Loop ´
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Yes
6-
54
Motor 2 Selection
If a digital input is set to “Motor 2 selection” (H1- = 16), this input can be used to switch over between motor 1 and motor 2 settings (E1/E2- and E3/E4-). A digital output can be used to monitor the selection (H2- = 1C).
If motor 2 is selected, the speed set in d1-19 will be the speed reference. d1-19 has priority over all speed inputs except the service speed input.
The output signal sequence (brake control, contactor etc.) is the same as for motor 1.
This function is not available for Closed Loop Vector for PM motors.
If motor 2 is selected, the brake sequence is active and rescue operation can be performed.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d1-19
Name
Motor 2 speed reference
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.00 Hz No
V/f
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector for PM
A A -
Set by
Autotuning
No
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
16
Function
Motor 2 selection (OFF: motor 1, ON: motor 2)
V/f
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
A
Closed
Loop ´
Vector
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
6
6-
55
6
Output Terminal Functions
The digital multifunction outputs can be set to several functions using the H2-01 to H2-03 parameters (terminal M1 to M6 function selection). These functions are described in the following section.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
H2-01
H2-02
H2-03
Name
Terminal M1-M2 function selection
Terminal M3-M4 function selection
Terminal M5-M6 function selection
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0
1
2
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
A
During Run (Setting: 0) and During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
During Run (Setting: 0)
OFF
ON
The Run command is OFF and there is not output voltage.
The Run command is ON or a voltage is being output.
During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
OFF
ON
The inverter is not outputting a frequency. (Baseblock, DC injection braking or stopped)
The inverter is outputting a frequency.
These outputs can be used to indicate the inverter’s operating status.
Run
Baseblock
OFF ON
ON
OFF
DC Inj DC Inj
Output frequency
During Run 1 Output
During Run 2 Output
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Fig 6.22 Timing Chart for “During RUN” Output
Zero Speed (Setting: 1)
Output
Frequency
Zero Speed Level*
OFF
ON
Zero Speed
Output
OFF
ON
Fig 6.23 Timing Chart for Zero-speed
The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level*.
The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level*.
* The Zero Speed Level depends on the control mode. It is 0.1 Hz for Closed Loop Vector, 0.5 Hz for Open Loop Vector and 1.2 Hz for V/f control.
6-
56
Inverter Operation Ready (Setting: 6)
If a multifunction output is set to this function, the output is switched ON when the initialisation of the inverter at startup has been finished without any faults.
During DC Bus Undervoltage (Setting: 7)
If a multifunction output is set to this function, the output is switched ON as long as a DC bus under voltage is detected.
During Baseblock (Setting: 8)
If a multifunction output is set to this function, the output is switched ON as long as the inverter output is base blocked.
Frequency Reference Source Selection (Setting: 9)
If a multifunction output is set to this function, the output is ON when the digital operator is selected as frequency reference source. If any other frequency reference is selected the output is switched OFF.
Run Command Selection Status (Setting: A)
If a multifunction output is set to this function, the output is switched ON when the digital operator is selected as RUN command source. If any other RUN command source is selected the output is switched OFF.
Fault Output (Setting: E)
If a multifunction output is set to this function, the output is switched ON when any fault different from
CPF00 and CPF01 occurs. The output is also not switched at minor faults. (Refer to
pp. for a fault list.)
Minor Fault Output (Setting: 10)
If a multifunction output is set to this function, the output is switched ON when a minor fault occurs (refer to
Fault Reset Command Active (Setting: 11)
If a multifunction output is set to this function, the output is switched ON as long as a fault reset command is input at one of the digital inputs.
Timer Function Output (Setting: 12)
page 6-52, Using the Timer Function
During Reverse Run (Setting: 1A)
If a multifunction output is set to this function, the output is switched ON whenever a RUN command in reverse direction is active (also during DC injection and base block) It is OFF when a forward RUN is input.
During Base Block 2 (Setting: 1B)
If a multifunction output set to this function is switched OFF as long as a Baseblock command is input.
Motor 2 selected (Setting: 1C)
If a multifunction output is set to this function, the output is switched OFF when motor 1 is selected and switched ON if motor 2 is selected.
6
6-
57
6
During Regenerative Operation (Setting: 1D)
If a multifunction output is set to this function, the output is switched ON when the motor works regenerative, i.e. when energy is fed back to the inverter.
Restart Enabled (Setting: 1E)
Refer to
page 6-81, Automatic Fault Reset
During Torque Limit (Setting: 30)
Refer to
page 6-43, Limiting the Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)
.
Zero Servo End (Setting: 33)
Refer to
page 6-16, Zero Speed Control / Zero Servo (position lock)
.
Brake Release Command (Setting: 40)
This output signal can be used to control the brake. The output is closed when the brake shall be opened. Refer also to
Motor Contactor Control Command (Setting: 41)
This output can be used to control the motor contactors. The output is closed when the contactors shall be closed. Refer also to
Cooling Fan Running (Setting: 38)
This output can be used to indicate the inverters heatsink cooling fan operation. The output is on if the cooling fan(s) is (are) on.
Speed Detection at deceleration (Door Zone) (Setting:42)
This output can be used to detect if the car is in the door zone. The detection is speed dependent.
OFF
ON
V/f control and Open Loop Vector control
The output frequency is lower than S1-27 during deceleration
The output frequency is higher than S1-27 during deceleration
Closed Loop Vector control
The motor speed is lower than S1-27 during deceleration
The motor speed is higher than S1-27 during deceleration
If the Up/Down command is released, this output is switched OFF.
Not Zero Speed (Setting:43)
This function can be used for indicating the inverse condition of the Zero speed status.
OFF
ON
The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level.
The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level.
Light Load Search End (Setting: 44/45)
Refer to
page 6-80, Light Load Direction Detection
Base Block Monitor 1 and 2 (Setting: 46/47)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function, the output is switched if both base block inputs (BB and BB1) are enabled.
6-
58
Motor and V/f Pattern Setup
The L7 inverter supports 2 motor settings (main motor and door motor, E2/E4- parameters) for V/f control, Open Loop Vector and Closed Loop Vector for IM. The active motor setup can be selected by a digital input.
Closed Loop Vector Control for PM supports 1 motor setting (main motor, E5- parameters) only.
Setting Motor Parameters for Induction Motors (Motor 1 and 2)
In order to achieve the maximum performance the V/f pattern and the motor data must be set correctly.
The number of motor parameters which can be set, depend on the selected control mode.
In the vector control methods the motor parameters can be set automatically by using the autotuning function
Up/Down command
Base Block Input
(Term BB & BB1)
BB Monitor 1
BB Monitor 2
).
However, if autotuning does not complete normally, the parameters must be set manually like described below.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name d1-19
E1-01
E1-13
E2-01/
E4-01
E2-02
E4-02
E2-03/
E4-03
E1-07/
E3-05
E1-08/
E3-06
E1-09/
E3-07
E1-10/
E3-08
E3-01
E1-04/
E3-02
E1-05/
E3-03
E1-06/
E3-04
Motor 2 speed reference
Input voltage setting
Motor 2 control mode selection
Max. output frequency (FMAX)
Max. voltage (VMAX)
Base frequency (FA)
Mid. output frequency (FB)
Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
Base voltage (VBASE)
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
0.00 Hz
400 V
*1
0
50.0 Hz
380.0 V
*1
50.0 Hz
3.0 Hz
*1
37.3 V
*1,*2
0.5 Hz
*2
19.4 V
*1,*2
0.0 V
7.00 A
*3
2.70 Hz
*3
2.30 A
*3
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
Q/
A
Q/
A
Q/
A
A
Q/
A
A
A
Q/
A
Q/
A
Q/
A
A
Q
A
Q/
A
Q/
A
Q/
A
A
Q/
A
A
A
Q/
A
Q/
A
Q/
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
Closed
Loop
Vector for PM
-
Set by
Autotuning
No
Q Q Q No
A
Q/
A
Q/
A
Q/
A
A
Q/
A
Q/
A
Q/
A
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
A
-
-
Q/
A
A
-
A
-
Q
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No A A A Yes
6
6-
59
6
Parameter
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
E2-08
E2-09
E2-10
E2-11/
E4-07
E2-12
F1-01
E2-04/
E4-04
E2-05/
E2-05
E2-06/
E4-06
E2-07
Number of motor poles (Number of poles)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
Motor mechanical losses
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Motor rated output power
Motor iron saturation coefficient 3
PG constant
4 poles
3.333 Ω
19.3%
0.50
0.75
0.0%
*3
130 W
*3
3.70 kW
1.30
1024
*3
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
-
A
-
-
A
Q/
A
-
-
-
-
A
A
*1. The value is valid for a 400V, 3.7kW inverter
*2. The value depends on the control mode. The given value is valid if V/f control is selected.
*3. All factory-set parameters are for a Yaskawa standard 4-pole motor.
The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 400 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW).
*4. Rotating tuning only
A
-
Q/
A
A
-
A
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector for PM
Q/
A
Q/
A
-
Set by
Autotuning
Yes
A
A
A
-
Q/
A
A
A
A
Q
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Q
Yes
Yes
Yes
*4
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
16
Function
Motor 2 selection (OFF: Motor 1, ON: Motor 2)
V/f
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop ´
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
Multi-function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
Function
V/f
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop ´
Vector
A A 1C Motor selection (OFF: Motor 1, ON: Motor 2) A
Setting Inverter Input Voltage (E1-01)
Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 so that it matches the power supply voltage.
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
-
6-
60
Setting the V/f Pattern
If E1-03 is set to F, the V/f pattern can be set individually
using the parameters E1-04 to E1-10 (see
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Fig 6.24 V/f pattern setting
INFO
To set the V/f characteristics linear, set E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
Setting Precautions
When a user-defined V/f pattern is used, consider the following points:
•
•
By changing the control method, the parameters E1-07 to E1-10 are changed to the factory settings for the selected control method.
Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Manual Setting of the Motor Parameters
Motor Rated Current Setting (E2-01, E4-01)
Set E2-01 to the rated current value as written on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip Setting (E2-02, E4-02)
Set E2-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate.
Motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency (Hz) –
Motor No-Load Current Setting (E2-03, E4-03)
Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current at the rated voltage and rated frequency. Normally, the motor no-load current is not written on the motor nameplate. The following formula can be taken as an indication:
I
0
= sin
( acos cos ϕ )
Number of Motor Poles Setting (E2-04, E4-04)
E2-04 is displayed only when Closed Loop Vector control method is selected. Set the number of motor poles as written on the motor nameplate.
6
6-
61
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting (E2-05, E4-05)
E2-05 is set automatically during motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When it can not be performed for any reason, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. The set value should be calculate the motor test report line-to-line resistance value and the following formula:
•
•
•
E-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (
Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
B-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (
Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
F-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (
Ω) at 115°C of test report] × 0.87 (Ω)
Motor Leak Inductance Setting (E2-06, E4-06)
Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance in E2-06 as a percentage of the motor rated voltage. If the inductance is not written on the motor nameplate, consult the motor manufacturer.
Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 and 2 Settings (E2-07/08)
E2-07 and E2-08 are set automatically during rotating autotuning.
Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting (E2-10)
E2-10 is displayed only in V/f control method and can be set to increase the torque compensation accuracy.
Motor Setting 1/2 Switch Over
Refer to
.
6
Setting Motor Parameters for PM Motors
The autotuning with rotating motor can be used to let the inverter measure the voltage constant, the line-to-line resistance and the q- and d-axis inductances and the encoder offset (refer to
page 4-7, Autotuning Procedure with PM Motors
. It can be performed only if the motor can rotate freely (removed ropes and open brake). If the autotuning can not be performed for any reason, the following motor parameters must be set manually.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
E5-03
E5-04
E5-05
E5-06
E2-07
E5-09
E1-01
E1-04
E1-06
E1-09
E1-13
E5-02
Input voltage setting
Max. output frequency (FMAX)
Base frequency (FA)
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
Base voltage (VBASE)
Motor rated power
Motor rated current
Number of motor poles
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor d-axis inductance
Motor q-axis inductance
Motor voltage constant
400 V
*1
150 rpm
150 rpm
0 rpm
3.7kW
*2
4 poles
1.326 Ω
26.08 mH
478.6 mV
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*1. The given value is valid for 400V inverters.
*2. The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 400 V Class Inverter for 3.7 kW).
-
-
-
-
-
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
Q
A
-
Q
Q
A
Q
A
Set by
Autotuning
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-
62
Motor Rated Power (E5-02)
Set E5-02 to the rated power value as written on the motor nameplate or in the motor data sheet.
Motor Rated Current (E5-03)
Set E5-03 to the motor rated current as written on the motor nameplate or in the motor data sheet.
Number of Motor Poles Setting (E5-04)
Set the number of motor poles as written on the motor nameplate or in the motor data sheet.
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting (E5-05)
Set the motor line-to-line resistance as written in the motor data sheet. Alternatively a measured value can be entered.
Motor d- and q-Axis Inductance (E5-06, E5-07)
Set the q-axis and d-axis inductance value in mH as written on the nameplate or the motor data sheet.
Motor Voltage Constant (E5-09)
Set the motor voltage constant k e
is set in mV as written on the nameplate or the motor data sheet.
Motor Rotation Direction Change
If the motor operates in the wrong direction with an Up or Down command, the direction can be changed by parameter S3-08.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
F1-05
S3-08
Name
Encoder direction change
Output phase order
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0
No
No
V/f
No
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
A
Q
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
Q
A
Change Motor Direction in V/f or Open Loop Vector Control
To change the motor rotation direction without changing the wiring, parameter S3-08 can be changed.
•
If S3-08 = 0 the output phase order will be U-V-W
•
If S3-08 = 1 the output phase order will be U-W-V
Change Motor Direction in Closed Loop Vector Control
If Closed Loop Vector Control for IM or PM is used, besides changing parameter S3-08 the encoder direction has to be changed by setting F1-05.
6
IMPORTANT
If Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors is used, always perform an encoder offset tuning after parameter S3-08 of F1-05 has been changed.
6-
63
Digital Operator/LED Monitor Functions
6
Setting Digital Operator/LED Monitor Functions
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
o1-01 o1-02
Name
Monitor selection
Monitor selection after power up o1-03 Frequency units of reference setting and monitor o1-04 Setting unit for frequency reference related parameters i o1-05 o2-02 o2-03 o2-04 o2-05 o2-06 o2-07 o2-08 o2-09 o2-10 o2-12 o2-15
S3-13
S3-14
S3-15
LCD Display contrast
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
User parameter initial value
Inverter kVA selection
Frequency reference setting method selection
Operation selection when digital operator/LED Monitor is disconnected
Cumulative operation time setting
Cumulative operation time selection
Initialize Mode
Fan operation time setting
Fault trace initialize
“Number of Travels” monitor initialize
Traction sheave diameter
Roping ratio
Gear ratio
*1. Depends on the inverter capacity
Monitor Selection (o1-01)
Using parameter o1-01 the third monitor item that is displayed in drive mode can be selected. This function has no effect on the LCD-operator (JVOP-160-OY).
Monitor Display when the Power Supply is Turned ON (o1-02)
The parameter o1-02 selects the monitor item (U1-), which is to be displayed in the first line on the Digital Operator when the power supply is turned ON.
Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units (o1-03)
Parameter o1-03 sets the display units of some frequency/speed related parameters on the Digital Operator.
The setting in o1-03 affects the display units of the following monitor items:
•
•
•
U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
U1-02 (Output Frequency)
U1-05 (Motor Speed)
6-
64
•
•
U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start) d1-01 to d1-17 (Frequency references)
Display in Hz
Set o1-03 to “0” to change the display unit of the above mentioned parameters to Hz.
Display in%
Set o1-03 to “1” to change the display unit for the above mentioned parameters to % related to the maximal frequency/speed set in parameter E1-04.
Display in rpm
Set o1-03 to the number of poles of the used motor to display the mentioned parameters in rpm.
Display in m/s
Set o1-03 to 3 to enable the display in m/s. The inverter uses the parameters S3-13 (traction sheave diameter),
S3-14 (roping ratio) and S3-15 (gear ratio) to calculate the m/s display. To achieve an accurate display value these parameters must be set accurately.
Changing the Units for Frequency Parameters Related to V/f settings (o1-04)
Using parameter o1-04 the unit of the frequency parameters for the V/f setting can be set. If o1-04 is set to 0 the unit is “Hz”. If o1-04 is set to 1 it is “rpm”. The parameter is available in Closed Loop Vector control only.
Changing the Display Contrast (o1-05)
Using o1-05 the contrast of the LCD display on the digital operator can be raised or lowered. Lowering the o1-05 value decreases the contrast and vice versa.
Enable/Disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key (o2-01)
Set o2-01 to 1 to enable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator.
If the key is enabled, the frequency reference source and the RUN command source can be switched over between LOCAL (Operator) and REMOTE (b1-01/02 setting).
Disabling the STOP Key (o2-02)
This parameter is used to set if the STOP key on the operator is active during remote control (b1-02
≠ 0) or not.
If o2-02 is set to 1, a STOP command from the operators STOP key is accepted. If o2-02 is set to 0 it is disregarded.
Saving User Parameters (o2-03)
The Inverter parameter setting values can be saved as user-set parameter initial values by setting parameter o2-
03 to 1.
To initialize the inverter using the user-set initial values, set parameter A1-03 to 1110. To clear the user-set initial values set o2-03 to 2.
Changing the Inverter Capacity Setting (o2-04)
The inverter capacity setting can be set using parameter o2-04. Refer to
page 5-63, Factory Settings Changing with Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
to see parameters that depend on this setting.
Normally it is not necessary to change this setting, unless the control card has been changed.
6
6-
65
6
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key (o2-05)
This function is active when frequency references are input from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1, the selected frequency reference can be incremented and decremented the UP and DOWN keys without using the Enter key. The function work only if parameter b1-01 is set to 0.
Operation Selection when the Digital Operator/LED Monitor is Disconnected (o2-06)
This function selects the operation when the digital operator/LED Monitor gets disconnected when a RUN command is active.
If o2-06 is set to 0 the operation is continued.
If o2-06 is set to 1 the output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop. The fault contact is operated. When the operator is reconnected an OPR (Operator disconnected) is shown.
Cumulative Operation Time (o2-07 and o2-08)
The inverter has a function that counts the operation time of the inverter cumulatively.
Using parameter o2-07 the accumulated operation time can be changed, e.g. after a replacement of the control board. If parameter o2-08 is set to 0, the inverter accumulates the time, whenever the power supply is switched
ON. If o2-08 is set to 1, the time when a RUN command is active is counted only. The factory setting is 0.
Cooling Fan Operation Time (o2-10)
This function counts the operating time of the inverter mounted fan cumulatively.
Using parameter o2-10 the counter can be reset, e.g. when the fan has been replaced.
Fault Trace Initialize (o2-12)
This function can be used to initialize the fault trace by setting parameter o2-12 to 1.
“Number of Travels” counter Initialize (o2-15)
Using this parameter the lift operation counter monitor (U1-55) can be initialized.
Copying Parameters (JVOP-160-OY only)
The following three digital operator functions can be used in order to copy/verify parameter settings:
•
Store Inverter parameter set values in the Digital Operator by setting o3-01 to 1 (READ)
•
•
Write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter by setting o3-01 to 2 (COPY)
Compare parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter parameters settings by setting o3-01 to 3 (VERIFY)
The data saved in the operator can be protected from overwriting by setting parameter o3-02 to 0. In this case a READ command can not be executed. If it is nevertheless still done, “PrE” will be displayed at the operator.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
o3-01 o3-02
Copy function selection
Read permitted selection
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0
0
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
6-
66
Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator use the following method.
Step
No.
Explanation
1 Press the Menu Key and select advanced programming mode.
Digital Operator Display
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
2 Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
3
Press the Increment and Decrement Key until parameter o3-01 is displayed (Copy Function
Selection).
4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the constants setting display.
5 Change the set value to 1 using the Increment Key.
6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The READ function starts.
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
COPY Function o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01=
0
COPY SELECT
*0*
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01=
1
*0*
INV OP READ
-ADV-
READ
INV OP READING
7 If the READ function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator.
-ADV-
READ
READ COMPLETE
8 The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3 01 =0
COPY SELECT
*0*
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Refer to
page 7-16, Digital Operator Copy Function Faults
for corrective actions.
Writing Parameter Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, use the following method.
Step
No.
Explanation Digital Operator Display
1 Press the MENU Key and select advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
2 Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
-ADV-
Initialization
A1
- 00 = 1
Select Language
6
6-
67
6
Step
No.
Explanation
3
Press the Increment and Decrement Key until parameter o3-01 is displayed (Copy Function
Selection).
4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the constants setting display.
5 Change the set value to 2 using the Increment Key.
6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The COPY function starts.
Digital Operator Display
-ADV-
COPY Function o3 - 01 = 0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0
*0*
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01= 2
*0*
OP INV WRITE
-ADV-
COPY
OP INV COPYING
7 If the COPY function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator.
-ADV-
COPY
COPY COMPLETE
8 The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3 01 =0
COPY SELECT
*0*
If an error is displayed, set the parameters again. Refer to
page 7-16, Digital Operator Copy Function Faults
for corrective actions.
6-
68
Comparing Inverter Parameters and Digital Operator Parameter Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter parameters and Digital Operator parameter set values, use the following method.
Step
No.
Explanation Digital Operator Display
1 Press the MENU Key and select advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
2 Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
3
Press the Increment and Decrement Key until the parameter o3-01 is displayed (Copy Function Selection).
4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the function setting display.
5 Change the set value to 3 using the Increment Key.
6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The VERIFY function starts.
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00 = 1
Select Language
-ADV-
COPY Function o3
- 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0
*0*
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel o3-01= 3
*0*
OP INV VERIFY
-ADV-
VERIFY
DATA VERIFYING
7 If the VERIFY function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator.
-ADV-
VERIFY
VERIFY COMPLETE
8 The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3 01 = 0
COPY SELECT
*0*
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Refer to
page 7-16, Digital Operator Copy Function Faults
for corrective actions.
Application Precautions
INFO
When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter data and the
Digital
• Inverter product and type
• Software number
• Inverter capacity and voltage class
• Control method
6
6-
69
Prohibiting Overwriting of Parameters
If A1-01 is set to 0, all parameters except A1-01 and A1-04 are write protected, U1-, U2- and U3-
will be displayed. If A1-01 is set to 1, only the parameters A1-01, A1-04 and A2- can be read or written, U1-, U2- and U3- will be displayed. All other parameters will not be displayed.
If one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) is set to 1B (write parameters permitted), parameters can be written from the digital operator when the terminal that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing parameters other than the frequency reference is prohibited.
However, the parameters can be read.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
A1-01 Parameter access level
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
2 Yes
V/f
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
6
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05 and if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, only the settings of parameters A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32 can be modified.
The setting of all parameters except A1-00 can be prohibited using the password function in combination with setting parameter A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
A1-01
A1-04
A1-05
Parameter access level
Password
Password setting
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
2
0
0
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
A
Setting a Password
The password can be set in parameter A1-05. Normally A1-05 is not displayed. To display and modify A1-05 the MENU and Reset key must be pressed together in the A1-04 display.
6-
70
Displaying User-set Parameters Only
The A2 parameters (user-set parameters) and A1-01 (parameter access level) can be used to establish a parameter set that contains only the most important parameters.
Set the number of the parameter to which should appear in the A2- parameters, and then set A1-01 to 1.
The advanced programming mode now allows to read and modify A1-01 to A1-03 and the parameters set in
A2-01 to A2-32 only.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
A2-01 to
A2-32
User setting parameters
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
No A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A A
6
6-
71
PG Option Cards
To have a more precise speed control the inverter can be equipped with a PG option card for the connection of a pulse generator. Three different PG cards can be used, the PG-B2, the PG-X2 and the PG-F2 card. Refer to
page 2-24, Option Card Models and Specifications
6
PG Setup
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
F1-01
F1-05
PG constant
PG rotation
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f i i
1
2
60°
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
1024
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
No
-
-
Q
2048
Q
0
No
-
No
No
No
-
A
No
No
Q
1
A
A
A
F1-06
F1-21
F1-22
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
Absolute encoder resolution
Magnet position offset
Using PG Speed Control Card
There are three types of PG Speed Control Card that can be used in Closed Loop Vector control:
•
PG-B2: A/B-phase pulse input, compatible with open collector outputs.
•
PG-X2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers (RS-422).
•
PG-F2: Hiperface y
/ EnDat encoder feedback.
For the mounting instructions, specifications and connection diagrams refer to
page 2-24, Installing and Wiring Option Cards
IMPORTANT
If Open Loop Vector control for IM is used and a PG-B2/X2 card is installed, the speed detected by the
PG card is displayed in the monitor parameter U1-05. Therefore the PG constant has to be set in parameter F1-01. The direction of the speed detection can be changed by parameter F1-05.
To change the U1-05 value to the internally calculated speed value remove the PG card.
Setting Number of PG Pulses (F1-01)
Set the number of PG (Pulse Generator/Encoder) pulses in pulses per revolution.
If a PG-F2 card is installed, the encoder type must be set in parameter n8-35 before the PG constant is set. The possible set values for F1-01 depend on the n8-35 setting. The following resolutions can be set:
•
•
for Hiperface y
: 1024 for EnDat: 512, 1024, 2048
6-
72
Suit the PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction (F1-05)
Parameter F1-05 can be used to change the encoder signal direction if it is wrong.
•
•
If F1-05 is set to 0 the inverter expects channel A to lead 90° before channel B (Sin-channel leads 90° before Cos-channel on PG-F2 card) if a forward command is applied (FWD means counterclockwise rotation seen from the shaft side).
If F1-05 is set to 1 the inverter expects channel B to lead 90° before channel B (Cos-channel leads 90° before Sin-channel on PG-F2 card) if a forward command is applied.
IMPORTANT
If Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors is used, an encoder offset autotuning must be performed if parameter F1-05 is changed.
Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Division Ratio (F1-06)
This function is enabled only when a PG-B2 speed feedback card is used. Set the division ratio for the PG pulse monitor output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the two lower place digits. The dividing ratio is calculated as follows:
Dividing ratio = (1 + n)/m (Setting range) n: 0 or 1, m: 1 to 32
F1-06 =
n
m
The division ratio can be set within the following range: 1/32
≤ F1-06 ≤ 1. For example, if the division ratio is
1/2 (set value 2), half of the number of pulses from the PG are output at the pulse monitor.
Setting Number of Gear Teeth Between PG and Motor (F1-12 and F1-13)
If there are gears between the motor and PG, the gear ratio can be set using F1-12 and F1-13.
When the number of gear teeth has been set, the number of motor rotations within the Inverter is calculated using the following formula.
No. of motor rotations (r/min.) = No. of input pulses from PG
× 60 / F1-01 × F1-13 (No. of gear teeth on PG side) / F1-12 (No. of gear teeth on motor side)
Setting the Absolute Encoder Resolution (F1-21)
If a Hiperface y
encoder is used, the serial line resolution must be selected by parameter F1-21 according to the encoder data sheet. The possible resolution setting depends on the encoder selection (n8-35=5):
•
•
Hiperface y
: 0, 1 or 2 (16384, 32768, 8192)
EnDat: 2 (fixed to 8192)
Setting the Magnet Position Offset (F1-22)
Parameter F1-22 can be used to set the offset between the magnet and the encoder zero position. The value is
automatically set during the PM motor autotuning or encoder offset auto tuning (refer to
).
6
6-
73
6
Fault Detection
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
F1-02
F1-03
F1-04
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
F1-14
F1-18
F1-19
F1-21
F1-22
F1-24
Name
Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)
Operation selection at overspeed (OS)
Operation selection at deviation (DEV)
Overspeed detection level
Overspeed detection time
Speed deviation detection level
Speed deviation detection time
PG open-circuit detection delay time
DV3 detection selection
DV4 detection selection
Absolute encoder resolution
Magnet position offset
PGO detection Level at stop
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1
1
3
115%
0.0 sec.
10%
0.5 sec.
2.0 s
1
1024
2
60°
20%
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
A
Detecting PG Open Circuit During Run (F1-02 and F1-14)
Parameter F1-02 selects the stopping method when a PG disconnection is detected.
PG open (PGO) is detected only when the inverter is running at least with a frequency reference higher than
1% of the maximum output frequency or above the minimum frequency (E1-09) and the PG feedback signal is missing for the time set in F1-14 or longer.
Detecting Motor Overspeed (F1-03, F1-08 and F1-09)
An overspeed (OS) is detected when the motor speed continues to exceed the set frequency value in F1-08 for a time longer than set in F1-09. After detecting an overspeed (OS), the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-03.
Detecting a Speed Deviation between the Motor and Speed Reference (F1-04, F1-10 and F1-11)
A speed deviation fault is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the speed reference and the actual motor speed) is too large. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected only after a speed agreement
(speed reference and actual motor speed are within the setting range of L4-02) and if a speed deviation higher than the set value in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-04.
Detecting a Wrong Rotation Direction DV3 (F1-18, Closed Loop Vector for PM only)
A DV3 fault indicates a wrong motor rotation direction. It is detected if
•
the speed deviation is higher than 30% and
•
the internal torque reference value and the acceleration have opposite signs
The fault is detected after the time F1-18 x 5 ms.
6-
74
Detecting a Wrong Rotation Direction DV4 (F1-19, Closed Loop Vector for PM only)
A DV4 fault indicates a wrong motor rotation direction. It is detected if
•
the reference direction and the motor rotation direction have opposite signs and
•
the deviation is higher than the value of parameter F1-19 (set in encoder pulses).
Machine Data Copy Function
If a Hiperface y
or an EnDat encoder is used, the motor and encoder data can be saved in the encoder memory and can be read out later, e.g. if a motor has been replaced to an equal type or if the inverter is replaced.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
F1-25
F1-26
Encoder copy selection
Encoder write protection
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0
0
No
No
V/f
No
No
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
No
No
No
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
Saved Parameters
The following parameters are saved in the encoder memory:
• E1-04
• E1-06
• E1-13
• E5-02
• E5-03
• E5-04
• E5-05
Motor maximal speed
Motor rated speed
Motor rated voltage
Motor rated power
Motor rated current
Motor pole number
Motor line-to-line resistance
• E5-06
• E5-07
• E5-09
• F1-01
• F1-05
• F1-21
• F1-22
Motor d axis inductance Ld
Motor q axis inductance Lq
Motor voltage constant Ke
PG pulse constant
PG rotation direction
Absolute encoder selection
Magnet position offset
Saving Parameters Into the Encoder Memory
To save parameters in the encoder memory, the Encoder write protection must be off (F1-26 = 1) and the parameter F1-25 has to be set to 1 (“ERED, INViENC WRITING” is displayed during the save process).
The display of F1-25 automatically returns to 0 when the operation is finished (“ERED, WRITE COM-
PLETE” is displayed). If any fault occurs the fault code will be displayed (refer to
).
Parameters which had been stored in the encoder before will be overwritten.
Read Parameters From the Encoder Memory
To read parameters form the encoder memory the parameter F1-25 must be set to 2. Before reading the parameters make sure, that the correct control mode and encoder type are selected in the parameters A1-02 and n8-35. If parameter n8-35 has to be changed, cycle the power supply after changing it and set parameter F1-25 to 2 afterwards (“ECPY, ENCiINV COPIYING” is displayed during the read process). The display of F1-25 automatically returns to 0 when the operation is finished (“ECPY, COPY COMPLETE” is displayed). If any fault occurs the fault code will be displayed (refer to
page 7-17, Machine Data Copy Function Faults
).
6
6-
75
6
Verify Saved Parameters
To compare the parameters stored in the inverter and encoder the parameter F1-23 must be set to 3 (“EVRFY,
DATA VERIFYING” is displayed during the verify process).
If the data are identically, the display will show “EVRFY, VERIFY COMPLETE”.
If the data do not match, “EVRFY, VERIFY ERROR” will be displayed.
IMPORTANT
In order to perform the WRITE/COPY function:
• The motor must not turn and the drive must be in baseblock condition
• for EnDat the OEM1 area1 of the EEPROM must be available (address 64 to 255)
• for Hiperface y the data field DF#0 must be available.
• A CPF03/24 must not be active.
6-
76
Rescue System
Using rescue operation the car can be moved to the next floor if the power supply fails. In this case the inverter must be supplied by a UPS or a battery and the rescue operation must be enabled by a digital input (H1- =
85). The DC bus voltage during rescue operation has to be set in parameter L2-11. A light load detection function can be used to detect the light load direction for the car evacuation.
Related Parameters.
Parameter
No.
d1-05
L2-11
S3-06
S3-07
S3-10
S3-11
S3-24
Name
Rescue operation speed
DC bus voltage during rescue operation
Light Load Search for rescue operation
Light Load Search time for rescue operation
Light Load Search speed
Rescue operation torque limit
Light load search method
5 Hz
0V
0
1.0 sec.
3.00 Hz
100%
0
Factory setting
Change during operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
A
A
A
A
-
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Setting
85
Function mane
Rescue operation command
V/f
A
Open
Loop
Vector
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
Closed
Loop Vector (PM)
A
Multi-function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Setting
44
45
Function mane
Light load direction output (ON: Forward, OFF: Reverse)
Light load detection status (ON: Ready for detection run, OFF:
Detection in progress)
V/f
A
A
Open
Loop
Vector
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
Closed
Loop Vector (PM)
A
A A
Rescue Operation Power Supply Ratings
The power supply to the DC bus and to the control card during rescue operation must meet the following requirements:
Voltage class
200 V
400 V
DC Bus Power Supply
48 to 300 VDC
96 to 600 VDC
Control Power Supply
280 to 300 VDC
280 to 600 VDC
6
IMPORTANT
When an AC power supply (e.g. a single phase UPS like example 1 or 2 below) is used, make sure that the rectified voltage meets the voltage range above.
6-
77
6
Rescue operation wiring examples
The following diagrams show some wirings examples for rescue operation.
Example 1: 1 Phase, 230 V UPS Power Supply
Wiring
Elevator
Control
System
Inverter
A
N
B2
B1
UPS
1x230
VAC
Contactor Sequence
Contactor B
Contactor A
L1
L2
L3
B
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Power Supply
Control circuit
Rescue Operation
Enable Input
P0
N0
Sx
SC
The contactors must be operated, so that contactor B is always opened, before A is closed. When the rescue operation is finished, the contactor A must be opened, before B is closed.
If the UPS power is weak or Light load detection is not used, it can happen that the inverter trips with a UV2 fault. In this case increase the UPS power, use the light load detection function or use the configuration in example 2.
L1
L2
L3
Example 2: 1 Phase, 230 V UPS Power Supply, Low power UPS or Light Load detection not
used
Wiring
Contactor Sequence
Inverter
N
UPS
1x230
VAC
A
B2
B1
Contactor A
Contactor B
Contactor C
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
B
Rectifier Diode and Capacity
C
Rescue Operation
Enable Input
P0
N0
Sx
SC
Power Supply
Control circuit
The contactors must be operated, so that contactor B is always opened, before A and C are closed. Contactor C can be closed after A but not before. When the rescue operation is disabled, the contactors A and C must be opened, before B is closed.
6-
78
Example 3: Two Batteries, Main battery voltage lower than 280 VDC.
Wiring
Inverter
Contactor Sequence
B2
Contactor B
B1
Contactor A
A
Contactor C
+2
Main
Battery
Main power
L1
L2
L3
B
+
1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Power Supply
Control circuit
P0
Controller
Supply Battery
C
N0
Rescue Operation
Enable Input
Sx
SC
The contactors must be operated, so that contactor B is always opened, before A and C are closed. Contactor C can be closed after A but not before. When the rescue operation is disabled, the contactors A and C must be opened, before B is closed.
Example 4: Main battery voltage higher than 280 VDC.
Wiring
Inverter
B2
B1
A
Contactor Sequence
Contactor B
Contactor A
Main
Battery
Main power
L1
B
L2
L3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
-
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Power Supply
Control circuit
P0
N0
Sx
SC
Rescue Operation
Enable Input
The contactors must be operated, so that contactor B is always opened, before A is closed. When the rescue operation is disabled, the contactor A must be opened, before B is closed.
Rescue Operation Speed
During rescue operation the speed is limited by the battery voltage using the following formula:
•
for the 200 V class:
Rescue Operation Speed Limit =
×
300 V 2
•
for the 400 V class:
Rescue Operation Speed Limit =
×
×
If the rescue speed reference (d1-15) is higher than the rescue operation speed limit, the output frequency is automatically limited to the calculated limit. It prevents a voltage saturation and a possible motor stalling.
Precautions
Because of the possibly low DC bus voltage during rescue operation, the heatsink cooling fans may not work.
A continuous operation under this condition can result in over heat faults and inverter damage.
6
6-
79
6
Torque Limits during Rescue Operation
Depending on the rescue system it might be useful to apply a torque limit. The torque limit for rescue operation can be set in parameter S3-11. It is active only if the rescue operation digital input is set an has no effect to the normal operation.
Light Load Direction Detection
If the light load detection function is enabled (S3-06 is set to 1), the inverter can detect the light load direction for rescue operation. Therefore the elevator is driven with the light load detection speed (S3-10) sequentially in forward and reverse direction for the time set in parameter S3-07. The current/torque is measured in each direction and the values are compared to each other.
•
If the detected light direction is forward, the inverter stops and restarts in the forward direction with the set rescue operation speed. At the restart the light load detection status output (H2-=45) and the light load direction output (H2-=44) are set.
DI Rescue operation
External
Controller Fwd or Rev Run
Torque is measured after speed agree for the time S3-07
FWD
Internal Fwd Run
Internal Rev Run
REV
Car evacuation in forward direction
D/O Light Load Status
D/O Light Load Direction
OFF = Light load detection in progress
ON = Forward direction selected
Fig 6.25 Light Load Direction Sequence - FWD is Light Direction
•
If the detected light load direction is reverse, the inverter continues the operation with the set rescue operation speed. The light load detection status output (H1-=45) is set, the direction output is not changed.
DI Rescue operation
External
Controller Fwd or Rev Run
Torque is measured after speed agree for the time S3-07
FWD
Internal Fwd Run
Internal Rev Run
REV
Car evacuation in reverse direction
D/O Light Load Status
D/O Light Load Direction
OFF = Light load detection in progress
OFF = Reverse direction selected
Fig 6.26 Light Load Direction Sequence - REV is Light Direction
Light Load Direction Detection Method
If parameter S3-24 is set to “0”, the motor current values in Up and Down direction are compared. The direction with the lower current will be taken as light load direction.
If parameter S3-24 is set to “1”, in Open Loop Vector the motor speed values and V/f control the excitation currents value in both directions are compared.
6-
80
Automatic Fault Reset
The inverter can reset faults automatically. The maximum number of resets can be selected as well as the operation mode of the fault relay.
Auto-resetable Fault codes are: UV1, GF, OC, OV, OL2, OL3, OL4, UL3, UL4, PF, LF, SE1, SE2, SE3
Related Constants.
Parameter
No.
L5-01
L5-02
L5-05
Name
Number of restarts
Restart operation selection
UV1 auto reset selection
Factory setting
Change during operation
2
1
0
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
(PM)
A
A
A
Multi-function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Setting
1E Fault restart active
Function name
V/f
A
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop Vector (PM)
A
Working Principle
Whenever a fault occurs, the inverter output is cut and the brake is closed. A fault is output. When the automatic fault reset is enabled, the fault is reset 2 seconds after the Up/Down signal has been removed. The inverter can be restarted. This can be repeated for the number of times set in L5-02. The restart counter is reset when the power supply is switched off.
Fault
DC Injection/
Zero servo
Speed
Up/Down
Brake Open Command
Fault Output
Auto-Reset
The fault is reset 2 sec. After the Up/Down signal has been removed
Fig 6.27 Automatic Fault Reset Sequence
Fault Relay Operation
Parameter L5-02 can be used to enable or disable the fault relay (terminal MA-MB-MC) during the fault retry.
Even if the fault relay is deactivated during the retries (L5-02=0), it is operated after the number of retries set in L5-01 has been reached.
•
•
L5-02 = 1 enabled the fault relay.
L5-02 = 0 disables the fault relay.
6
6-
81
6
Fault Restart Indication
When the fault retry function is used, the inverter tries to reset the fault every 5 ms. If a digital output is programmed for the “Restart enable” function (H2-=1E), the output is set as long as the inverter tries to reset the fault. After a successful fault reset the output is cleared.
UV1 Fault Restart Selection
Using parameter L5-05 the auto reset method for a UV1 (DC bus under voltage) fault can be selected.
•
•
If L5-05 = 0 the UV1 fault is treated like set in parameter L5-01, i.e. the inverter tries to reset UV1 for the number of times set in L5-01 like described above.
If L5-05 = 1 the UV1 fault is always automatically reset, regardless to the L5-01 setting.
6-
82
Memobus Communications
MEMOBUS Communications Configuration
The serial communication can be performed between one PC and one inverter in order to read / write parameters or monitor the drive. The inverter can not be controlled by Memobus communications.
To use the communications port the operator panel must be removed from the inverter. The operator panel connector on the inverter side has to be connected to the serial RS-232 port of the PC/PLC.
Communications Specifications
The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item Specifications
Interface RS-232 (not isolated)
Baud rate: 9,600 bps
Communications Parameters
Communications Protocol
Number of Connectable Units
Data length:
Parity:
Stop bits:
MEMOBUS
1
8 bits fixed none
1 bit fixed
Memobus Operations
MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations:
•
Monitoring operation status of the inverter
•
Setting and reading parameters (for the parameter register numbers refer to the L7Z manual)
Message Content
Message Format
In MEMOBUS communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets depends on the command (function) content.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
Slave Address
The slave address can not be set in the inverter. The slave address field in the message can contain any address from 0 to 31.
6
6-
83
6
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. The three function codes shown in the table below are available.
Command Message Response Message
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
Function
Min. (Bytes) Max. (Bytes) Min. (Bytes) Max. (Bytes)
03H
08H
10H
Read memory register contents
Loop back test
Write multiple memory registers
8
8
11
8
8
41
7
8
8
37
8
8
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the memory register address (test code for a loop back address) and the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
Error Check
Errors during communications are detected using CRC-16 (cyclic redundancy check, checksum method).
The result of the checksum calculation is stored in a data-word (16 bit), which starting value is FFFH. The value of this word is manipulated using Exclusive OR- and SHIFT operations together with the data package that should be sent (slave address, function code, data) and the fixed value A001H. At the end of the calculation the data-word contains the checksum value.
The checksum is calculated in the following way:
1. The starting value of the 16 Bit data-word, that is used for the calculation, has to be set to FFFFH.
2. An Exclusive OR operation has to be performed with the starting value and the slave address.
3. The result has to be shifted to the right until the overflow bit becomes 1.
4. When this bit becomes 1, an Exclusive OR operation with the result of step 3 and the fix value A001H has to be performed.
5. After 8 shift operations (every time when the overflow bit becomes 1, an Exclusive OR like in step 4 has to be done), perform an Exclusive OR operation with the result of the former operations and the next data package (8 bit function code). Again the result of this operation has to be shifted 8 times and if needed it has to be interconnected with the fix value A001H using an Exclusive OR operation.
6. The same steps have to be performed with the data, first with the higher byte and then with the lower byte until all data are proceeded.
7. The result of these operations is the checksum. It consists of a high and a low byte.
6-
84
The following example clarifies the calculation method. It shows the calculation of a CRC-16 code with the slave address 02H (0000 0010) and the function code 03H (0000 0011). The resulting CRC-16 code is D1H for the lower and 40H for the higher byte. The example calculation in this example is not done completely
(normally data would follow the function code).
Calculations Overflow Description
1111 1111 1111 1111
0000 0010
1111 1111 1111 1101
0111 1111 1111 1110
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 1111 1111 1111
0110 1111 1111 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1100 1111 1111 1110
0110 0111 1111 1111
0011 0011 1111 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1001 0011 1111 1110
0100 1001 1111 1111
0010 0100 1111 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0100 1111 1110
0100 0010 0111 1111
0010 0001 0011 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0001 0011 1110
0000 0011
1000 0001 0011 1101
0100 0000 1001 1110
1010 0000 0000 0001
1110 0000 1001 1111
0111 0000 0100 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 0000 0100 1110
0110 1000 0010 0111
0011 0100 0001 0011
1010 0000 0000 0001
1001 0100 0001 0010
0100 1010 0000 1001
0010 0101 0000 0100
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0101 0000 0101
0100 0010 1000 0010
1010 0000 0000 0001
1110 0010 1000 0011
0111 0001 0100 0001
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 0001 0100 0000
D1H 40H
Higher Lower
Byte Byte
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Initial value
Address
ExOr Result
Shift 1
ExOr Result
Shift 2
ExOr Result
Shift 3
Shift 4
ExOr Result
Shift 5
Shift 6
ExOr Result
Shift 7
Shift 8
ExOr Result
Function Code
ExOr Result
Shift 1
ExOr Result
Shift 2
ExOr Result
Shift 3
Shift 4
ExOr Result
Shift 5
Shift 6
ExOr Result
Shift 7
ExOr Result
Shift 8
ExOr Result
CRC-16 Result
6
6-
85
6
MEMOBUS Message Example
An example of MEMOBUS command/response messages is given below.
Reading Inverter Memory Register Contents
The content of maximum 16 inverter memory registers can be read out at a time.
Among other things the command message must contain the start address of the first register to read out and the quantity of registers. The response message will contain the content of the first and the consecutive number of registers that has been set for the quantity.
The contents of the memory register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits.
The following tables show message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.
Command Message
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H
Function Code
Higher
Start Address
Lower
Higher
Quantity
Lower
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
03H
00H
20H
00H
04H
45H
F0H
Function Code
Data quantity
1st storage register
Higher
Lower
Next storage register
Next storage register
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Next storage register
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
03H
08H
00H
65H
00H
00H
00H
00H
01H
F4H
AFH
82H
Function Code
Error code
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
83H
03H
F1H
31H
Loop back Test
The loop back test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave.
The following table shows a message example for performing a loop back test with the slave no. 1.
Command Message
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address
Function code
01H
08H
Slave address
Function code
01H
08H
Slave address
Function code
01H
89H
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
00H
00H
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
00H
00H
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
Error Code
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
01H
86H
50H
6-
86
Writing to Multiple Inverter Memory Registers
The writing of inverter memory registers works similar to the reading process, i.e. the address of the first register that has to be written and the number of registers must be set in the command message.
The data registers which shall be written must be consecutive, starting from the specified address in the command message. The data order must be higher 8 bits, then lower 8 bits. The data must be in memory register address order.
The following table shows an example of a message where a forward operation has been set with a frequency reference of 60.0 Hz for the inverter with the slave address 01H.
Command Message
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
Function Code
01H
10H
Slave Address
Function Code
01H
10H
Slave Address
Function Code
01H
90H
Start Address
Quantity
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
No. of data
Higher
Lead data
Lower
Higher
Next data
Lower
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
04H
00H
01H
02H
00H
01H
00H
02H
58H
63H
39H
Start Address
Quantity
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
00H
01H
00H
02H
10H
08H
Error code
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
* No. of data = 2 x (quantity)
02H
CDH
C1H
IMPORTANT
For the number of data value in the command message the double value of the data quantity must be
6
6-
87
6
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Register Address.
Contents
Inverter status signal
Bit 0 During run
0010H
0011H
0012H
0013H
0014H
0015H
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Fault Content 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bits 8 to D
Bit E
Bit F
Operator status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4 to F
Zero speed
During reverse operation
Reset signal active
During speed agree
Inverter ready
Minor fault
Major fault
Not used
ComRef status
ComCtrl status
During OPE alarm
During fault
Operator in programming mode
0: Digital operator attached 1: PC connected
Not used
OPE Fault Number
Not used
Fault Content 1
Bit 0 PUF, DC bus fuse blown
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
UV1
UV2
UV3
Not used
GF, Ground fault
OC, Over current
OV, DC bus over voltage
OH, Inverter heatsink overheat pre-alarm
OH1, Inverter heatsink overheat
OL1, Motor overload
OL2, Inverter overload
OL3, Overtorque detection 1
OL4, Overtorque detection 2
RR, Internal braking transistor fault
RH, Inverter mounted braking resistor overheat
EF3, External fault set on terminal S3
EF4, External fault set on terminal S4
EF5, External fault set on terminal S5
EF6, External fault set on terminal S6
EF7, External fault set on terminal S7
Not used
Not used
OS, Overspeed detected
DEV, Speed deviation detected
PGO, PG disconnected
PF, Input phase loss
LF, Output open phase
OH3, Motor overheat pre-alarm (PTC analog input)
OPR, Digital operator disconnected
ERR, EPROM error
Not used
6-
88
Register Address.
0016H
0017H
0018H
0019H
001AH
001BH
Alarm Content 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8 to B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Not used
Alarm Content 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D/E
Bit F
Contents
Fault Content 3
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2/3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A to F
CE, Memobus communications error
BUS, Bus option communications error
Not used
CF, Control fault
SVE, Zero servo fault
EF0, External fault from optional input card
Not used
UL3, Undertorque detection 1
UL4, Undertorque detection 2
Not used
CPF Fault Content 1
Bit 0/1 Not used
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
CPF02
CPF03
Not used
CPF05
Bit 6
Bit 7 to F
CPF06
Not used
CPF Fault Content 2
Bit 0 CPF20
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4 to F
CPF21
CPF22
CPF23
Not used
UV, DC bus undervoltage
OV, DC bus overvoltage
OH, Inverter heatsink overheat pre-alarm
OH2, Inverter overheat alarm input by a digital input
OL3, Overtorque detection 1
OL4, Overtorque detection 2
EF, Forward/Reverse input set at the same time
BB, Baseblock active
EF3, External alarm set on terminal S3
EF4, External alarm set on terminal S4
EF5, External alarm set on terminal S5
EF6, External alarm set on terminal S6
EF7, External alarm set on terminal S7
Not used
OS, Overspeed alarm
DEV, Speed deviation
PGO, PG disconnected
OPR, Digital operator disconnected
CE, Memobus communications error
BUS, Communications error
CALL, Memobus communications on standby
OL1, Motor overload
OL2, Inverter overload
Not used
CALL, Communications on standby
UL3, Undertorque detection 1
UL4, Undertorque detection 2
Not used
6
6-
89
6
Register Address.
0020H
0021H
0022H
0023H
0024H
0025H
0026H
0027H
0028H
0029H
002AH
002BH
Contents
Inverter status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bits 8 to F
Error details
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Forward operation
Reverse operation
Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Error
Data setting error
Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 3 (terminal M5 - M6) 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
Bit C
Overcurrent (OC), Ground fault (GF)
Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Inverter overload (OL2)
Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Braking transistor/resistance overheat (rr, rH)
Fuse blown (PUF)
Not used
External error (EF, EFO)
Control board error (CPF)
Motor overload (OL1) or overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV)
Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3), power loss
Missing output phase (LF)
MEMOBUS communications error (CE)
Operator disconnected (OPR)
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Data link status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bits 5 to F
Frequency reference
Writing data
Not used
Not used
Upper and lower limit errors
Data integrity error
Not used
Monitors U1-01
Output frequency Monitors U1-02
Output voltage Monitors U1-06
Output current
Output power
Monitors U1-03
Monitors U1-08
Torque reference Monitors U1-09
Not used
Not used
Control terminals input status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bits 7 to F
Input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
Input terminal S2 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function input terminal S3 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function input terminal S4 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function input terminal S5 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function input terminal S6 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function input terminal S7 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
6-
90
Register Address.
002CH
002DH
002EH - 0030H
0031H
0032H
0033H
0034H - 003AH
003BH
003CH
003DH
Contents
Inverter status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Operation
Zero speed
Frequency agree
User-defined speed agree
Frequency detection 1:
Frequency detection 2:
Inverter startup completed
Undervoltage detection
Baseblock
Frequency reference mode
Run command mode
Overtorque detection
Frequency reference lost
Restart enabled
1: Operating
1: Zero speed
1: Agreement
1: Agreement
1: Output frequency
≤ L4-01
1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01
1: Startup completed
1: Detected
1: Inverter output baseblock
1: Not communication 0: Communication option
1: Not communication 0: Communication option
1: Detected
1: Lost
1: Restarting
Error (including MEMOBUS communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
MEMOBUS communications time-out1: Timed out
Multi-function contact output status
Bit 0 Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bits 3 to F
Not used
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 3 (terminal M5-M6) 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
Main circuit DC voltage
Torque Monitor U1-09
Power Monitor U1-08
Not used
CPU software number
Flash software number
Communications error details
Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bits 7 to F kVA setting
Control method
Invalid data length
Not used
Parity error
Overrun error
Framing error
Time-out
Not used
003EH
003FH
Note: Communications error details are stored until an error reset is input.
6
6-
91
6
Inverter Error Codes
The content of a current fault and faults that have occurred earlier can be read out by Memobus using the Fault
Trace (U2-) and the Fault History (U3-) parameters. The fault codes are shown in the table below.
Fault
Code
01H
Fault Description
PUF
Fault
Code
14H
Fault Description
EF6
Fault
Code
37H
Fault Description
SE1
02H UV1 15H EF7 38H SE2
0CH
0DH
0EH
0FH
10H
11H
12H
13H
08H
09H
0AH
0BH
03H
04H
06H
07H
RH
EF3
EF4
EF5
OL2
OL3
OL4
RR
UV2
UV3
GF
OC
OV
OH
OH1
OL1
27H
28H
29H
2AH
21H
22H
25H
26H
18H
19H
1AH
1BH
1CH
1DH
1EH
1FH
CE
BUS
CF
SVE
EF0
FBL
UL3
UL4
OS
DEV
PGO
PF
LF
OH3
OPR
ERR
8AH
8BH
91H
92H
93H
94H
86H
87H
88H
89H
39H
83H
84H
85H
CPF09
CPF10
CPF20
CPF21
CPF22
CPF23
SE3
CPF02
CPF03
CPF04
CPF05
CPF06
CPF07
CPF08
ENTER Command
When parameters are written in the Inverter from a PC/PLC using MEMOBUS communications, the parameters are temporarily stored in the parameter data area of the Inverter. To enable these parameters in the parameter data area, an ENTER command must be used.
There are two types of ENTER commands:
•
ENTER commands that enable parameter data in RAM only (changes will be lost after power loss)
•
ENTER commands that write data into the EEPROM (non-volatile memory) of the Inverter and enable the data in RAM at the same time.
Register Address.
0900H
Contents
Write parameter data to EEPROM, RAM is refreshed
0910H Parameter data are not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
An ENTER command is performed by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0910H.
IMPORTANT
• The EEPROM can be written up to 100,000 times only. Do not frequently execute ENTER commands (0900H) which write into the EEPROM.
• The ENTER command registers are write-only registers. Consequently, if these registers are read out, error code
02H is returned.
• An ENTER command is not required if reference or broadcast data are sent to the inverter.
6-
92
Communication Error Codes
The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes.
Error Code Contents
01H
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
02H
Invalid register number error
• The specified register address does not exist.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
03H
21H
22H
23H
24H
Invalid quantity error
• The number of data packets (register content) being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data bytes in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters.
• When writing parameters, the parameter setting is invalid.
Write mode error
• Attempting to write parameters to the inverter during operation.
• Attempting to write via ENTER commands during operation.
• Attempting to write parameters other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when warning alarm CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
Writing during DC bus undervoltage (UV) error
• Writing parameters to the inverter during UV (DC bus undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via ENTER commands during UV (DC bus undervoltage) alarm.
Writing error during parameters processing
Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Inverter.
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave ignores the write function.
•
When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
•
•
When the gap between two blocks (8 bit) of a message exceeds 24 bits.
When the command message data length is invalid.
6
6-
93
6
6-
94
7
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasures for Inverter and motor problems.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions...................................7-2
Troubleshooting ................................................................7-18
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the fault and alarm functions of the Inverter. These functions include fault detection, alarm detection, programming error detection and auto-tuning error detection.
7
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output is operated and the Inverter output is switched OFF and the motor coasts to stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator/LED Monitor.
The faults can be categorized in two groups:
•
•
Faults that can be reset without cycling the power using an input or the reset key at the Digital Operator
(resetable faults)
Faults that require to cycle the power (non-resetable faults)
When a fault has occurred refer to the following to identify the fault and to correct the causes.
To reset a fault it is necessary to remove the RUN signal and correct the fault reason. Otherwise a Reset is not accepted or the Inverter trips with the same fault again.
The following tables shows a list of faults and corrective actions.
Display
GF
Ground Fault
OC
Over Current
PUF
DC Bus Fuse Open
Meaning
Table 7.1 Resetable Faults
Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Remove the motor and run the
Inverter without the motor.
Ground Fault
The ground current at the Inverter output exceeded 50% of the Inverter rated output current and L8-09=1 (Enabled).
One Inverter output was shorted to ground or a DCCT is defective.
The output contactor was opened when the inverter output was still active.
Check the motor for a phase to ground short.
Check the output current with a clampmeter to verify the DCCT reading.
Check the control sequence for wrong motor contactor signals.
Overcurrent
The Inverter’s output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level.
Shorted Inverter output phase-to-phase, shorted motor, locked rotor, too heavy load, accel/decel time too short, contactor on the Inverter output has opened or closed, a special motor or a motor with a rated current larger than the Inverter’s output current is used.
Remove the motor and run the
Inverter without the motor.
Check the motor for a phase-tophase short.
Verify the accel/decel times
(C1-).
Check the Inverter for a phase-tophase short at the output.
DC Bus Fuse blown.
The fuse in the main circuit is open.
Warning:
Never run the Inverter after replacing the DC bus fuse without checking for shorted components.
Shorted output transistor(s) or terminals.
Check the motor and the motor cables for short circuits or insulation failures (phase-to-phase).
Replace the inverter after correcting the fault.
7-
2
Display
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
UV1
DC Bus Undervolt
UV2
CTL PS Undervolt
Table 7.1 Resetable Faults
Meaning Probable Causes
The deceleration time is set too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large.
Corrective Actions
Increase the deceleration time (C1-
02/04/06/08) or connect a braking option.
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage has exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
Default detection levels are:
200 V class: 410 VDC
400 V class: 820 VDC
The power supply voltage is too high.
The braking chopper / braking resistor is not working.
Check the power supply and decrease the voltage to meet the inverter’s specifications.
Check the braking chopper / resistor.
DC Bus Undervoltage
The DC bus voltage is below the Undervoltage Detection Level
(L2-05). The default settings are:
200V class: 190 VDC
400 V class: 380 VDC
The voltage fluctuations of the power supply are too high.
A momentary power loss occurred.
An open-phase error occurred at the input terminals.
Check the input voltage.
The terminal screws of the input power supply are loose.
Check the wiring of the input terminals.
Check the input voltage and the wiring of the input terminals.
Main Circuit MC Operation Failure
The MC stopped responding during
Inverter operation.
Control Power Supply Undervoltage
Undervoltage of the control circuit while the Inverter was running.
The acceleration time is set too short.
Extend the settings in
C1-01/03/05/07
An error occurred in the inrush current prevention circuit while the Inverter was running.
Replace the Inverter.
External load was pulling down the
Inverter’s power supplies or there was an internal short in the power/gate drive board.
Remove all connection to the control terminals and cycle the power to the Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
UV3
MC Answerback
Inrush Current Prevention Circuit Fault
An overheating of the charging resistor for the DC bus capacitors occurred.
Cycle the power to the Inverter.
The MC of the charging circuit did not respond 10 sec. after the MC ON signal has been output.
The contactor of the inrush current prevention circuit is defective.
(Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 55 kW)
Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
PF
Input Phase Loss
LF
Output Phase Loss
The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose.
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
A phase loss occurred in the input power supply.
An unusual big ripple on the DC bus voltage has been detected.
A momentary power loss occurred
Only detected when L8-05=1 (enabled)
The voltage fluctuation of the input power supply is too high.
The voltage balance between the input phases is bad.
Tighten the input terminal screws
Check the power supply voltage
Output Open-phase
There is a broken wire in the output cable.
An open-phase occurred at the Inverter output.
The motor winding is broken.
The output terminals are loose.
The fault is detected when the output current falls below 5% of the inverter rated current and L8-07=1 (enabled)
The motor has a capacity less than 5% of the Inverter's maximum motor capacity.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Check the motor and Inverter capacity.
7
7-
3
7
Display
OH
Heatsink Overtemp
OH1
Heatsink Max Temp
RR
DynBrk Transistr
OL1
Motor Overload
OL2
Inv Overload
OL3
Car Stuck
OL4
Car Stuck
UL3
Undertorq Det 1
Table 7.1 Resetable Faults
Meaning Probable Causes
The temperature is too high.
Corrective Actions
Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the setting in L8-02 and L8-03 is set to 0,1 or 2.
Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped
There is a heat source nearby.
Reduce the ambient temperature around the drive.
The Inverter's cooling fan(s) is/are broken.
Replace the cooling fan(s).
The Inverter's internal cooling fan is broken (18.5 kW and larger).
The ambient temperature is too high.
Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature of the Inverter’s heatsink exceeded 105 °C.
There is a heat source nearby.
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Stopped
Reduce the ambient temperature around the drive.
The Inverter’s cooling fan(s) is/are broken.
Replace the cooling fan(s).
The Inverter’s internal cooling fan is broken (18.5 kW and larger).
Dynamic Braking Transistor
The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed.
Defective or failed dynamic braking resistor caused braking transistor damage.
Cycle power to the Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
Motor Overload
Detected when L1-01 is set to 1,2 or 3 and the Inverter’s output current exceeded the motor overload curve.
The overload curve is adjustable using parameter E2-01 (Motor Rated Current), L1-01 (Motor Protection Selection) and L2-02 (Motor Protection
Time Constant)
The load is too large. The acceleration time, deceleration time or cycle time are too short.
The voltage settings of the V/f pattern is incorrect.
The setting of Motor Rated Current
(E2-01) is incorrect.
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the accel/ decel times
(C1-).
Check the V/f characteristics (E1-
).
Check the setting of Motor Rated
Current Setting (E2-01).
Inverter Overload
The Inverter output current exceeded the Inverter’s overload capability.
The load is too large. The acceleration time or deceleration times are too short.
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the accel/ decel times
(C1-).
The voltage settings of the V/f pattern is incorrect.
Check the V/f characteristics (E1-
).
The size of the Inverter is too small.
Check the setting of Motor Rated
Current Setting (E2-01).
Overtorque/Car Stuck Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector Control) exceeded L6-02 for longer than the time set in L6-03 and L6-01 is set to
3 or 4.
Motor was overloaded.
Overtorque/Car Stuck Detection 2
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector Control) exceeded L6-05 for longer than the time set in L6-06 and L6-04 is set to
3 or 4.
Motor was overloaded.
Undertorque Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-02 for longer than the time set in L6-03 and L6-01 is set to
7 or 8.
Motor was underloaded.
Ensure the values in L6-02 and L6-
03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Ensure the values in L6-05 and L6-
06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Ensure the values in L6-02 and L6-
03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
7-
4
Display
UL4
Undertorq Det 2
OS
Overspeed Det
PGO
PG Open
DEV
Speed Deviation
DV3
DV4
DV6
Over Acceleration
SVE
Zero Servo Fault
Table 7.1 Resetable Faults
Meaning Probable Causes
Undertorque Detection 2
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-05 for longer than the time set in L6-06 and L6-04 is set to
7 or 8.
Motor was underloaded.
Corrective Actions
Ensure the values in L6-05 and L6-
06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Motor Overspeed
Overshooting/Undershooting occurs.
Detected when F1-03 is set to 0, 1 or 2 and A1-02 is set to 3.
The motor speed feedback (U1-05) exceeded the setting in F1-08 for a time longer than the setting of F1-09.
The reference was too high.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 are not appropriate.
Adjust the ASR settings in the C5 parameter group.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
Check the settings in F1-08 and F1-
09.
The PG wiring is broken.
PG Disconnection
Detected when F1-02 is set to 0, 1 or 2 and A1-02 is set to 3 or 6
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Detected when no PG (encoder) pulses are received for a time longer than the setting of F1-14.
Power is not supplied to the PG.
Wrong brake control sequence. The motor runs against the closed brake.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Fix the wiring.
Supply power to the PG properly.
Check the sequence and if the brake is opened when the inverter starts to increase the speed.
Reduce the load.
The load is too large.
Excessive Speed Deviation
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
Detected when F1-04 is set to 0, 1 or 2 and A1-02 is set to 3 or 6
The load is locked.
The speed deviation is higher than the setting of F1-10 for a time longer than the setting of F1-11.
Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.
Check the mechanical system.
The settings of F1-10 and F1-11 are not appropriate.
Check the settings of F1-10 and F1-
11.
Wrong brake control sequence. The motor runs against the closed brake.
Check the sequence and if the brake is opened when the inverter starts to increase the speed.
Wrong rotation direction
Detected when the speed deviation is higher than 30% and the torque reference and acceleration have opposite signs.
PG wire broken
Incorrect PG wiring
Wrong magnet position compensation value (F1-22)
Check the PG wiring
Correct the wiring
Verify the PG direction and execute an encoder offset auto tuning
The load is too large
Wrong rotation direction
Detected when F1-19 is not 0, the speed reference and motor speed have opposite signs and the detection threshold set in F1-19 is exceeded.
The magnet position offset setting in
F1-22 is wrong
The load is too large
The load is too large
Reduce the load and check the brake
Verify the PG direction and execute an encoder offset auto tuning
Reduce the load and check the brake
An over acceleration of the car was detected (A1-02 = 6 only)
Magnet position offset is wrong
Sheave diameter, gear ratio or roping setting incorrect
Reduce the load
Check the PG direction, check F1-
22 and perform an encoder offset tuning.
Verify the settings of S3-13, S3-14 and S3-15.
Too short acceleration or deceleration time.
Adjust the acceleration and deceleration times.
Zero Servo Fault
The torque limit is too small.
The motor position moved during Zero
Servo Operation.
The load torque is too large.
-
Increase the torque limit.
Decrease the load torque.
Check for signal noise.
7
7-
5
7
Display
CF
Out of Control
EF0
Opt External Flt
Table 7.1 Resetable Faults
Meaning Probable Causes
Control Fault
A torque limit was reached continuously for 3 seconds or longer during a deceleration stop in Open Loop Vector control.
Motor parameters were not set properly.
Corrective Actions
Check the motor parameters.
External fault input from Communications Option Card
An external fault condition was present, input from a communication option card.
Check for an external fault condition.
Verify the parameters.
Verify communication signals
External fault at terminal S3
EF3
Ext Fault S3
EF4
Ext Fault S4
EF5
Ext Fault S5
EF6
Ext Fault S6
EF 7
Ext Fault S7
CE
Memobus Com Err
BUS
Option Com Err
SE1
Sequence Error 1
SE2
Sequence Error 2
SE3
Sequence Error 3
Ref Missing
FRL
External fault at terminal S4
External fault at terminal S5
External fault at terminal S6
An “external fault” was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
Eliminate the cause of the external fault condition.
External fault at terminal S7
MEMOBUS Communication Error
Detected when control data was not received correctly for two seconds, H5-
04 is set to 0,1 or 2 and H5-05 is set to
1.
Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.
Check the connections and all PLCside software configurations.
Option Communication Error
After initial communication has been established, the connection got lost.
Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.
Check the connections and all PLCside software configurations.
Detected no output contactor answer back for S1-16 time setting.
The output current at start was below
25% of no-load current.
The output current during run was below 25% of no-load current.
No speed was selected before the inverter start.
The output contactor or auxiliary switch has a malfunction.
Check the output contactor.
The output contactor was not closed at start.
Check the output contactor.
The output contactor was opened during run.
Check the output contactor.
A start signal was given and no speed was selected when d1-18 = 1 and
H1-K83.
Check the speed selection/start sequence.
CPF00
COM-ERR(OP&INV)
CPF01
COM-ERR(OP&INV)
Table 7.2 Not Resetable Faults
Digital Operator/LED Monitor Communication Fault 1
Communication with the digital operator could not be established within 5 seconds after the power was supplied to the Inverter.
Digital operator cable was not securely connected or digital operator is defective and/or control board is defective
Disconnect the Digital Operator/
LED Monitor and then connect it again.
Replace the Inverter.
CPU External RAM Fault The control board is damaged.
Cycle the Inverter power supply.
Replace the Inverter.
Digital Operator/LED Monitor Communication Fault 2
Digital operator cable is not properly connected or the digital operator is defective
After communications with the digital operator was established, the communication stopped for 2 seconds or more.
The control board is damaged.
Disconnect the Digital Operator/
LED Monitor and then connect it again.
Cycle the Inverter power supply.
Replace the Inverter.
7-
6
CPF02
BB Circuit Err
CPF03
EEPROM Error
CPF04
Internal A/D Err
CPF05
External A/D Err
CPF06
Option Error
CPF07
RAM-Err
CPF08
WAT-Err
CPF09
CPU-Err
CPF10
ASIC-Err
CPF20
Option A/D Error
CPF21
Option CPU Down
Table 7.2 Not Resetable Faults
Baseblock circuit error
A baseblock circuit error occurred at power-up.
EEPROM error
Check sum is not valid
CPU Internal A/D Converter Fault
CPU External A/D Converter Fault
Option Card Connection Fault
Gate array hardware failure at powerup.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the Inverter power supply.
Replace the Inverter.
Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the Inverter power supply.
Replace the Inverter.
Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the Inverter power supply.
Replace the Inverter.
Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the Inverter power supply.
Replace the Inverter.
The Option Card is not connected properly.
Turn off the power and reinstall the Option Card again.
The Inverter or Option Card is damaged.
Replace the Option Card or the
Inverter.
ASIC Internal RAM fault
Watchdog Timer Fault
CPU-ASIC Mutual
Diagnosis Fault
-
The control circuit is damaged.
-
The control circuit is damaged.
-
The control circuit is damaged.
The control circuit is damaged.
Cycle the Inverter power supply.
Replace the Inverter.
Cycle the Inverter power supply.
Replace the Inverter.
Cycle the Inverter power supply.
Replace the Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
ASIC version fault
Communication Option Card A/D Converter Error
Self-diagnosis Fault of
Option Board
Option board connection is not correct.
Option card A/D converter is faulty.
Turn off the power and re-install the option board again
Remove all inputs to the option board
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the Inverter power supply.
Replace the option board
Replace the inverter
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Noise or spike was on the communication line and/or defective option board.
Cycle the Inverter power supply.
Replace the option board
Replace the Inverter
7
7-
7
7
CPF22
Option Type Err
CPF23
Option DPRAM Err
CPF24
Option Comm Err
Table 7.2 Not Resetable Faults
Option Board Code Number Fault
Option Board
Interconnection Fault
Remove any option boards
Perform an initialization to factory defaults
An unrecognizable option board is connected to the control board. Cycle the Inverter power supply.
Replace the option board
Replace the Inverter
Turn off the power and reinstall the option board again
An option board was not correctly connected to the control board, or an option board which is not made for the
Inverter has been attached to the control board.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults
Cycle the Inverter power supply.
Replace the option board
Replace the Inverter
PG-F2 (Hiperface y / EnDat) serial communication error
Detected when no data were received from the encoder for 200 msec
Encoder connection wiring broken or encoder broken
Check the encoder connection or replace the encoder if necessary
7-
8
Alarm Detection
Alarms are Inverter protection functions that indicate unusual conditions without switching off the drive and operating the fault output contact. The alarm automatically disappears when its cause is eliminated.
During an alarm condition, the Digital Operator/LED Monitor alarm display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03) if programmed.
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Display
EF
External Fault
(flashing)
UV
DC Bus Undervolt
(flashing)
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
(flashing)
OH
Heatsnk Overtmp
(flashing)
OL3
Car Stuck
(flashing)
OL4
Car Stuck
(flashing)
Table 7.3 Alarm Detection
Meaning Probable causes
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
Input Together
Both the forward and the reverse run commands are input simultaneously for
500ms or more. This alarm stops the motor.
Control sequence is faulty.
Corrective Actions
Check external sequence logic, so that only one input is received at a time.
DC Bus Undervoltage
The following conditions occurred
• The DC bus voltage was below the
Undervoltage Detection Level Setting (L2-05).
• The MC of the inrush current prevention circuit was opened.
• The control power supply voltage was below the CUV level.
UV Alarm is detected only, when the drive is in stop condition
For the probable reasons please have a look at UV1, UV2 and UV3 in table
7.1.
For the corrective actions please have a look at UV1, UV2 and UV3 in table 7.1
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
200 V class: 410 VDC
400 V class: 820 VDC
An OV Alarm is detected only, when the drive is in stop condition.
The power supply voltage is too high.
Check the power supply and decrease the voltage to meet the
Inverter’s specifications
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the temperature programmed in L8-02.
Enabled when L8-03 = 3.
The ambient temperature is too high.
There is a heat source nearby.
The Inverter cooling fan(s) has stopped.
Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.
Reduce the ambient temperature around the Inverter
Replace the cooling fan(s).
Overtorque Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) exceeded L6-02 for longer than the time set in L6-03 and L6-01is set to
1 or 2.
Motor was overloaded
Ensure the values in L6-02 and L6-
03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Overtorque Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) exceeded L6-02 for longer than the time set in L6-03 and L6-01 is set to
1 or 2.
Motor was overloaded
Ensure the values in L6-05 and L6-
06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
7
7-
9
7
Display
UL3
Undertorque Det 1
(flashing)
UL4
Undertorque Det 2
(flashing)
OS
Overspeed Det
(flashing)
PGO
PG Open
(flashing)
DEV
Speed Deviation
(flashing)
EF0
Opt External Flt
(flashing)
Table 7.3 Alarm Detection
Meaning Probable causes
Undertorque Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-02 for longer than the time set in L6-03 and L6-01 is set to
5 or 6.
Motor was underloaded
Corrective Actions
Ensure the values in L6-02 and L6-
03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Undertorque Detection 2
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-05 for longer than the time set in L6-06 and L6-04 is set to
5 or 6.
Motor was underloaded
Ensure the values in L6-05 and L6-
06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Overspeed Alarm
Detected when A1-02 is set to 1 or 3 and F1-03 is set to 3.
The motor speed feedback (U1-05) exceeded the value set in F1-08 for a time longer than the setting of F1-09.
PG Disconnection
Detected when F1-02 is set to 3 and
A1-02 is set to 1 or 3.
Overshooting/undershooting occurs.
The reference was too high.
Adjust the ASR settings in the C5 parameter group.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 are not appropriate.
Check the settings in F1-08 and
F1-09.
The PG wiring is broken.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Detected when no PG (encoder) pulses are received for a time longer than the setting of F1-14
Power is not supplied to the PG.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Check the wiring
Supply the correct power to the PG.
Excessive Speed Deviation
Detected when F1-04 is set to 3 and
The load is too large.
Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.
A1-02 is set to 1 or 3.
The speed deviation is higher than the setting of F1-10 for longer than the setting of F1-11.
The load is locked.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 are not appropriate.
Check the mechanical system.
Check the settings in F1-10 and F1-
11.
The load is too large
An over acceleration of the car was detected (A1-02 = 6 only)
Magnet position offset is wrong
Sheave diameter, gear ratio or roping setting incorrect
Reduce the load
Check the PG direction, check
F1-22 and perform an encoder offset tuning.
Verify the settings of S3-13, S3-14 and S3-15.
Too short acceleration or deceleration time.
Adjust the acceleration and deceleration times.
Check for an external fault condition.
Communication Option Card External
Fault
An external fault condition was input from by communication option card.
Verify the parameters.
Verify communication signals
7-
10
Display
EF3
Ext Fault S3
(flashing)
EF4
Ext Fault S4
(flashing)
EF5
Ext Fault S5
(flashing)
EF6
Ext Fault S6
(flashing)
EF7
Ext Fault S7
(flashing)
BUS
Option Com Err
(flashing)
Ext Run Active
Cannot Reset
Ext Run Active
Cannot Reset
FF_CAL
Meaning
Table 7.3 Alarm Detection
Probable causes
External fault at terminal S3
External fault at terminal S4
External fault at terminal S5
External fault at terminal S6
Corrective Actions
An external fault was input by a multifunction input terminal
(S3 to S7) which is programmed for the external fault function alarm output.
Eliminate the cause of the external fault condition
External fault at terminal S7
Option Communications Alarm
After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.
Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.
Check the connections and all userside software configurations.
Detected after a fault when a RESET command is input while the RUN command is still active
The RUN command has not been removed and a RESET command is input by digital input or by the RESET button on the digital operator.
Remove the RUN signal first and reset the error.
An inverter fault can’t be reset.
The fault was tried to be reset when a direction signal (Up/Down) was still active.
Remove the direction signal and retry to reset the fault.
If the fault reset is handled by a
PLC, check the sequence.
Feed forward motor acceleration time active
Motor acceleration time calculation was activated by setting n5-05 = 1 and enabling the inspection input
• Perform the complete tuning procedure
• Abort the tuning by setting n5-05 = 0.
7
7-
11
7
Operator Programming Errors
An Operator Programming Error (OPE) occurs when two or more parameter related to each other are set inappropriate or an individual parameter setting is incorrect. The Inverter does not operate until the parameter setting is set correctly; however, no other alarm or fault outputs will occur. If an OPE occurs, change the related parameter by checking the cause shown in
Table 7.4
. When an OPE error is displayed, press the ENTER key to see U1-34 (OPE Detected). This monitor displays the parameter that is causing the OPE error.
Table 7.4 Operator Programming Errors
Display Meaning
OPE01 kVA Selection
Inverter kVA Setting Error
Probable Causes Corrective Actions
The control board was replaced and the kVA parameter (o2-04) is incorrect.
Enter the correct kVA setting by referring to
page 5-63, Factory Settings Changing with Inverter
A not suitable software has beenn installed on the inverter.
Compare U1-14 and the software number in the nameplate. Replace the software if necessary.
Parameter Setting is out of range
OPE02
Limit
OPE03
Terminal
Hiperface y
selected (n8-35=4) and:
• F1-01 is different from 512 or 1024
• F1-21 is set to 2
EnDat selected (n8-35=5) and:
• F1-01 is different from 512 or 2048
• F1-21 is set to 0 or 1
Parameter setting was outside of the allowable range.
S3-01 = 2 (Advanced short floor) and:
• E1-04 > 100Hz or
• E1-04 < 6Hz or
• d1-09 > 100Hz or
• d1-09 < 4.8Hz or
• C1-01 to C1-08 > 50sec or
• C1-01 to C1-08 < 0.1 sec.
Multi-function Input
Selection Error
Verify the parameter settings.
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input
(H1-01 to H1-05) settings:
• Functions were selected duplicative.
• External Baseblock NO (8) and
External Baseblock NC (9) were selected at the same time.
• The Emergency Stop Command NO
(15) and NC(17) are set simultaneously.
Verify the parameter settings in H1-
OPE05
Sequence Selection
OPE06
PG Opt Missing
OPE08
Constant Selection
RUN/Reference Command
Selection Error
The Reference Source Selection b1-01 and/or the RUN Source Selection parameter b1-02 are set to 3 (option board) but no option board is installed.
Option board is not installed or is installed incorrectly
Control method selection error
Function Selection Error
Verify that the board is installed.
Remove the power supply and reinstall the option board again
Recheck the setting of b1-01 and b1-02.
One of the control methods needing a
PG feedback was selected (A1-02 =3/
6), but a PG option board is not installed.
Verify the control method selection in parameter A1-02 and/or the installation of the PG option board.
A setting has been made, which is not applicable with the current control method.
Example: A function used only with open loop vector control was selected for V/f control.
Verify the control method and the function.
7-
12
Display
OPE10
V/f Ptrn Setting
ERR
EEPROM R/W Err
Table 7.4 Operator Programming Errors
Meaning
V/f Parameter Setting Error
Probable Causes
V/f parameter settings were out of range.
Corrective Actions
Check parameters (E1-). A frequency/voltage value may be set higher than the maximum frequency/voltage.
Cycle power to the Inverter.
EEPROM write error
The NV-RAM data does not match the
EEPROM data.
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.
Do a factory initialization (A1-03)
7
7-
13
7
Auto-tuning Faults
Auto-tuning faults are shown below. When the following faults are detected, the fault is displayed on the digital operator and the motor coasts to stop. No fault or alarm outputs will be operated.
Table 7.5 Auto-tuning Faults
Display Meaning
Fault Motor data fault
Probable causes
There is an error in the data input for autotuning.
Corrective Actions
Check the input data.
There is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current.
Check the Inverter and motor capacity.
There is an error between the no-load current setting and the input motor rated current (when auto-tuning for line-to-line resistance is performed for vector control)
Check the motor rated current and no-load current.
Check the input data.
Minor Fault
STOP key
Alarm
STOP key input
An alarm is detected during auto-tuning.
Check wiring and the machine.
Check the load.
The STOP key was pressed to cancel autotuning.
-
Resistance
No-Load Current
Line-to-Line Resistance Fault
No-Load Current Fault
Autotuning was not completed in the specified time.
The auto-tuning result is outside the parameter setting range.
• Check the input data.
• Check the motor wiring.
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
• If the setting of T1-03 is higher than the Inverter input power supply voltage (E1-01), change the input data.
Rated slip Rated Slip Fault
Accelerate
Motor Speed
I-det. Circuit
Acceleration error (detected during rotating autotuning only)
Motor Speed Fault
Detected only for rotating autotuning
The motor did not accelerate in the specified time.
Rotating autotuning was performed with a high load connected.
The torque reference exceeded 100% during acceleration.
Detected only when A1-02 is set to 2
(Open Loop Vector control).
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration
Time 1).
• Increase L7-01 and L7-02
(Torque Limits) if they are low.
• Remove the ropes and repeat the tuning.
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration
Time 1).
• Check the input data (particularly the number of PG pulses and the number of motor poles).
• Perform not rotating auto tuning
Current Detection Fault
The current exceeded the motor rated current.
Check wiring of the Inverter and the mounting.
Any of U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 has open-phase
7-
14
Display
Leakage Inductance Fault
Z_SRCH_ERR
(PM motor tuning only)
LD_ERR
(PM motor tuning only)
RS_ERR
(PM motor tuning only)
KE_ERR
(PM motor tuning only)
End - 1
V/f Over Setting
End - 2
Saturation
End - 3
Rated FLA Alm
Table 7.5 Auto-tuning Faults
Meaning
The leakage inductance measurement caused an error.
Probable causes
Auto-tuning was not completed in the specified time.
Auto-tuning result is outside the parameter setting range.
Corrective Actions
• Check the motor wiring.
• Check the motor rated current input value
The leakage inductance tuning current was too high or too low (Closed Loop
Vector for PM only)
Reduce or increase the current level for leakage inductance tuning by changing parameter n8-46.
All encoders
Encoder with Z-pulse
Serial encoders
Inductance error
The motor speed exceeded 20 rpm at the auto tuning start.
The magnetic pole position tuning could not be performed in the specified time.
The difference between two measurements of the magnet pole position was higher than 3°.
• Remove the ropes and repeat the tuning
• Check the encoder rotation direction and if necessary change
F1-05.
The difference between two measurements of the magnet pole position was higher than 5°.
An encoder serial communication error has occurred during the tuning.
• Check the encoder wiring (order, shield etc.)
• Check the encoder power supply.
• Replace the encoder.
The inductance could not be measured in the specified time during the motor rotation.
Check the motor wiring
Line-to-line resistance error
Voltage constant error
The resistance could not be measured in the specified time during the motor rotation or the calculated value was out of range.
• Check the motor wiring
• Check the motor input data
The voltage constant could not be measured in the specified time during the motor rotation.
Check the motor wiring
V/f Settings Alarm
Displayed after auto-tuning is complete
The torque reference exceeded 100% and the no-load current exceeded 70% during auto-tuning.
Check and correct the motor settings
If the motor and the machine are connected, disconnect the motor from the machine.
Motor Core Saturation Fault
Displayed after auto-tuning is complete.
Detected only for rotating autotuning
Check the input data.
During auto-tuning, the measured values of motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1 and 2 (E2-07 and E2-08) exceeded its setting range.
Check the motor wiring.
If the motor and the machine are connected, disconnect the motor from the machine.
Rated Current Setting Alarm
Displayed after auto-tuning is complete
During auto-tuning, the measured value of motor rated current (E2-01) was higher than the set value.
Check the motor rated current value.
7
7-
15
7
Digital Operator Copy Function Faults
These faults can occur during the digital operator COPY function. When a fault occurs, the fault content is displayed on the operator. The fault or alarm contact output is not operated.
Table 7.6 Operator Copy Function Faults
Function
Digital Operator
Display
Probable Causes Corrective Actions
READ
Function
PRE
READ IMPOSSIBLE
IFE
READ DATA ERROR o3-01 was set to 1 to write parameter into the Digital Operator when the Operator was write-protected
(o3-02 = 0).
Set o3-02 to enable writing parameters into the
Operator’s memory.
Retry the READ command (o3-01 = 1).
The data file read from the Inverter was of the wrong size indicating corrupted data.
Check the Digital Operator’s cable.
Replace the Digital Operator.
COPY
Function
Verify
Function
RDE
DATA ERROR
CPE
ID UNMATCHED
CSE
SUM CHECK ERROR
VYE
VERIFY ERROR
A low Inverter voltage has been detected.
An attempted writing of the Inverter data to the
Digital Operator’s EEPROM failed.
Retry the READ command (o3-01 = 1).
Replace the Digital Operator.
The Inverter type or software number was different from the stored data in the digital operator
Use stored data of the same product (L7) and software number (U1-14) only.
VAE
INV. KVA UNMATCH
CYE
COPY ERROR
The capacity of the Inverter and the capacity of the stored data in the Digital Operator are different.
Use stored data for the same Inverter capacity only
(o2-04).
CRE
CONTROL UNMATCHED
The control method of the Inverter and the control method of the stored data in the Digital Operator are different.
Use stored data for the same control method (A1-02).
A parameter setting written to the Inverter was different from the setting stored in the Digital Operator.
Retry the COPY function (o3-01 = 2)
Upon completion of the COPY function, the
Inverter’s data checksum was different to the digital operator’s data checksum.
Retry the COPY function (o3-01 = 2)
The set value of the digital operator and the Inverter do not match
Retry the Verify function (o3-01 = 3)
7-
16
Machine Data Copy Function Faults
These faults can occur during the machine data (encoder) COPY function. When a fault occurs, the fault content is displayed on the operator. The fault or alarm contact output is not operated.
Function
WRITE from inverter to encoder
COPY from
Encoder to
Inverter
VERFIY
Table 7.7 Machine Data Copy Function Faults
Digital Operator
Display
Probable Causes
ERE
DATA ERROR
EDE
WRITE IMPOSSIBLE
EIF
WRITE DATA ERROR
ECE
COPY ERROR
EPE
ID MISMATCH
ECS
SUM CHECK ERROR
EVE
VERIFY ERROR
Corrective Actions
A write to encoder command could not be performed since the drive is in UV (under voltage) condition.
Make sure that no fault and no alarm is active and retry.
The write to encoder command is prohibited.
Set parameter F1-26 to 1 to permit a write to encoder command.
A communication error occurred during the write to encoder process.
Retry the write to encoder command.
A read to encoder command could not be performed since the drive is in UV (under voltage) condition.
The data in the encoder do not fit to the L7Z data format.
Make sure that no fault and no alarm is active and retry.
-
The check sum of the data, which were written into the inverter is wrong.
Retry the COPY command.
The data in the encoder and inverter data do not match.
-
7
7-
17
Troubleshooting
Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring etc., the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started. If that occurs, use this section as a reference and perform the appropriate countermeasures.
If a fault code is displayed, refer to
page 7-2, Protective and Diagnostic Functions
7
If A Parameter Cannot Be Set
Use the following information if a parameter cannot be set.
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible:
The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Turn off the RUN command and then set the parameters.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the parameter A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) settings are different, the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed. Enter the correct password in A1-04.
If the password got lost, check parameter A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Shift/RESET key and the
MENU key simultaneously in the A1-04 display. Read the password and set it in parameter A1-04.
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the parameter is wrong. Refer to
Table 7.4
in this chapter and correct the settings.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator/LED Monitor communication error. The connection between the Digital Operator/
LED Monitor and the Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator/LED Monitor and then re-install it.
7-
18
If the Motor Does Not Operate Properly
The following causes are possible:
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The frequency reference is 0.00 Hz or a no speed is selected by the digital inputs. Check the input signals and the frequency reference settings.
Also make sure to set the Baseblock signal. The inverter does not accept any input if it is base blocked.
The load is too heavy
Check the motor current. If it is at the limit of the inverter rated current the load might be too high. Check the inverter size and the mechanical system. Check also if the brake is working or not to make sure, that the motor is not running against the closed brake.
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring may be incorrect.
The direction of the motor rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W. If an encoder is used, the polarity has to be switched over as well. If the Inverter is operated in V/f mode parameter b1-04 can be used to change the rotation direction.
If the Motor Stalls or Acceleration is Slow
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7-01 to L7-04, the output torque will be limited according to these settings. Therefore the motor may not develop enough torque to accelerate or the acceleration time might be very long.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set in L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be increased. Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set in L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the motor speed and torque will be limited. Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor.
Auto-tuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control does not work properly, if auto-tuning has not been performed. Perform auto-tuning, or set the motor parameters manually.
7
7-
19
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
The following causes are possible:
The deceleration time is too long
The following causes are possible:
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting (parameters C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the parameters are correct and there is no fault but the torque is insufficient, consider increasing the motor and inverter capacity.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit is reached (L7-01 to L7-04), the motor torque will be limited. This can lengthen the deceleration time. Check the L7- parameters to be sure that the torque limit values are suitable.
7
If the Motor Overheats
The following causes are possible:
The load is too large.
If the motor load is too large and the torque exceeds the motor’s rated torque, the motor may overheat. Either reduce the load or increase the acceleration/deceleration times. Also consider increasing the motor size.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will overheat if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to an acceptable value.
Auto-tuning has not been performed for vector control
The Vector control performance may not be optimal, if auto-tuning has not been performed. Perform auto-tuning, or set the motor parameters manually.
For induction motors alternatively the V/f control mode can be used.
7-
20
If Peripheral Devices are Influenced by the Starting or Running Inverter
The following solutions are possible:
•
Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to reduce the amount of transistor switching noise.
•
•
•
•
•
Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's input power terminals.
Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's motor terminals.
Use shielded motor cables or a conduit. Metal shields electrical noise.
Check the grounding of the Inverter and motor.
Separate main circuit wires from control circuit wires.
If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates When the Inverter is Running
The Inverter’s output is pulse modulated, i.e. the output voltage consists of high frequency pulses (PWM).
This high frequency signal causes a certain amount of leakage current which may cause the earth leakage breaker to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or higher, with an operating time of 0.1 s or more), and one, which incorporates high frequencies countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Inverters). Lowering the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) can also help, since the leakage current increases with the cable length.
If There is Mechanical Oscillation
Use the following information when there is mechanical vibration:
Oscillation and hunting occur with V/f control
The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine. Adjust parameters C4-01
(Torque Compensation Gain) and C4-02 (Torque Compensation Delay Time). Decrease C4-01 carefully in steps of 0.05 and/or increase C4-02.
Furthermore the Slip Compensation Delay Time (C3-02) can be increased or decreased.
Oscillation and hunting occur with Open Loop Vector control.
The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine. Adjust parameters C4-01
(Torque Compensation Gain), C4-02 (Torque Compensation Delay Time Parameter) and C3-02 (Slip Compensation Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain parameters and raise the delay time parameters.
If auto-tuning has not been performed, proper performance may not be achieved for Vector Control. Perform auto-tuning or set the motor parameters manually.
Oscillation and hunting occur with Closed Loop Vector control for IM and PM
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the speed control loop (Automatic Speed Regulator, ASR) by changing the C5- parameters. If the oscillation points overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated, increase the ASR Delay Time, and then readjust the ASR gains.
If auto-tuning has not been performed, proper performance may not be achieved for Closed Loop Vector Control. Perform auto-tuning or set the motor parameters manually.
7
7-
21
7
7-
22
8
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter
Maintenance and Inspection ...............................................8-2
Maintenance and Inspection
8
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
•
The motor should not vibrate or make unusual noises.
•
•
There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Inverter or motor.
The ambient temperature should be within the Inverter’s specifications.
•
•
The output current value shown in U1-03 should not be higher than the motor or the Inverter rated current for extended period of time.
The cooling fan in the Inverter should be operating normally.
Before attempting any maintenance checks, make sure that the three-phase power is disconnected. With power removed from the unit, the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes. The charge LED in the
Inverter will light red until the DC bus voltage is below 10VDC. To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged, measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter. Be sure not to touch terminals immediately after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock.
Table 8.1 Periodic Inspections
Item Inspection
External terminals
Mounting bolts connectors
Are all screws and bolts tight?
Are connectors tight?
Corrective Procedure
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Cooling fins
All PCBs
Cooling Fan(s)
Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the
PCBs?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 4 x 10
5
to 6 x 10
5
Pa
(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 4 x 10
5
to 6 x 10
5
Pa
(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Input Diodes
Output Transistors Power
Modules
DC bus capacitors
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the modules or components?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 4 x 10
5
to 6 x 10
5
Pa
(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor?
Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration, or has the total operating time exceeded 20,000 hours.
Check U1-40 for the elapsed cooling operation time.
Replace Cooling Fan
8-
2
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long time, and to prevent down time due to an unexpected failure, it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
The data indicated in the following table is to be used as a general guideline only. Periodic inspection standards vary depending on the Inverter’s installation environment conditions and usage. The Inverter’s suggested maintenance periods are noted below.
Cooling fan(s)
DC bus capacitor
Part
Soft charge contactor
DC bus fuse
Control power fuse
PCB capacitors
Table 8.2 Part Replacement Guidelines
Standard Replacement Period
2 to 3 years (20,000 hours)
5 years
–
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
Replace with new part.
(Determine need by inspection.)
Determine need by inspection.
10 years
5 years
Replace with new part.
Replace with new board.
(Determine need by inspection.)
Note: The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30
°C/86°F
Load factor: 80%
Operating rate: 12 hours per day
8
8-
3
Cooling Fan Replacement
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
If the Inverter is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure, the cooling fan can only be replaced by removing the Inverter from the enclosure.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan.
2. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows “1“ and when pull the fan out in the direction of arrow “2“.
3. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power connector.
4. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides in direction of arrows “3“ and remove the fan cover from the fan.
8
3
1
2
3
Power connector
Air flow direction
Fan cover
1
Fig 8.1 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less)
Mounting the Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction is correct (see figure above).
2. Connect the cables securely and place the connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Inverter heatsink.
8-
4
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More
The heatsink cooling fan is attached to the top of the heatsink inside the Inverter. The cooling fan(s) can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly.
2. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator/LED Monitor, and front cover from the
Inverter.
3. Remove the control PCB (if necessary) bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connector from the fan board positioned near the top of the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate drive board positioned at the back of the Inverter.
5. Remove the fan assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Inverter.
6. Remove the cooling fan(s) from the fan assembly.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching the new cooling fan(s), reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow direction faces the top of the
Inverter.
Control card
Control card bracket
Air flow direction
Fan Assembly
Connector
Gate driver
Fig 8.2 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 22 kW or More)
8
8-
5
Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card
The Terminal Card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the control wiring.
Removing the Terminal Card
1. Remove the terminal cover, Digital Operator/LED Monitor and front cover.
2. Remove the wires connected to FE and/or NC on the terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws on the left and right sides of the terminal card („1“) until they are free. It is not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are captive and self-rising.
4. Pull the terminal card out in the direction of the block arrow „2“.
Mounting the Terminal Card
Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal card and the control PCB properly meet at connector CN8 before insertion.
The connector pins may be damaged if the terminal card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct
Inverter operation.
8
1
2
Fig 8.3 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
IMPORTANT
Always confirm that the input power is removed and the Charge LED is off before removing or mounting the terminal card.
8-
6
9
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter.
Specifications by Model ......................................................9-2
Derating ..............................................................................9-6
AC Reactors for EN 12015 Compatibility............................9-8
EN 954-1 / EN81-1 Certificates...........................................9-9
9
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications are listed in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200V Class
Table 9.1 200 V Class Inverters
Model Number
CIMR-L7Z
Max. applicable motor output (kW)
*1
23P7
3.7
25P5
5.5
27P5
7.5
2011
11
2015
15
2018
18.5
2022
22
2030
30
2037
37
2045
45
2055
55
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current
(A)
Max. output voltage
(V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
7
17.5
10
25
14
33
20
49
27
64
33
80
40
96
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
(Proportional to input voltage.)
Up to 120Hz available by programing.
54
130
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
67
160
76
183
93
224
Rated input current (A)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
21 25 40 52 68 96
+ 10%, - 15%
115 156 176 220 269
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
Measures for power supply
DC reactor
12-pulse rectification
Optional
Not possible
Built In
Possible
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa standard motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's rated current is higher than the motor's rated current.
* 2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse-rectification.
9-
2
400 V Class
Table 9.2 400 V Class Inverters
Model Number
CIMR-L7Z
Max. applicable motor output (kW)
*1
43P7
3.7
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current
(A)
Max. output voltage
(V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
7
8.5
Rated input current (A) 10.2
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Allowable frequency fluctuation
Measures for power supply
DC reactor
12-phase rectification
44P0
4.0
9
11
13.2
45P5
5.5
12
14
17
47P5
7.5
15
18
4011
11
22
27
4015
15
28
34
4018
18.5
34
41
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
120 Hz max.
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
22
Optional
Not possible
32 41 49
+ 10%, - 15%
±5%
4022
22
40
48
58
4030
30
54
65
78
4037
37
67
80
96
Built In
Possible
4045
45
80
96
115
4055
55
106
128
154
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa standard motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's rated current is higher than the motor's rated current.
* 2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse-rectification.
9
9-
3
9
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V class Inverters.
Table 9.3 Common Specifications
Model Number
CIMR-L7Z
Specification
Control method
Carrier Frequency
Speed control range
Speed control accuracy
Speed control response
Torque limits
Torque accuracy
Frequency range
Frequency accuracy
(temperature characteristics)
Sine wave PWM
Closed Loop Vector control for IM and PM motors, Open Loop Vector control, V/f control
8 kHz higher carrier frequency possible with current derating (refer to
page 9-6, Carrier Frequency Derating
1:40 (V/f control)
1:100 (Open Loop Vector control)
1:1000 (Closed Loop Vector control)
± 3% (V/f control)
± 0.2% (Open Loop Vector control)
± 0.02% (Closed Loop Vector control)
(25 °C ± 10°C)
5 Hz (control without PG)
30 Hz (control with PG)
Provided (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings.) (Vector control)
± 5%
0.01 to 120 Hz
Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10
Analog references: ± 0.1% (25
°C to +40°C)
°C ±10°C)
Frequency setting resolution
Digital references: 0.01 Hz
Analog references: 0.025/50 Hz (11 bits plus sign)
Output frequency resolution
Overload capacity and maximum current
Frequency setting signal
Acceleration/Deceleration time
0.01 Hz
150% of rated output current for 30 sec.
0 to +10V
0.01 to 600.00 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration time settings)
Main control functions
Over torque/under torque detection, torque limits, 8-speed control (maximum), 4 acceleration and deceleration times, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, auto-tuning (rotational or stationary), dwell function, cooling fan ON/
OFF control, slip compensation, torque compensation, auto-restart after fault, DC braking for starting and stopping, automatic fault reset and parameter copy function, special Lift functions and sequences, short floor operation, rescue operation with light load direction search, machine data copy function (save in encoder memory)
Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Motor protection
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Stops at approximately 200% of rated output current.
Fuse blown protection
Overload protection
Overvoltage protection
Undervoltage protection
Stops for fuse blown.
OL2 fault at 150% of rated output current for 30 sec
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Cooling fin overheating
Stall prevention
Grounding protection
Charge indicator
Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration and running independently.
Protection by electronic circuits.
Glows when the main circuit DC voltage is approximately 10 VDC or more.
9-
4
Model Number
CIMR-L7Z
Protective structure
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Storage temperature
Application site
Altitude
Vibration
Safe Disable
Harmonics
Table 9.3 Common Specifications
Specification
Enclosed wall-mounted type (IP20): All models
Enclosed wall-mounted type (NEMA 1): 18.5 kW or less (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Open chassis type (IP00): 22 kW or more (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
-–10
°C to 45°C, max. 60°C with derating (refer to
page 9-6, Ambient Temperature Derating
)
95% max. (with no condensation)
- 20
°C to + 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
1000 m, max. 3000 m with derating (refer to
).
10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s
2
max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s
2
max
Hardware Baseblock meets EN954-1 safety category 3, stop category 0
EN81-1 conform one motor contactor solution possible
EN 12015 can be fulfilled with optiona AC reactor
9
9-
5
Derating
Ambient Temperature Derating
If the inverter ambient temperature is higher than 45°C, an output current derating like shown in
be considered.
10 0
8 0
6 0
4 0
2 0
0
0 10 2 0 3 0 4 0
Temperature (°C)
50 6 0
Fig 9.1 Ambient Temperature Derating
9
Carrier Frequency Derating
If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory default value, an output current derating like shown in
Output current (%)
100% Rated Current
3 minutes 50% ED
125%
200V Class 22kW or less
400V Class 22kW or less
100%
75%
200V Class 30 to 55kW
400V Class 30 to 55kW
Carrier frequency
0
2 5 8 10 15
Fig 9.2 Carrier Frequency Derating
(kHz)
9-
6
Altitude Derating
The standard inverter specification is valid for altitudes up to 1000m above sea level. If the inverter is used in regions with higher altitude, the allowable input voltage, output current and ambient temperature are derated as shown below.
Altitude
1000 m or less
1000 to 2000 m
2000 to 3000 m
Table 9.4 Altitude derating
Input Voltage
100%
Output Current
100%
90% of standard spec.
80% of standard spec.
90% of standard spec.
80% of standard spec.
Max. Ambient Temperature
100%
95% of standard spec.
90% of standard spec.
IMPORTANT
The maximum altitude is 3000m above sea level.
Example
The following example shows the derating of a 400V, 7.5 kW, inverter (L7Z47P5)
Altitude
1000 m or less
1000 to 2000 m
2000 to 3000 m
Table 9.5 Altitude derating example
Input Voltage
480 VAC or less
Output Current
18 A or less
432 VAC or less
384 VAC or less
16.2 A or less
14.4 A or less
Ambient Temperature
-10 to 45 °C
-10 to 43 °C
-10 to 41 °C
9
9-
7
9
AC Reactors for EN 12015 Compatibility
The following table shows the AC reactors which have to be applied in order to fulfill the requirements of the
EN 12015.
Table 9.6 AC Chokes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
AC Reactor Code Description
L7Z44P0 L7Z-PUZ44P0-CE Reactor III 44P0 3.7kW (7mH-13A)
L7Z45P5 L7Z-PUZ45P5-CE Reactor III 45P5 5.5kW (5.10mH-17A)
L7Z47P5 L7Z-PUZ47P5-CE Reactor III 47P5 7.5kW (4.35mH-22A)
L7Z4011 L7Z-PUZ4011-CE Reactor III 4011 11kW (3mH-32A)
L7Z4015 L7Z-PUZ44P0-CE Reactor III 4015 15kW (2.34mH-41A)
L7Z4018 L7Z-PUZ4015-CE Reactor III 4018 18.5kW (1.95mH-49A)
L7Z4022 L7Z-PUZ4018-CE Reactor III 4022 22kW (1.65mH-58A)
L7Z4030 L7Z-PUZ4022-CE Reactor III 4030 30kW (1.23mH-78A)
L7Z4037 L7Z-PUZ4037-CE Reactor III 4037 37kW (1mH-96A)
L7Z4045 L7Z-PUZ4045-CE Reactor III 4045 45kW (0.83mH-115A)
L7Z4055 L7Z-PUZ4055-CE Reactor III 4055 55kW (0.62mH-154A)
L7Z23P7 L7Z-PUZ23P7-CE Reactor III 23P7 3.7kW (2.28mH-21A)
L7Z25P5 L7Z-PUZ25P5-CE Reactor III 25P5 5.5kW (5.10mH-17A)
L7Z27P5 L7Z-PUZ27P5-CE Reactor III 27P5 7.5kW (1.20mH-40A)
L7Z2011 L7Z-PUZ2011-CE Reactor III 2011 11kW (0.92mH-52A)
L7Z2015 L7Z-PUZ2015-CE Reactor III 2015 15kW (0.70mH-68A)
L7Z2018 L7Z-PUZ018-CE Reactor III 2018 18.5kW (0.50mH-96A)
L7Z2022 L7Z-PUZ2022-CE Reactor III 2022 22kW (0.31mH-156A)
L7Z2030 L7Z-PUZ2030-CE Reactor III 2030 30kW (1.23mH-78A)
L7Z2037 L7Z-PUZ2037-CE Reactor III 2037 37kW (0.27mH-176A)
L7Z2045 L7Z-PUZ2045-CE Reactor III 2045 45kW (0.22mH-220A)
L7Z2055 L7Z-PUZ2055-CE Reactor III 2055 55kW (0.18mH-269A)
Weight
(kg)
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
C
(mm)
D
(mm)
E
(mm)
F
(mm)
5.2
150 90 150 75 54
6.4
180 90 193 90 63
9.8
180 100 193 90 83
14.5
237 120 230 130 90
17.5
237 130 230 130 100 9
21 240 142 230 130 110 9
22.1
240 142 230 130 110 9
26.8
240 147 250 130 115 9
7
9
7
7
34.9
310 160 235 160 125 9
43.7
350 165 260 180 130 9
55 378 165 300 200 130 13
5.9
180 90 193 90 63 7
7.4
180 95 193 90 63
9.6
180 100 193 90 83
14.2
240 120 230 130 90
14.8
240 120 230 130 90
9
9
7
7
18.6
240 130 215 130 100 9
25.2
247 150 215 130 115 9
32.4
282 155 260 160 120 9
38.4
295 152 300 160 115 11
46.9
290 162 330 160 125 11
53 290 172 330 160 135 11
D
A
E
B
C
F
9-
8
EN 954-1 / EN81-1 Certificates
9
9-
9
9
9-
10
9
9-
11
9
9-
12
9
9-
13
9
9-
14
10
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also provides lists of constants.
Inverter Application Precautions .......................................10-2
Motor Application Precautions ..........................................10-4
User Constants .................................................................10-5
Inverter Application Precautions
Selection
Observe the following precautions when selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current can flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a phase shifting capacitor. Excessive peak current can destroy the converter section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor to improve the power supply power factor.
If a thyristor converter, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
Power supply
(kVA)
DC or AC reactor required
DC or AC reactor not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Install the Inverter in a clean location where it is not subjected to oil mist, dust, and other contaminants, or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not exceed the allowable temperature. Do not install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other vertical surface.
10
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Upper Limits
The maximum output frequency can be set up to 120Hz. Setting the output frequency too high can damage the machine. So pay attention to the mechanical system and observe required limits for the output frequency.
DC Injection Braking
If the DC Injection Braking Current or the Braking Time are set too high the motor can overheat what can damage the motor
10-
2
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD
2
/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during acceleration or deceleration, it might be necessary to increase the acceleration or deceleration time.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
Handling
Observe the following precautions during wiring or maintenance of an Inverter.
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and control sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
If a magnetic contactor is installed in the power supply line, do not exceed one start per hour. Switching more often can damage the inrush current prevention circuit.
Maintenance and Inspections
After turning OFF the main circuit power supply it can take several minutes before the DC bus is discharged completely. The CHARGE LED, indicating if the DC bus is charged, glows above a voltage of 10VDC.
10
10-
3
10
10-
4
Motor Application Precautions
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor.
Low Speed Ranges
If a standard cooled motor is used at low speed the cooling effects are diminished. If the motor is used in constant torque applications in low speed area the motor may overheat. If full torque is required at low speed continuously an externally cooled motor must be used.
Installation Withstand Voltage
If the inverter is used with an input voltage of 440 V or higher and long motor cables, voltage spikes at the motor terminals may occur which can damage the motor windings. Please ensure that the motor insulation class is sufficient.
Noise
The noise generated in the motor depends on the carrier frequency. The higher the setting, the less is the generated noise.
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select an appropriate
Inverter according to the maximum current of the motor.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. These motors are often equipped with capacitors Any capacitor directly connected to the inverter output may damage the Inverter.
User Constants
The factory settings of each parameter are given in the following table. They are for a 200 V Class Inverter with 3.7 kW.
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
A1-00 Language selection for Digital Operator display 0 b1-01 b1-02 b1-06 b1-08 b2-08 b4-01 b4-02 b6-01
A1-01 Parameter access level
A1-02 Control method selection
A1-03 Initialize
A1-04 Password
A1-05 Password setting
A2-01 to
A2-32
User specified parameters
Reference source selection
RUN command source selection
Control input scan
Run command selection in programming modes
Magnetic flux compensation volume
Timer function ON-delay time
Timer function OFF-delay time
Dwell frequency at start b6-02 b6-03
Dwell time at start
Dwell frequency at stop b6-04 Dwell time at stop
C1-01 Acceleration time 1
C1-02 Deceleration time 1
C1-03 Acceleration time 2
C1-04 Deceleration time 2
C1-05 Acceleration time 3
C1-06 Deceleration time 3
C1-07 Acceleration time 4
C1-08 Deceleration time 4
C1-09 Emergency stop time
C1-10 Accel/decel time setting unit
C1-11 Accel/decel time switching frequency
C2-01 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
C2-02 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
C2-03 S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
C2-04 S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
C2-05 S-curve Characteristic time below leveling speed
C3-01 Slip compensation gain
C3-02 Slip compensation delay time
C3-03 Slip compensation limit
C3-04 Slip compensation selection during regeneration
C3-05 Output voltage limit operation selection
C4-01 Torque compensation gain
1
0.0 Hz
0.5 sec.
0.5 sec.
0.5 sec.
0.5 sec.
0.50 sec.
1.0
2000 msec
200%
1
1
1.00
0%
0.0 sec.
0.0 sec.
0.0 Hz
1
1
0
1
0.0 sec.
0.0 Hz
0.0 sec.
10.0 sec.
0
0
2
0
0
–
1.5 s
C4-02 Torque compensation delay time constant
C4-03 Starting torque compensation (FWD)
C4-04 Starting torque compensation (REV)
C4-05 Starting torque compensation time constant
200 msec
*1
0.0%
0.0%
10 msec
10
10-
5
10
No.
C5-01 ASR proportional (P) gain 1
C5-02 ASR integral (I) time 1
C5-03 ASR proportional (P) gain 2
C5-04 ASR integral (I) time 2
C6-11 d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07
C5-06 ASR delay time
C5-07 ASR switching frequency
C5-08 ASR integral (I) limit
C5-09 ASR proportional (P) gain 3
C5-10 ASR integral (I) time 3
C5-15 ASR gain (P) during encoder offset tuning
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection
C6-06 PWM method selection
Carrier frequency for PM motor control
Frequency reference 1
Frequency reference 2
Frequency reference 3
Frequency reference 4
Frequency reference 5
Frequency reference 6
Frequency reference 7 d1-08 d1-09
Frequency reference 8
Frequency reference 9 Vn d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13
Frequency reference 10 V
1
Frequency reference 11 V
2
Frequency reference 12 V
3
Frequency reference 13 V r
Frequency reference 14 Inspection d1-14 d1-17 d1-18 d1-19 d6-03 d6-06
Jog frequency reference / Leveling speed
Speed priority selection
Second motor speed
Field forcing function selection
Field forcing function Limit
E1-01 Input voltage setting
E1-04 Max. output frequency (FMAX)
E1-05 Max. output voltage (VMAX)
E1-06 Base frequency (FA)
E1-07 Mid. output frequency (FB)
E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)
E1-09 Min. output frequency (FMIN)
E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
E1-13 Base voltage (VBASE)
E2-01 Motor rated current
E2-02 Motor rated slip
E2-03 Motor no-load current
E2-04 Number of motor poles
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance
E2-06 Motor leak inductance
Name
10-
6
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
25 Hz
4.00 Hz
1
0.00 Hz
0
400%
*1
50.0 Hz
*1
50.0 Hz
*1
*1
*1
*1
0.0 V
*1
*1
*1
4 poles
*1
*1
Factory
Setting
40
*1
0.5
*1
20
*1
0.5
*1
0.004 msec
0.0 Hz
400%
40.00
0.500 sec.
5.00
1
0
4
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
Setting
No.
Name
E2-07 Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
E2-08 Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
E2-09 Monitor mechanical losses
E2-10 Motor iron loss for torque compensation
E2-11 Motor rated output power
E2-12 Motor iron saturation coefficient 3
E3-01 Motor 2 control mode selection
E3-02 Motor 2 Max. output frequency (FMAX)
E3-03 Motor 2 Max. output voltage (VMAX)
E3-04 Motor 2 Base frequency (FA)
E3-05 Motor 2 Mid. output frequency (FB)
E3-06 Motor 2 Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)
E3-07 Motor 2 Min. output frequency (FMIN)
E3-08 Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
E4-01 Motor 2 rated current
E4-02 Motor 2 rated slip
E4-03 Motor 2 no-load current
E2-04 Motor 2 number of motor poles
E4-05 Motor 2 line-to-line resistance
E4-06 Motor 2 leak inductance
E4-07 Motor 2 iron saturation coefficient 1
E5-02 PM motor rated power
E5-03 PM motor rated current
E5-04 PM motor number of poles
E5-06 PM motor d-axis inductance
E5-07 PM motor q-axis inductance
E5-09 PM Motor voltage constant
F1-01 PG constant
F1-02 Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)
F1-03 Operation selection at overspeed (OS)
F1-04 Operation selection at deviation
F1-05 PG rotation
F1-06 PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
F1-08 Overspeed detection level
F1-09 Overspeed detection delay time
F1-10 Excessive speed deviation detection level
F1-11 Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
F1-12 Number of PG teeth 1
F1-13 Number of PG teeth 2
F1-14 PG open-circuit detection delay time
F1-18 DV3 fault detection selection
F1-19 DV4 fault detection selection
F1-21 Absolute encoder resolution
F1-22 Magnet position offset
F1-24 PGO Detection level at stop
F1-25 Encoder copy function selection
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
4
*1
4 poles
*1
*1
*1
10%
0.5 sec.
0
0
1.0 sec.
1
1024
2
1024
1
1
3
0
1
115%
0.0 sec.
60 deg
20%
0
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Factory
Setting
0.50
0.75
0.0%
*1
*1
1.30
0
50.00 Hz
400.0 V
50.00 Hz
*1
Setting
10
10-
7
10
No.
Name
F1-26 Encoder copy write permission
F4-01 Channel 1 monitor selection
F4-02 Channel 1 gain
F4-03 Channel 2 monitor selection
F4-04 Channel 2 gain
F4-05 Channel 1 output monitor bias
F4-06 Channel 2 output monitor bias
F4-07 Analog output signal level for channel 1
F4-08 Analog output signal level for channel 2
F5-01 Channel 1 output selection
F5-02 Channel 2 output selection
F5-03 Channel 3 output selection
F5-04 Channel 4 output selection
F5-05 Channel 5 output selection
F5-06 Channel 6 output selection
F5-07 Channel 7 output selection
F5-08 Channel 8 output selection
F5-09 DO-08 output mode selection
F6-01 Operation selection after communications error
F6-02 Input level of external error from Communications Option Card
F6-03 Stopping method for external error from Communications Option Card
F6-04 Trace sampling from Communications Option Card
F6-05 Current monitor unit selection
F6-06 Torque reference/torque limit selection from communications option card
H1-01 Terminal S3 function selection
H1-02 Terminal S4 function selection
H1-03 Terminal S5 function selection
H1-04 Terminal S6 function selection
H1-05 Terminal S7 function selection
H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 function selection
H2-02 Terminal M3-M4 function selection
H2-03 Terminal M5-M6 function selection
H3-01 Frequency reference AI-14B CH1signal level selection
H3-02 Frequency reference AI-14B CH1 input gain
H3-03 Frequency referenceAI-14B CH1 input bias
H3-04 AI-14B CH3 signal level selection
H3-05 AI-14B CH3 function selection
H3-06 AI-14B CH3 input gain
H3-07 AI-14B CH3 input bias
H3-08 AI-14B CH2 signal level selection
H3-09 AI-14B CH2 function selection
H3-10 AI-14B CH2 input gain
H3-11 AI-14B CH2 input bias
H3-12 Analog input filter time constant for the AI-14B
H3-15 Terminal A1 function selection
H3-16 Terminal A1 input gain
H3-17 Terminal A1 input bias
L1-01 Motor protection selection
10-
8
Factory
Setting
0
6
0
40
41
84
81
83
F
0
80
0
0
0
1
0
1
6
37
0F
0F
2
4
0
1
2
100.0%
3
50.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0
0
100.0%
0.0%
0.03 sec.
0
100.0%
0.0%
1
100.0%
0.0%
0
2
100.0%
0.0%
0
3
Setting
No.
Name
L1-02 Motor protection time constant
L2-05 Undervoltage detection level
L2-11 Battery Voltage
L3-01 Stall prevention selection during accel
L3-02 Stall prevention level during accel
L3-05 Stall prevention selection during running
L3-06 Stall prevention level during running
L4-01 Speed agreement detection level
L4-02 Speed agreement detection width
L4-03 Speed agreement detection level (+/-)
L4-04 Speed agreement detection width (+/-)
L5-01 Number of auto restart attempts
L5-02 Auto restart operation selection
L5-05 Under voltage fault (UV1) restart selection
L6-01 Torque detection selection 1
L6-02 Torque detection level 1
L6-03 Torque detection time 1
L6-04 Torque detection selection 2
L6-05 Torque detection level 2
L6-06 Torque detection time 2
L7-01 Forward drive torque limit
L7-02 Reverse drive torque limit
L7-03 Forward regenerative torque limit
L7-04 Reverse regenerative torque limit
L7-06 Torque limit time constant
L7-07 Torque Limit Operation during accel/decel
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level n2-01 n2-02 n5-01 n5-02 n5-03 n5-05 n8-29 n8-30 n8-32 n8-33 n8-35 n8-46 n9-60
L8-03 Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm
L8-07 Output open-phase protection selection
L8-09 Ground protection selection
L8-10 Cooling fan control selection
L8-11 Cooling fan control delay time
L8-12 Ambient temperature
L8-18 Soft CLA selection
L8-20 LF detection time
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) gain
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant
Feed forward control selection
Motor Accel Time
Feed forward proportional gain
Motor acceleration time tuning
Current regulator q-axis P gain
Current regulator q-axis I time
Current regulator d-axis P gain
Current regulator d-axis I gain
Magnet position detection method
Inductance measurement current level
A/D converter start delay time
Factory
Setting
1.0 min
60 sec.
45 °C
1
0.2 sec.
1
0
3
2
0
150%
0.1 sec.
300%
300%
300%
300%
200 ms
0
75 °C
*1
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
2
0
1
0
150%
0.1 sec.
190 V
0V
1
150%
1
150%
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
1.00
50 msec
1
0.178 sec.
1.00
0
1000 rad/sec.
10.0 ms
1000 rad/sec.
10.0 ms
5
10.0%
0.0 µsec.
Setting
10
10-
9
10
No.
Name o2-04 o2-05 o2-06 o2-07 o2-08 o2-09 o2-10 o2-12 o1-01 o1-02 o1-03 o1-04 o1-05 o2-01 o2-02 o2-03
Monitor selection
Monitor selection after power up
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Setting unit for frequency parameters related to V/f characteristics
LCD Display contrast adjustment
LOCAL / REMOTE key enable/disable
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
User parameter initial value kVA selection
Frequency reference setting method selection
Operation selection when digital operator / LED monitor is disconnected
Cumulative operation time setting
Cumulative operation time selection
Initialize Mode
Fan operation time setting
Fault trace initialize o2-15 o3-01
“No of Travels” monitor initialize
Copy function selection o3-02 Read permission selection
S1-01 Zero speed level at stop
S1-02 DC injection braking current at start
S1-03 DC injection braking current at stop
S1-04 DC injection braking time at start
S1-05 DC injection braking time at stop
S1-06 Brake release delay time
S1-07 Brake close delay time
S1-14 SE2 detection delay time
S1-15 SE3 detection delay time
S1-16 Run delay time
S1-17 DC injection current gain at regenerative operation
S1-18 DC injection current gain at motoring operation
S1-19 Output contactor open delay time
S1-20 Zero servo gain
S1-21 Zero servo completion width
S1-22 Starting torque compensation increase time
S1-23 Torque compensation gain during lowering
S1-24 Torque compensation bias during raising
S1-25 Torque compensation bias during lowering
S1-26 Dwell speed at start reference
S1-27 Door zone speed level
S1-28 SE1 detection selection
S1-29 Torque compensation fade out level
S1-30 Torque compensation fade out time
S1-31 Torque limit time at stop
S2-01 Motor rated speed
S2-02 Slip compensation gain in motoring mode
S2-03 Slip compensation gain in regenerative mode
S2-05 Slip compensation torque detection delay time
10-
10
Factory
Setting
6
0.10
200 msec
200 msec
0.10 sec.
100%
20%
0.10 sec.
5
0
0
0.5 Hz
50%
50%
0.40 sec
0.60
0.20
2
0 hr.
0
0
0
0
0 hr.
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
1
0
10
500 msec
1.000
0.0%
0.0%
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0
0.0 Hz
1000 msec
0 msec
1380 rpm
0.7
1.0
1.0 sec.
Setting
No.
Name
S2-06 Slip compensation torque detection time
S2-07 Slip compensation delay time
S3-01 Short floor operation selection
S3-03 Inspection deceleration ramp time
S3-04 Nominal/Leveling speed detection level
S3-05 Nominal speed for short floor calculation
S3-06 Light load direction search for rescue operation
S3-07 Light load search time
S3-08 Output phase order
S3-09 Frequency reference missing (FRL) fault detection
S3-10 Light load search frequency
S3-11 Rescue operation torque limit
S3-12 Base block restart selection
S3-13 Traction sheave diameter
S3-14 Roping
S3-15 Gear Ratio
S3-16 Over acceleration detection level
S3-17 Over acceleration deceleration time constant
S3-18 Over acceleration detection method selection
S3-19 Inspection speed upper limit
S3-20 Short floor minimum constant speed time
S3-21 Distance calculation acceleration time gain
S3-22 Distance calculation deceleration time gain
S3-24 Light load direction search method
T1-01 Autotuning mode selection
T1-02 Motor output power
T1-03 Motor rated voltage
T1-04 Motor rated current
T1-05 Motor base frequency
T1-06 Number of motor poles
T1-07 Motor base speed
T1-08 Number of PG pulses
T1-09 Motor no-load current
T2-01 Motor output power
T2-02 Motor base frequency
T2-03 Motor rated voltage
T2-04 Motor rated current
T2-05 Motor pole number
T2-08 Motor voltage constant
T2-09 Number of PG pulses
T2-10 Motor voltage constant calculation selection
*1. The factory setting depends on the inverter model and the control method.
Factory
Setting
0.5 sec.
1
3.00 Hz
100%
0
400 mm
2
1.000
1.5 m/s²
200 msec
0
0.0 sec.
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0
1.0 sec.
0
0.05 sec.
0
25.0 Hz
0.0 sec.
150.0%
150.0%
0
0
*1
*1
*1
60.0 Hz
4 poles
1450 r/min
1024
E2-03 value
*1
1750 rpm
*1
*1
4
*1
2048
1
Setting
10
10-
11
10
10-
12
Stiahnuť
Verejný odkaz bol aktualizovaný
Verejný odkaz na váš chat bol aktualizovaný. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Verejný odkaz na dokument
Reklama